Home

Fujitsu V14 User's Manual

1. S ATLAS Main Window w F Y amp amp E g Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Add the Word YF EJ Add Word RR EJ Eind Delete Word a EJ Extract All WS EJ Add All Ef JE Add Word 2 Set the Japanese English and Part of Speech as follows and click the Settings button Part of Speech JE Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0001 Japanese IT 2021y at ID am Enter Japanese English IIT Professional a Enter English Part of Speech Japanese English Non Noun 3 Select Noun Verb an C Verb C Adjective Adjective a C Adjective C Verb Adverb f Adverb Unit f Init Particle f Preposition 4 Click E __ _ 3 Click Add JE Noun Noun JE gt User dictionary0001 Japanese Noun IT 707r English Noun IT Professional Noun Plural Form f Regular Noun Singular and Plural Uncountable Plural C Trregular Noun Meaning C Human Animal Organization Place Time C Concrete Object Others Sometimes Translated as Adjective M 4 Before J gt Adjective ex 20488 metallic tool 2 Before Noun gt Adjective ex B gt metallic element Enelish Adjective Add JE Add for Both Close Help 2 uononpo u 28 Introduction 4 When a
2. n a Introduction Investigation analysis Project Cy Wo m Presentation Microsoft PowerPoint Design y Home inset Designa Animations SlideShow Review View Sample making ad onne vee Environme nt General 2 Translate Translate Translation Add Find Delet A Al Selected Editor Detail Settings nal Translate _ Transiate dit Environmeni it Settings Dictionary E Helg CE 22 x HUT ILE RK As the English and Japanese text have different numbers of characters the translated text may have an incorrect layout If this occurs change the font size or layout using PowerPoint 41 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 1 2 Flow of Translation Using Translation Memory 42 3 When translating or creating manuals and technical documents using ATLAS translation memory increases translation work efficiency and helps maintain consistent translation quality For an overview of translation memory refer to Utilizing Translation Memory Translation Memory in Introduction Storing Translation Memory Original and Translation stored as pairs of translation examples are stored in ATLAS User Dictionaries as translation memory data Translation memory data can be stored using Translation Editor or Excel Also you can add multiple translation memory data items at one time by preparing a text file tra txt you want to register beforehand OK RIDE IN LET Specifying
3. 205 Sentence without Subject 214 Sentences Including Multi part of speech WVOlKOS E J a pi ec cet 8 ete tas ec Odd E Siete kee 242 Setting a Common Folder Common Dictionary 160 Setup of Application Translation 79 FFA E Scat co a ations Raw acend emcee ate 208 Shortcut key Key Type Translation 116 Shortcut Key Mail Translation 110 Shortcut Keys List 05 266 Shortening sentences EJ 240 Shortening sentences JE 246 SHOULD we neha etre faces anak nce dew Woe a wa a 209 Single to double byte conversion 66 SNOVA ee edie te ota we tea elect tre Garena ee 252 Sometimes Translated as Adjective 142 Sometimes Translated as Adverb 144 Sometimes Translated as Noun 143 144 Spelling Check wise ace ee sas Raw es ae 64 Spelling Check Mark Brackets 212 218 Standard Dictionary 005 122 Start Key Key Type Translation 116 Starting ATLAS kerero bed oo aw eee 4 Startup GUIE 4 oo ike heated A hans 36 Stopping Words Not Usable 152 Store Translation Memory 191 Store Translation Memory Excel 194 Store Translation Memory File 193 Store Translation Memory Text Alignment Support Tool 199 292 Se WE ac cde eta heehee eawete eae 213 LVM eed crew enea weieech arte tek nae 205 SVE eg reaa che
4. 219 SliNsoYy Uoe sues 199g BulAsiUudY 104 SyuUIH s nbiuyoa peoueApY Advanced Techniques 2 2 Entering Text into an Add All Text File _ Follow the instructions below to enter text into an add all text file The meanings of the symbols in the instructions below are as follows One or more tab s or space s delimits items Line feed Indicates the end of one word Enter one word on one line Keyword for addition Be sure to enter it when entering a corresponding item Item omissible or sometimes omissible eoo gt Add the extension txt to the text when saving it Hints gt Enter one word on one line Information relating to one word should not overflow to an other line s Be sure to delimit items with one or more tab s or space s gt Both 1 byte and 2 byte codes can be entered gt Enter a Japanese verb or adjective in the form used when it is placed at the end of the sentence gt For Japanese notation up to 80 characters can be entered including spaces between words gt For English notation up to 123 characters can be added including spaces between words A capitalized letter A to Z however is counted as 2 characters For an idiom or irregular verb noun the maximum number of characters may decrease depending on the number of characters of the form E JE Noun Noun Adjective Format 42 55 44 A Japanese Noun A English Noun A English plural form nu
5. Changing Display Tiling 1 Click the Display Horizontally button 7 or Display Vertically button F4 SS ATLAS Acrobat Translation Ef SS ATLAS Acrobat Translation DE fa SOW MA Ass fa Ce He Aug FAK RAV EDU DLE To FAS HAVASU y OLE To Click the Open button The window display changes accordingly Changing the Font Size Style 1 Click the Font Settings button A 2 Change the font size and or style and then click OK button Font style Regular A J Small Fonts System Japanese 8 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 3 3 Translating a Word File a i The following explains how to translate Word files There are two ways to translate Word files translate the entire document or translate selected ranges In addition you can change how translation results translated text are displayed M ATLAS Tab and ATLAS Toolbar ATLAS Tab for Word 2007 a All Sentence Translation h Align Right and Left j Save as Pair Translates the entire 1 Align Top and Bottom Links original document at once Displays the original text and document and translation aligned vertically or translation and saves b Selected Sentence horizontally Translation Translates the selected text g Find Delete Word Searches for words in a translation k ATLAS Help Displays the help f Add Word dictionary Lets you change the menu for application Adds words to a priority of a translation and delete tr
6. 4 Click the Yes button when the remove confirmation message appears For Windows Vista If the User Account Control dialog box appears confirm that the action it displays is what you want and then click Allow ATLAS is removed 2 4 E Managing Dictionaries on gt Translation Server gt This section describes the required settings and operations to manage disctionaries using the Translation Server lt 2 __ _ Starting with ATLAS V14 translation via server connection is no longer available Even if you login as an anonymous user dictionaries are not available on the Translation Server xlpueddy E 1 About Translation Server SST By introducing the Translation Server you can upload download dictionaries to from the Translation Server This facilitates unification of the translation quality through sharing of dictionaries The following Translation Server can be connected with ATLAS V14 on Network Accela BizLingo V3 0 gt User Standard Dictionary Dictionary Techncal Dictionary Translation Server Download the Upload the Dictionary User Dictionary Network Client Client Client l User User User Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary 2 5 Appendix E 2 Configuring Settings for Connecting to the Server This section describes settings for connecting to the Translation Server Hints gt Server Dict
7. User dictionaryOU01 2005 04 25 10 49 C Documents and Settings User dictionaryO002 2005 04 25 10 49 C Documents and Settings Help lt gt 3 Click the Browse button to specify the folder restore source folder where the backed up user dictionary folder exists and then click the OK button Specifies the folder path Folder a ee q 1 Select restore source folder 238 Chapter 3 Managing Data of User Dictionaries 4 Click the Run button to select the dictionary you want to restore from the Select dictionary list in the Restore the user dictionary dialog box Restore the user dictionary 1 Select the dictionary Specify restore folder D backup Specify folder Select dictionary Dictionary Name Most recent backup resets Most recent backup Japanese dictionary file dictionary file 2 Cli ck User dictionary0001 C Documents and Settings User dictionaryO002 C Documents and Settings ae im 25 10 49 Hee A v A prompt appears asking whether to restore the dictionary 5 Click the Yes button to restore it A progress bar is displayed and a message appears when the restore operation is completed 6 Click the Close button Hints gt When restore is executed the restored dictionary file is copied to the work folder If there is insufficient working space or for some other reason the file cannot be copied the restore c
8. 63 2 9 Checking Spelling Errors Spelling Check 0 0 00 eee eee 64 2 10 Exporting Undefined Words to an add all text file Export Undefined Word 65 2 11 Changing Characters Convert 0 0 c cece eee eee 66 2 12 Formatting Translated Text Translated Sentence Format 67 2 13 Marking a Translated Word from a Dictionary other than the Standard Dictionary Dictionary of Origin Marks 68 2 14 Searching for and Replacing a Text String Find 69 2 15 Selecting a Translated Word Used for Further Translation Change Word 72 2 16 Specifying Parts of Speech for EJ Translation 00005 73 2 17 Reading Sentences in the Translation Editor 005 74 2 18 Printing the Translation Results 0 0 0 cc eee 76 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation 78 3 1 Preparation Setup of Application Translation 00000 e eee 79 3 2 Translating by Acrobat Adobe Reader 0c eee eee 83 S20 Translating a Word File s asi os he Ae en ee eee a ahead GA 88 3 4 Translating an Xcel Pile lt 2scwcwe at homdd wetted iced het as saew ee he 95 3 5 Translating a PowerPoint File 0 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee 98 Chapter 4 Basic Operation of Clipboard Translation 101 4 1 Clipboard Translation dialog box 0 cee eee 101 4 2 Hiding Clipboard Translation dialog box
9. 7 Select the registration direction and the dictionary to which you want to add words and click the Add All button Add All Select Adding Direction C Dictionary Name User dictionary0001 i geecccccesssescsssscssccesssssssssssssesesseseees Add All File E Documents and Settings Administrator Lot 2 Both directions Status File C Documents and Settings Administrator Loc m 1 Select a dictionary Message an Entered words are added to the dictionary collectively The registration result is displayed in the Message box of the Add All dialog box To display the log of the registration result with a text editor click the Display results button Hints gt You can use the Entry Words Support dialog box only when adding all words from Excel 2 Click LIUse neip 230 amp 3 Managing Data of User Dictionaries The following explains how to extract data from multiple User Dictionaries by specifying a specific condition and merge them in a dictionary This chapter also explains how to rebuild user dictionaries to speed up translation and how to back up and restore user dictionaries 3 1 Extracting Data from User Dictionaries Extract Dictionary Data You can extract words or translation memory items from User Dictionaries and convert them into a format an MRG file to allow merging the dictionary data 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and select
10. FB y Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Manipulate dictionary on server or client Ri Dictionary Management A Configure Server Connection 2 Click the Acquire List button in the ATLAS Dictionary Management dialog box Hints gt If an error message appears ATLAS is not connected to the server Perform the steps described under E 2 Configuring Settings for Connecting to the Server on page 276 Then click the Acquire List button in the ATLAS Dictionary Management window xlpueddy 281 Appendix 3 Select dictionaries to be downloaded from the List of Server and click the Download button Multiple User Dictionaries can be selected Server List of Server Dictionary Type if Acquire List 255314 Technical Dictionary 04 25 201 E T ET Basic Sample 4675 User Dictionary 03 11 20 FARA User Dictionary 05 24 201 Set Schedule FFAS HS 0002 User Dictionary 12 31 194 n T User dictionary0001 User Dictionary a a 1 Select a dictionary 5 LogViewer _e to be downloaded All Dictionaries 30 Basic Dictionary 1 Technical Dictionaries 25 User Dictionaries 4 Acquire List of Server Dictionaries Automatically Next Time Download Lieni 2 Click List of Client Dictionary Type Modified New Standard Dictionary Standard Dictionary 03 28 2006 C Import User dictionary0001 User Dictionary 06 05 2006 1 4 ifthe dialog b
11. In case of Acrobat 8 Acrobat 7 Adobe Reader 7 Acrobat 6 Adobe Reader 6 1 2 3 4 Select Preferences from the Edit menu Click Startup from the list on the left of the dialog that appears Uncheck the box for Use Only Certified Plug ins Click OK Acrobat 5 1 2 3 4 Select Preferences General from the Edit menu Click Options from the list on the left of the dialog that appears Uncheck the box for Use Only Certified Plug ins Click OK Adobe Acrobat Reader 5 1 Select Preferences from the Edit menu 2 Click Options in the list on the left side of the dialog box that appears 81 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 3 Uncheck the box for Use Only Certified Plug ins 4 Click OK Ceo Translation of PDF documents may not be possible for documents whose security does not permit setting or browsing E Layout Translation All security features except Printing must be set to Allowed m Page Translation Selected Sentence Translation The following security features must be set to Allowed Acrobat 7 and Acrobat 6 Content Copying or Extraction Acrobat 5 Content Copying or Extraction Check Acrobat security settings as described below e Adobe Reader 7 Acrobat 7 Adobe Reader 6 Acrobat 6 Select Document properties Security from the File menu e Acrobat 5 Select Document Security from the File menu then click Display Setting
12. T Administrator Oo S amp O Upload Download Download Common Folder Common Dictionary A cI O o enero aa User User Common Dictionary B Download Download O O User User Network Environment 157 Basics E Using a Common Dictionary This section describes how to use common dictionaries Be sure to review this section before using a common dictionary 1 Create and set up a Common rus Folder p Create a Common folder and then ze specify the location of the Common Administrator Folder in ATLAS The location of the Common Folder must be set in all PCs that use Common Folder 4 common dictionaries see page 160 anus User User 2 Create and upload a common dictionary Administrator only Create a common dictionary and upload it Only the administrator of the common dictionary performs this operation Administrator see page 161 and page 163 Download the common dictionary from the Common Folder The downloaded common dictionary can only be used for reference purposes only see page 163 o Common Dictionary A ES User E Dictionary A 4 Usea common dictionary for translation Use a common dictionary for translation To use a common dictionary you must first set the dictionary in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box For detai
13. The drive specified as the work folder must have sufficient available space If not dictionary rebuilding cannot be performed Rebuild the dictionary again after setting up the work folder 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and select Reindex Dictionary from Management Menu ATLAS Main Window ikg T A Q Eo SB N Py Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment YA EJ Add Word R EJ Eind Delete Word RS lal al ee er T L Ne TF SF TF E OF OZ es T aS a ee SF Le Se OF OS OS OSS a aa S Th Add All Translation memory rye Merge Dictionary Data PW Reindex Dictionary ri Backup Dictionary Help Reindexes the content of the user dictionary to improve access performance 2 Select the dictionary you want to rebuild from the Specifies the target user dictionary list in the Reindex User Dictionary dialog box 3 Click the Browse button ATLAS Reindex User Dictionary Specifies the target user dictionary User dictionaryO001 icti 002 User dictionary0004 User dictionaryO005 User dictionary0 Run User dictionary0003 Specifies the work folder C Documents and Settings Administrato Local Settir eoe Processing status 234 Chapter 3 Managing Data of User Dictionaries 4 Click OK button and specify the dictionary you want to rebuild Browse for Folder Select Folder to Working 4rea My Documents My Com
14. With this function when manuals and technical documents are revised and the original sentences are utilized and only partially changed the stored translation memory items are re used to maintain translation quality and facilitate efficient translation work The translation memory is used according to the degree to which source text and the data in translation memory match which is referred to as the match value The match value is set using the Match Value of Used Translation Memory setting in the Translation Memory tab in the Translation Environment Settings It is set to 100 by default You can use the Translation memory to check match conditions between source text in stored translation memory data and the original text e Ex Original text to be translated What do you think of this plan Match value Original text Translated text 100 Match What do you think of this plan CORMAEDRBWETA 87 Match What do you think of my plan AOsHBAELSBRBWETA 47 Match When do you plan to leave for Tokyo L ORRAHKOPECTDH 29 UOIJONPOUUy Introduction E Mechanism of translation memory function ATLAS generated translation text is output in the following order Translation memory 1 100 match translation memory When there is a completed sentence in the translation memory that is the same as the original text the stored translation memory item is output indicated in blue There is no need for review inc
15. jul Working Area Client 4 Click the Scheduled Deletion button Dictionary Management A Delete This Dictionary Scheduled Deletion Cancel Schedule Every day Every week H Ss i E E Every month fi E day Time 00 00 Cancel Help For details refer to the help by clicking the Help button 1 Select a dictionary to Chapter E Managing Dictionaries on Translation Server 6 Click the OK button Dictionary deletion starts at the scheduled time For confirming that dictionary registration is completed refer to i Confirming Dictionary Synchronization Results Log Viewer on page 288 E 6 Scheduling Dictionary Synchronization and Confirming Results E This section describes how to schedule Dictionary Synchronization from an ATLAS client and how to verify Dictionary Synchronization results Hints gt The Dictionary Synchronization in the Management Tool which is started from the server can also be used to schedule Dictionary Synchronization xlpueddy HM Setting Schedules for Dictionary Synchronization Use this function to set or delete schedule for Dictionary Synchronization which set on the Translation Server deo The Translation Server allows the registration of one schedule setting Since only the most recent schedule setting is valid a more recent schedule setting may overwrite a previous one This can occur when several dictionary administrators
16. ATLAS V14 User s Guide FUJITSU Introduction This manual is for the users of ATLAS V14 0 and is designed to assist them in getting the most out of the software Before You Get Started Please verify the following One of the following operating systems has been installed on your PC and is operating normally Windows Vista Ultimate Windows Vista Enterprise Windows Vista Business e Windows Vista Home Premium e Windows Vista Home Basic e Microsoft Windows XP Professional e Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition e Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Hereafter all the operating systems mentioned above will be referred to as Windows The Japanese Kana Kanji Conversion function is operating normally Thank you for purchasing EJ JE translation software ATLAS V14 0 This product is equipped with various functions such as Translation editor and Web translation By using these functions according to your needs efficient translation is possible We hope that this manual is of help to all users December 2007 Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Internet Explorer PowerPoint Outlook and Excel are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Lotus and Lo
17. Setting Translated text 1 or 2 byte code PAL 1 MEO Y12771 amp I PageRead amp ACZES Kana 1 byte 1 or 2 byte code 1fM EDY YUAKI F FIVERIC PageRead FA Kana 2 byte caer 2 byte code 1 UEDY YUYAZKIPTIVEHIXZ PageRead pee ar 2 Imperative Specifies the ending form of imperative sentences either to be imperative form or an end form Original text Detach parts Setting Translated text I LESLY Bhan AY HLT lt TESLY BRERVALET 3 Sentence Style of Translation Specifies the sentence style of the translated text Original text Spell utilities detect spelling errors Setting Translated text AXWA TF AVF AIERNILVIERERBHTS AXWA TF AUF AIERNIVERSRMLET 4 Comma and Period Specifies which type of punctuation marks should be used Original text Therefore file system manages the disk buffers Setting Translated text J and J LEBT IDPFATIVVATFLETF A AZINYVIVP ESHLET T J and oJ LEAD TCT DP FTIVVYATFLIET A AZIDNYVISP RSHLET J and F d LEAD T IPF TIVVATLIET AI AZAINYVIVERSHELET 205 SliNsoYy UoIe sues 199g BulAsiUudY JO SyuIH s nbiuyoa peoueApY Advanced Techniques 5 Translation of Capitalized Words Specifies whether capital letters in the original text should be translated or not Original text Set the parking brake to NEUTRAL Setting Translated text NEUTRAL IZH FO D X EBELTCESL W On HIHIRI L FERELTILES N 6 Compound Word of Katakana Spe
18. lt Translation Memory gt can be used from either the Translation Memory Another window the Translation Memory In the window where part of the translation memory data is displayed as part of the window of the calling source Translation Memory In the window Translation Memory Another window Case of Clipboard Translation E Translation Memory ATLAS Clipboard Translation Edit View Tool Help a AUTO g f Je me gar eaer i EEA EA ME Asg AUTO I think the agreement encompasses everything v ia Ur dictionary0001 SCORE 66 RATE 100 I think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last RIBS IIT HAA LELE SETATASLTAVET wee I think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last week k I think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last week T Memory amp Replace Addd Property i Delete i SAA ata Al WOLELE BETS THEL TAY ERU Match Value Original Text Translated Text Source I think they shoul pi oy egy User dictionary00 e I think they ought IFROH User dictionary00 C Name User dictiona ry0001 SCORE 3 RATE 25 I think they ought HAARDE User dictionary00 I think the agreem SUARA User dictionary00 i think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last week BACK FORW 5 R translation memory was found I think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last week HS BEDEO N Atal
19. the Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box At this time the icon of the common dictionary changes from green to pink 7 Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button E Obtaining administrator rights performed by a new administrator This section explains how to obtain administrator rights for a common dictionary for which administrator rights have not yet been set 166 Chapter 9 Using the Common Dictionary 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window to select Translation Environment Settings and click your desired translation environment name in the displayed list The Detail Settings dialog box appears 2 Download the common dictionary page 163 3 Inthe Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box select the common dictionary indicated by the pink icon for which you want to change the administrator lt 2 ___ You cannot change the administrator of the common dictionary which is set in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box If the common dictionary you want to change is set in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box click th
20. 0 00 eee ees 102 4 3 Changing the ATLAS Clipboard Translation Dialog Box Display 103 Chapter 5 Basic Operation of Web Translation 0005 104 5 1 ADOULTNE ATLAS ToolBar sisu 4 crus geen oker athens hab bee see 104 5 2 Displaying the Original Text 0 ccc eee 106 5 3 Choose whether or not to perform the translation simultaneously with the display of the page 0 cee ees 107 5 4 Reading Sentences Aloud 0 0 cece eee eee 108 Chapter 6 Translating Mail Mail Translation 0 109 6 1 Starting Mail Translation 0 0 ee ees 109 6 2 Layout of Mail Translation toolbar 2 0 cee eee 110 6 3 Setting the Mail Translation shortcut key 00 00 e eee eee 110 6 4 Automatically Starting Mail Translation 0 0 0 0 eee 111 Chapter 7 Quick ATLAS Basis u occ turk tbe Qh aG hsv we wks 112 7 1 Using the Quick ATLAS ICON 2 nnna tans 64 Baie eae od x oe he dae eens 112 7 2 Clicking to Translate Mouse Translation 0000 e eee 113 7 3 Translating while entering text Key Type Translation 115 7 4 Automatically Translating Text on the Clipboard Automatic Clipboard Translation 0 0 000 c eee eee 117 7 5 Layout and Type of Dialog Box Mouse Translation Key Type Translation Automatic Clipboard Translation 119 7 6 Automatically Starting Quick ATLAS 0 0 cee eee 121 Cha
21. 2 Select the User Dictionary to be renamed from the List of Available Dictionaries and then click the Property button Detail Settings General Dictionary Settings English to Japanese Japanese to English Translation Memory List of Available Dictionaries Dictionaries Used in Translation Common0001 Ton t3User dictionary0001 1 G t di ti DUser dictionary0002 oclect dictionary E st Meraal P reg lt lt Don t Use a anual Packet 62 Mail Packet Priority 63 Entertainment Packet New 64 Chat Packet 65 Patent Packet m e E E 2 Click 66 Basic Sample 67 Patent Procedure Packet Import Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0001 Gommon Dictionary Help Delete Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary 3 Type anew dictionary name before clicking the Modify button Dictionary Property User Dictionary Dictionary Name User dictionary Es 1 Enter new dictionary name Japanese Dictionary C Documents and Settir English Dictionary C Documents and Settir 4 Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button 8 4 Setting Changeable Dictionary a In ATLAS th
22. 36 Introduction HM ATLAS Online Manual Follow these procedures to view the PDF version of this guide 1 Click the Windows Start button and select All Programs ATLAS V14 0 Support ATLAS User s Guide Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the PDF manual Visit Adobe s website for information on how to download http Awww adobe com WE Startup Guide When you start Quick ATLAS or Mail Translation Startup Guide a simple explanation of how to use Quick ATLAS and Mail Translation is displayed If you check Do not show this dialog next time the startup guide will not be displayed from the next time To display Startup Guide again follow the procedures below In this section Quick ATLAS is used as an example for explanation For Mail Translation read the explanation and replace Quick ATLAS with Mail Translation 1 Click the Quick ATLAS button in the Main Window ATLAS Main Window Editor Clipboard Mail QuickATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Glick on an icon to start processine The Quick ATLAS icon appears on the Windows task tray and Quick ATLAS starts 2 Right click the Quick ATLAS icon on the task tray PC screen Quick ATLAS icon Typical Use of Translation MemoryFinding Detailed Information Help Internet Update 3 Select Startup Guide from the menu Mouse Translation 4utomatic Clipboard Translation Key Type Translation ATLAS
23. CONSEL Mouse Translation General r Newspaper Magazine Entertainment Key Type Translation Letter Mail ka Mail Translation Letter Mail Web Translation General Application Translation General Text Alignment Support Tool General Cancel Helo 47 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics Translation Editor Select from the list box in the Translation Editor window We ATLAS Translation Editor untitled File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Dle L gt AUTO s General gt Ba Original text lranslated text Clipboard Translation Click the Translation Environment Settings button dialog box S 2 Q ne e Translation Environment Settings General gt By r Only translate without the window when called from the main window Translation memory window C Another window Th the window Number of Translation Memory search results fio cet He Mouse Translation Click the Translation Environment Settings button dialog box ATLAS Mouse Translation gase vg oo As Translation Environment Settings Thanalatinin Dincsiveawniunean Ala ina General v Translation memory window C Another window Th the window Number of Translation Memory search results fio H ocel He in the Clipboard Translation in the Mouse Translation The translation environment for Automatic Clipboard Translation
24. Detail Settings dialog box appears 3 Click the Common Dictionary button 160 Chapter 9 Using the Common Dictionary 4 Check the Use Common Dictionary specify the location of the Common Folder in Step 1 for the Common Folder box and then click the OK button Common Dictionary Damman Folder Duplicated Folder the Common Folder C Documents and Settings 4TLAS i Common Dictionary List Common0002 Common0001 Download Method Show Confirm Dialog when ATLAS starts gt at Upload Method Show Confirm Dialog when ATLAS quits x Upload Show results of processine SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Show results of processing 3 Click If common dictionaries have already been uploaded to the Common Folder click the Download Now button to download the common dictionaries When download is completed the downloaded common dictionaries are added to the List of Available Dictionaries box The Common Folder setting goes into effect and the screen returns to the Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box 5 Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button 9 3 Creating a Common Dic
25. In the following cases the dialog box always displays in normal mode even when you have checked Use pop up dialog when using Mouse Translation or Key Type Translation e You started Mouse Translation by double clicking the Quick ATLAS icon on the task tray e You started Key Type Translation by selecting the command from the menu displayed when you right click the Quick ATLAS icon on the task tray 7 6 Automatically Starting Quick ATLAS en This section describes how to configure Quick ATLAS to start automatically each time you boot Windows 1 Right click the Quick ATLAS icon on the task tray and select Options 2 Check the Start Quick ATLAS when starting Windows check box Quick ATLAS Options Use pop up dialog when using Mouse Iranslation or Key Type Translation Shortcut Key Settings for Starting Key Type Translation Press Crtl Shift key of your choice to set shortcut key This setting will be available the next time Quick ATLAS is started Ctr Shift T Cancel 3 Click the OK button Quick ATLAS starts automatically the next time you boot Windows 121 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg 8 Using the Dictionary During translation ATLAS analyzes words and grammatical information in the dictionaries to create translated text Through the effective use of the dictionaries it is possible to improve the accuracy of translation In this chapter we introduce the dictionaries used in ATLAS and s
26. Original text Translated text corresponding to Sentence number button Translated text T E i A his invention explains an optical switching device of a multi mode which comprises some areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor Each mode generates the positron and photocurrent in some areas corresponding to the control signal concerning wavelength with different light Ef Chel SIRS cS al EMS OEE HELE TS Photocurrent by each mode originally adjusts the transmission of the high frequency control signal Sth Ct O20 iil RE Cea AEE Photocurrent by each mode originally Eim LET adjusts the transmission of the high frequency control signal Sentence number button Selects Original tand Translated text corresponding to Sentence number button NO button Selects all cells Original text Translated text CORRIER A a LOOD This invention explains an optical af Original text Translated text CORRIER aR CHR HET SL LD This invention explains an optical a Ope DEI SSE OF eS lo DLYCSHEALET switching device of a multi mode which comprises some areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor DRE DEI SSt Osteo switching device of a multi mode which DLV CEREALET comprises some areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor positron and FENCED NERIS CREA J sy MS Photocurrent by each mode originally adjusts the transmission of the high frequency c
27. Please terminate all the checked applications before clicking the OK button omes Heb A message will appear saying that the application translation setup has been completed The ATLAS tab or on the toolbar will then be displayed the next time you Start the application Open the Word file you want to translate 15 UOIJONPOUUy Introduction 4 Click the Translate All button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar The ATLAS toolbar does not appear if Application Translation was not installed during ATLAS installation refer to 3 1 Preparation Setup of Application Translation in Basics on page 79 33 da I O MENUBOX docx Microsoft Word Home Insert Page Layout References Mailings Review View ATLAS j Q R g Direction AUTO X Ei ON Output Destination Output to Another Doc Nia Environment General T Vertical H horizontar fe Save as Pair Translate fanslate Translation Ste Add Find Delete srr p 3 ATLAS All elected Editor i EA Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help aa ar 5 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 444 42 44 y 48 le p a es i a me HREM Gee ee eee BS AUIS cae el RR gt D 4 Translation starts Qa 9 0 MENUBOX docx Microsoft Word ax es Home Insert Page Layout References Mailings Review View ATLAS es Direction
28. Text Alignment Support Tool o RB BEB BSB a oa aa SP SE EP ES aa a aas a aa aa aa aaa m x lt Fr Fa se Seme Maret hep CET A SRRXR Ox Memory Search Edit Translation Memory Data Translation Memory Another window Translation Memory In the window Edit View Tool Heb SGa sisDx e were Rod were gorg lo ert tive dore 4 Name Usor dictionary0001 SOOM 45 RATE 100k Ts WLIO ASe And re ming to get this done fi re going to get this dons IONeHTS RS OOVTY the agreement encumpssess sverythne we tabed out lest meek RUT ROMITA RIA TILER SEF AT DAL THE EBS User dictionaryO00 727 J0 SR5 69 Ard we re going to got this done Remora vie om aina tn ant thar dame Ane ua ae the athe BACK FORW TMemory Afeptoce aada L Origins Tort Lok Grey Houl I thirk they ought Gi fi And we re going to get this done TLT USIICNHERT SVS IOUT Translation Start Can be accessed from Translation Editor 1 Mail Translation t Clipboard Translation Quick ATLAS Mouse Translation Automatic Clipboard Translation Acrobat Translation Adobe Reader Translation 2 Word Translation at the time of Step Translation 1 Only Translation Memory Another window 2 Only Translation Memory In the window Chapter 1 Basic ATLAS Functions Translation memory quality can be increased through regular ext
29. Translation Environment Settings gt j Current Translation Environment Operating Environment Settings RG amp Setup Application Translation Genera The Translation Environment Settings window opens displaying a list of translation environment names Translation Environment Settines Translation Environment List Letter Mail Business Patent Contract Newspaper Magazine Restore Settines Entertainment Import Export Close Help Hints gt Translation environments can be created and updated also from the Translation Environment Settings window For details refer to Help gt The Restore Settings button allows you to return the settings of the selected translation environment to the values it had when ATLAS was installed 206 Chapter 6 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment Settings 6 2 Creating Editing Translation Environments eeN J l This section describes how to create and edit translation environments A translation environment can be created or edited by selecting a translation environment editing its contents and saving it under another name 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and select Thesis from Translation Environment Settings You can also do this by clicking the Edit button in the Translation Environment Settings window shown on the previous page ATLAS Main Window F e Q we g H a g Editor
30. lt 7 move 4 motion 47937 act action CY at a place of Oth Y IZZ instead of Iot LT corresponding to amp 27 with Modifies a verb or adjective J Adverb Cod still E Adverb LTE so J Adverb E Adverb English adverb positioned at the beginning of a sentence Connects sentences conjunction Positioned immediately after a number and indicates its type Modifies a noun with TO added to the end or makes an object for a verb with added to the end J Noun E Noun adjective M194 V in this case LALA V but A bILY meter A A Y page triangle triangular FEA basic basic VAT LY system EH building Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary Noun meaning number EF SA ii HL F 7K 7H 3 what you can touch or see oe E a Objective particle When adding a transitive or intransitive verb be sure to select a Japanese particle for it from the following ZSBAILSNAZESDOASEYSCLOAIES EAE CLEL This determines with which particle an English object is to be translated Original text Translation text Particles representing objects ake care of dog ROWED ake up with he CML CE Underlines show the words to be added Reference for English verb pattern For the English verb pattern select Intransitive Transitive or Intransitive transitive Intransitive transitive refers to a verb which functions as an intransitive as well as transitive verb Transiti
31. specify whether to install these dictionaries at the time of installation e Optional technical dictionaries These are optional ATLAS series products installed after installing ATLAS They must be added to the Dictionaries in Use Technical dictionaries that are no longer needed can be uninstalled User Dictionaries dictionaries made and updated by the user User dictionaries are dictionaries that list terms and translation memory data not found in the above dictionaries Since a total of 1000 user dictionaries can be created you can select dictionaries to suit specific translation projects Existing user dictionaries can be used with ATLAS and you can download them from the ATLAS Web page using Internet Update To access a user dictionary during translation it must be set up as a Dictionary in Use 122 Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary Common dictionary This is a dictionary created on a network folder that is shared by multiple users For details refer to Chapter 9 Using the Common Dictionary on page 157 Standard Technical User Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary provided Optional dictionary Dictionary made by user as standard Dictionary provided Dictionary downloaded as standard using Internet Update A dictionary in use Install and set up as a Set up as a dictionary at all times dictionary in use in use optional dictionary only t Example showing dictionaries used in translation SV1LV Bui
32. you can directly execute many commands for that cell or character string gt You can select multiple sentences by holding down the lt lt Shift gt gt or lt lt Ctrl gt gt key and clicking Sentence Number buttons gt You can select Font from the Option menu to change size and font of characters used in the Translation Editor window Borderline between the original and translated text cells You can adjust it with the mouse 53 SVI1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics E Toolbar Copy ul Copies the selected text onto the clipboard u Paste or Insert copied cell Deletes the ean sty Copies the text on the clipboard to from the window and places the selected position it on the clipboard Delete Undo Cancels the last operation Deletes the selected text ae a zleje w New Print AUTO EJ JE Prepares a Prints the original Switches the translation brand new and translated text direction document for Save As translation Save Saves your work as a new file Open Overwrites the original file Opens a file Find Next Find Upward Help Searches for the specified Searches for the specified Displays the Translation string after the cursor string before the cursor Editor help position position mae Isa I Translation Environment Find box name Displays a string to be searched for Switches the environment name used for translation Translation Environment Changes the translation All Sente
33. 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques 5 Divide Sentence Automatically Specifies whether a long original text should automatically be divided for translation or not Original text CHHeRRI SICK AR RICA SaaS SC LAWETCH J SLTCEOHBREANAAZLEMRSOMIIOF SE ERETO Setting Translated text On It is necessary that the machine also understand the language as well as man to achieve these and it is a problem to clarify the difficult mechanism J On It is necessary that the machine also understand the language as well as man to achieve these And it is a problem to clarify the difficult mechanism 6 For Letter Mail specifies whether to use letter mail grammar Original text PFADHSb8HeEOBSREKVETA REOABILAETT On The schedule for next time is undecided though the minutes of yesterday s meeting are sent W On send the minutes of yesterday s meeting The schedule for next time is undecided 7 For Patent Specifies whether to translate by giving priority to interpretation for patent specific sentences Original text KRIA 2 LT3AEROVATLICBUT xxx h yyy FBCVATA Setting Translated text System by which xxx contains yyy in system described in claim 2 The system described in claim 2 wherein xxx contains yyy WE Subject and Object 1 Sentence without Subject Specifies how an affirmative sentence without a subject should be translated Original text RReRRYIETLET Setting Translat
34. 2 Select Confirmation Translation from the Translation menu File Edit Assistance Dictionary Option Help Selected Area Translation F2 All Sentence Translation Shift F2 Confirmation Translation Ctrl F2 Hints gt Ifthe Translation Direction is set to AUTO an incorrect translation direction may be selected depending on the translated text contents If this occurs set the Translation Direction to EJ or JE correctly 2 Merging Dividing the Original Text SSSS ATLAS automatically recognizes one original sentence at a time analyzes it and creates a translated text Dividing a sentence at the conjunction where the meaning breaks down improves the accuracy of the translation E Dividing the Original Text 1l Press the lt lt Enter gt gt key at the position where you wish to divide the sentence Place the cursor Lina tod Original text EN lt TTET lt lt Enter gt gt key OES AED RTE HBR BLO ya AAA SEHH LAS Ata ieee e MP aise i DL AEE 61 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics Hints gt You can divide the sentence by selecting the sentence number of the Original text you wish to divide and selecting Sentence Division from the Assistant menu In this case the position where the sentence is divided is automatically decided 62 E Merging the Original Text 1l Press the lt lt Delete gt gt key at the end of a sentence to merge with the Y Tips a CO 3689S RO
35. 5 Translation Environment Options E Line feed ATLAS uses punctuation and line feeds to recognize individual sentences Depending on the original text sentences are sometimes not recognized correctly In such cases you can set the method used to recognize individual sentences There are two ways to recognize a sentence using line feeds or via automatic recognition by ATLAS This setting is selected for JE and EJ translation respectively How to recognize sentence end option With this option you can set the following if a sentence has a line break code Line feed recognized as sentence end Line feed code is used to recognize individual sentences Even if there is a sentence end symbol such as punctuation or a period the sentence is not delimited there Automatic recognition of sentence end ATLAS automatically recognizes individual sentences Ex Original The computer which understood the natural language output the voice indicates a line break code Line feed recognized as sentence end Recognized to be two sentences First The computer which understood the natural language Second output the voice Automatic recognition of sentence end The computer which understood the natural language output the voice eoo If you select Line feed recognized as sentence end you cannot select the Word wrapped option in English to Japanese translation only gt When a sentence has two consecutive li
36. ADA Ay bk DEAD LOI P FIN e Solution Specify the scope of parallel phrases using Ex The fibers which stand out of a carpet or piece of cloth D Ay bk AAOMADS UDI F lt i Inverted structure e Problem ATLAS cannot translate some inverted structures Ex Onhe went until he came the river KC RIXTE EL te Jilo 244 Chapter 4 Hints on Pre Post editing for EJ Translation e Solution Rewrite it to a normal structure before translation a He went on until he came to the river IZIS HKSECHEANHAEL LE Idiom e Problem Some idioms may not be translated correctly Ex His theories are over my head FLO SAO LIX RO BRADY ET e Solution Correct it during post editing Ex amp OiBRILEICIkDAY ELA 245 SliNsoYy uoejsuei JoNEg BulAsiUudY JO SjJuIL s nbiuyoa peoueApY 5 Hints on Pre Post editing for JE Translation To obtain better English translation it is important to prepare original text appropriately for translation This chapter explains hints for creating such Original text 5 1 Preparing Appropriate Original Japanese Text E Making simple original text Shortening sentences In general the longer the sentences the more difficult the contents are to understand This is due to more complicated modifications Rewrite such sentences into shorter clearer ones Action Composing sentences of no more than 50 characters Putting 1 topic in 1 sentence Ex x BAILSITSRERNOMROARBAIL A
37. Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Translation Environment Nami Translation Environment List Translation Environment Settings gt ef Current Translation Environment Operating Environment Settings h Setup Application Translation General F Manual 2 Use the Dictionary Settings tab to select a dictionary For details on dictionaries refer to Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary in Basics on page 122 3 Click the English to Japanese or Japanese to English tab and click the Translation Style button Detail Settings Thesis Dictionary Settings English to Japanese Japanese to English Translation Memory Line feed text file only How to recognize sentence end f Line feed recognized as sentence end Word wrapped f Yes OMord doesn t contain the line feed f No QWord contains the line feed You can set translation style Translation Style fe Sentence f Word f Translation Only f Translation Format Help Cancel Translation Style Translation Unit Output Format 4 Set the translation style items and click the OK button For details on each item refer to Help 5 Click the English to Japanese Japanese to English tab or the Translation Memory tab to set other items and click the OK button 20 SliINsoYy uoIe sues JONeg BulAsiUudY JO SjuIL s nbiuyoa peoueApY Advanced Techniques 6 The following operations d
38. Dic F nary Name Dictionary Type _ Modified New Scandard Dictionary Standard Dictionary 03 28 2006 C Import m User dictionary0001 User Dictionary 06 05 2006 1 Merge Dictionaries Rename o mE All Dictionaries 2 Basic Dictionary 1 Technical Dictionaries O User Dictionaries 1 Heo 2 9 Appendix 4 Set the time in the Schedule dialog box and click the OK button Schedule Schedule C Every day C Every week E j5 Every month 1 day Time 00 00 Cancel Help For details refer to the help of Schedule Setting by clicking the Help button 5 Select users allowed to access the dictionary and click the OK button Dictionary user setting Please set the user who can use it for the dictionary C Available for all users Dictionary Administrator Only Available for all Permits access to all users users Dictionary Permits access to ATLAS dictionary administrators only Administrator Only Dictionary user Conforms to current dictionary user settings Settings of the When you upload a dictionary for the first time and select server Dictionary user Settings of the server no users are specified It is registered as a dictionary that no user can select Users are specified in the Administrator Menu after synchronization When you upload a dictionary in order to renew the dictionary select Dictionary user Settings of the server This starts dictiona
39. Dictionary 1 Technical Dictionaries O User Dictionaries 1 e 4 Select Dictionary User Settings after uploading and synchronizing a dictionary and click the OK button Dictionary user setting Please set the user who can use it for the dictionary C Available for all users C Dictionary Administrator Only D Cancel Help Item Description Available for all Permits access to all users users Dictionary Permits access to ATLAS dictionary administrators only Administrator Only Dictionary user Conforms to current dictionary user settings Settings of the When you upload a dictionary for the first time and select server Dictionary user Settings of the server no users are specified It is registered as a dictionary that no user can select Users are specified in the Administrator Menu after synchronization When you upload a dictionary in order to renew the dictionary select Dictionary user Settings of the server This registers and synchronizes the dictionary on the Translation Server For confirming that dictionary registration is completed refer to Hi Confirming Dictionary Synchronization Results Log Viewer on page 288 2 8 Chapter E Managing Dictionaries on Translation Server WE Uploading a User Dictionary for Synchronization at a Set Date Upload a User Dictionary to the Translation Server and use Schedule Settings to set a date for later synchronization This function is
40. Down Y 4 yF ATLASY YYY LT CPA z IlL Hints gt To change the appearance of the translation select Output Settings from the ATLAS tab To change the translation appearance for versions prior to and including Word 2003 select Text Output Destination or Output Format of Translation Text in the Environment Settings dialog box 89 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics E Automatically selecting and translating sentences in a document one by one Step Translation Texts in Word are translated sentence by sentence Start operation when the document is open in Word 1 Place the cursor over the sentence you want to translate and click the Step Translation button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar ATLAS Direction AUTO z Ei K Output Destination Replace Using Original S Environment General ah Gal Sa Translate Translate Translati Pa Add Find Delete ar ATLAS All Selected y Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Translate Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help e If a range was not selected at the time of translation the text where the cursor is located becomes the object of translation e If a range was selected the text located at the top of the selected range becomes the object of translation If a dictionary containing translation memory is set in the available dictionaries the translation memory search will occur simultaneously To perform the Translation m
41. English preposition English preposition Enter a preposition or prepositional phrase Sample gt p e 2EOLLKTS inthe face of e Adding All Words Adding All 228 This section describes how to add all words to the Changeable Dictionary from files exported using Export Undefined Word in lt Translation Editor gt or add all text files 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and select EJ Add All or J E Add All ATLAS Main Window amta P A 9 i WE Editor Clipboard Mall Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help User dictionaries will be batch added from the batch registration format file Vt EJ Add Word Ie EJ Eind Delete Word Wl EJ Extract All SE Add All Chapter 2 Adding Words 2 Set each item and click the Add All button Dictionary Name Add All File Displays the User Dictionary Specifies the name of the Browse button file dialog box for selecting the add all text file to be Select Adding Direction Dictiona Name Userdictionay0001 ts added A a ane Add All File C Program Files ATLAS V13 S lt Browse f Both directions Status File C Program Files ATLAS V135 ample E jwda EOE Status File Specifies the name of the file piiat for logging add all operations Creates a file of that name with the file extension sta in default setting You can change the file name and Add All Close Help directo
42. English to Japanese or Japanese to English tab Then click the Translation Style button and set the spell check mark using the Brackets tab 64 2 10 Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor Exporting Undefined Words to an add all text file Export Undefined Word E_E The Translation Editor allows you to write words in Original Text cell that are not defined in the ATLAS Standard Dictionary or other dictionaries into an add all text file format file Using a text editor you can edit this output file and check that the contents are correct This completes the add all text file process 1 Select Export Undefined Word in the Assistance menu File Edit Translation Dictionary Option Help Sentence Division Spelling Check Export Undefined Word Delete Mark gt Spell checking is performed and the Undefined Word Export dialog box is displayed Specify the output folder and filename and click the Save button Undefined Word Export Save in E My Documents E ig Ez adobe My eBooks 1 Specify the folder Amy Music 2 my Pictures O sample 2 Enter file name File name sample co 3 Click Save as type Undefined word file TXT Cancel Undefined words are exported in a file P sample Notepad File Edit Format View Help Dictionary Management 9 30 4520 Dictionary Management 7 7 7 0 1 f Lill PT LVS 30 520 Improved C fi
43. Extract Dictionary Data from Management Menu ATLAS Main Window T A G Editor Clipboard Mail Quick TLAS Web Extract dictionary data from user dictionary Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help YA EJ Add Word EJ Find Delete Word NAINI NNI NNI NNI NNI NNI NNI NNIT NNIT NIT NNIT NNN NAINA NY NY NY NY NII NII SN IY NY NY NII SS Th Add All Translation memory fyt Merge Dictionary Data 2 Specify the name of a dictionary to be extracted and the destination where you want to save it in the MRG format ATLAS Extract Dictionary Data Dictionary User dictionaryO001 lt 1 Select User Dictionary a to be extracted Qutput Filename C Output User dictionaryO001 MAG Browse Lais 4 peciizaiei 7 n 2 Click and browse the file iw Extract Words Entered after The Specified Day 2006 08 01 a __ _ Select to extract data enterd after a specific date E arn OF Cancel Help Check to merge the extracted data Effectively only when called up from Merge Dictionary Data 231 Advanced Techniques 3 Click the OK button Hints gt Data containing dates cannot be extracted from dictionaries created in ATLAS V8 or earlier versions gt Note that user dictionaries that are downloaded from Internet Update are not displayed in the Dictionary box 3 2 Merging Data of User Dictionaries Merge Dictionary Data The Extract Dictionary Data option allows you to m
44. Hints gt Even when the same user dictionary is set as the changeable dictionary for EJ translation and JE translation the contents of the result of output of Unusable word information differs in the EJ and JE formats e When the English Japanese format is output only words specified as not used in EJ translation are output e When the Japanese English format is output only words specified as not used in JE translation are output 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and then select EJ Extract All or J E Extract All ATLAS Main Window ae e e 9 e SABEL Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help V4 EJ Add Word Re EJ Find Delete Word LE J Extract All MS EJ Add All Extract the content of the user dictionary and output to a file 2 Set each item and then click the OK button Used to select an ATLAS user dictionary ooo oo Used to specify the output folder clicking the Dictionary Name User dictionary0001 Browse button calls up the select directory Output Folder CE Browse dai al og Type of Add All File JE Addition Both Directions Used to select output of stored an ATLAS EJ or Only JE Addition JE words when Add all is selected in Output Add all output format Only Bath Drectione Form at C Unusable word information r C Translation Memory c Used to output only the translation memory available
45. Japanese JE 250 V Various symbols in translated text 55 Verb Pattern 140 141 143 251 Verb Adjective EJ 0 141 227 Verb Adjective JE 144 222 Verb Verb EJ 0 008 140 225 Verb Verb JE 0005 143 221 Vertical translation file 57 W Web Translation 22 49 104 When before Noun ex local paper 141 ara I EE CAERE a OEE EE A E E E N EEEE S NEEE 208 Word and Translation Memory File Output 154 Word division EJ naana anaana aaa 243 Word division JE 22 0 2sd 20ig 3 foie 253 Word File Translation 88 Word Translation 00005 15 WOULD 22 34 35 ce saidana ave Gece Fae eae 208 Writing sentences that avoid different interpretations JE 0 249 Others 100 Match 6 ita chloe Shee EGR hse 30 33 100 Mate ced nt eeecn et ate Breede dn ees 29 TAY ESD cl eee 217 WPT Fl cent Suk sees dex warts E 216 We Os Ge are ee ee ee 217 GC RS Ul est ck Sau Matha g ee Oe ate es 215 eT UN IS ns bra te ee hee x 216 Ieerg Ay AS E E EEEE 217 F AIZ ETEA without Subject 215 EA Bes oy a 218 LET ORI ae ll eaei 216 EE lS AEE EET 217 g 4 before Noun Phrase 218 F SWHEAWNHS without Subject 215 lC e oles acd oe eden bm oud ee hee Sted 216 Fee be reat Rk ee ce E E EET 216 293
46. Menu j Options Heln YESIN intor mation Shut Down Quick ATLAS aA The Quick ATLAS Startup Guide is displayed E Internet Update If you select Internet Update using the Help button in the Main Window your web browser starts up and takes you to the ATLAS Internet Update Web page Dictionaries program plug ins and other software can be downloaded from this page and integrated with your ATLAS environment For details refer to the description on this Web page SS ATLAS Main Window 9 B amp B H Editor Clipboard Mail Quick TLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Display URL of ATLAS update Help Gontents F1 Help Index Internet Help Internet Update ATLAS Product Information About ATLAS uo1 0npo1 u 3 Introduction 38 Basics Try Using ATLAS This part describes the basic operation of ATLAS 1 Basic ATEAS FUNCIONS orones a 40 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor ccccceecceeeeeeeseeseeeseeseeeeeneees 53 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation cccccccssccecesceeteeseeeeeneees 78 4 Basic Operation of Clipboard Translation cccccseccesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 101 5 Basic Operation of Web Translation cccccseecccceeeeceeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeees 104 6 Translating Mail Mail Translation ccceeececsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeees 109 7 QUICKATIEAS BASICS roncon e baa aaudivoot naman 112 8 Using the Dict
47. None ff Oo o w o a w we e o o a e S Paie eren 1 Ifan original part of speech has a translation of a different part of speech it can be added as a derived word A derived word is variation of a word in the target language that corresponds to a word in the original language 2 Add for Both refers to the function to make a word added for JE translation available also for EJ translation 139 SVI1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics WE Settings for each part of speech in EJ translation This section describes the detailed settings for each part of soeech when adding an English word and its Japanese translation For details please refer to Hl Reference for Adding Words on page 146 Noun Noun Ev Noun Plural Form Regular noun Singular and Plural Uncountable Plural Meaning Humani Animal Organization Place Time C Concrete Object Others Counter automatic v Noun Plural Form Select the type of plural form of the noun English to be added Meaning Select the meaning of the noun to be added Counter Select the unit counter used when counting the noun to be added Hints gt Specify an English noun plural form by referring to the following examples e Regular Noun The plural form is automatically judged e Singular and Plural Select to set a noun that has the same form in both the singular and the plural such as sheep deer and salmon e Uncountable Select
48. Original and OK 88 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation E Translating a file All Sentence Translation The entire text of a Word file is translated Open a Word file to be translated Quickly starting Mouse Translation Double clicking the Quick ATLAS icon starts Mouse Translation E Easily operating ATLAS Right clicking the Quick ATLAS icon brings up a menu that you can use to display Help or aw In addition you can use the ATLAS Menu command on this menu to quickly launch b LiL 1 Click the Translate All button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar ATLAS Q g Direction AUTO d Ei Ki Output Destination Replace Using Original Sa 3 3 Environment General IT vertrear Horizontal Save as Pair Translate Janslate Translation Step s Add _ Find Delete Mis 7 ATLAS All Jelected Editor Translation Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Ts sate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help When the translation is completed the results are displayed mist lt Mouse Translation 4 ET TE ATLAS FAP Y vY LT 74 Avid Mouse Translation RL ET E EZ ATLAS IRL ET UR ATLAS SHI VY vY LT 7I arahe TERTI AOKPACE 532a Startup HI PRATET D HME ATLAS O Menu WHIO X22 STP lt Main Window HAT HbLaPt AHA Translation Editor UY x7 Translation FF STHSzILR CHET o 94 v9 ATLAS PDAIR TwS
49. SISK KUM BILREECES EGA Neither the repair nor the adjustment of the breakdown that happens because of a misuse a change a disconnection an accident or improper maintenance are warrantable O WROBIEII KD TET DKES 6 BERR kUI E ECA RA ZE BiR SR HOUMCPMOIGAYVTFTFVYA Neither the repair nor the adjustment of the breakdown that happens because of the following matters are warrantable Misuse change disconnection accident or improper maintenance Action Changing an adnominal modifying form to an adverbial form Ex x AHKAMSMHELLBAOTAL FZORMOERIL EEROR T H Do The first work of the operator when the I O trouble occurs is restoration of the trouble medium O AHKABESOHEL EBS RIJAL F cE RAS IAT S When the I O trouble occurs the operator restores the trouble medium first E Making clear original text Not omitting subject or object In Japanese sentences it may be possible to assume an omitted subject object or predicative from the context A person other than its writer however may not be able to comprehend such a sentence which is therefore difficult to translate Action gt Adding a subject or object Ex x E Tack TS It sequentially describes it O JR i162 CHERES ath TS The function is sequentially described Action gt Adding a predicative Ex xX RAILI 5A ERAI 4 FAOSMAMDS The member is 30 000 yen and the participation expense of 40 000 yen is necessary for the nonmember O BSAILIBAAMAC
50. Solution Add a particle to the original text Ex Original A thd MBH RMS RRL to Translation A company announced a super high speed computer Omitted predicative e Problem Correct translation is impossible when a predicative is omitted Ex Original WILGA WISRRICEA CHEF Translation As for him live in Tokyo in Yokohama e Solution Add a predicative to the original text before translation Ex Original WIL RIEA PILRRICHEA CHET Translation He lives in Yokohama and live in Tokyo Idiom e Problem An idiom may not be translated correctly Ex Original ERRAR C BILE Ct AMEDD Translation He passed the examination and mother s nose was very high 254 Chapter 5 Hints on Pre Post editing for JE Translation e Solution 1 Change the idiom in the original text to a more common expression before translation Ex Original EHER AHLT SHIRE E TE BY IEO Eo Translation He passed the examination and mother was very proud of him 2 When it cannot be rewritten into a more common expression correct it during post editing HM Generation of translation Number e Problem A noun without information indicating a plural number is translated into singular form Ex Original J073 LE INE EYT IV FYIZPSIL BSL Translation Divide the program into a small subroutine e Solution Correct it during post editing Ex Divide the program into small subroutines Tense e Problem Tenses may not be translated prope
51. Translate Single Sentence Translates the sentence of the Original text cell at the current cursor position 1 Move the cursor to the Original text cell you wish to translate No Original text Translated text CEPRANO HEA ET OL lt lt DN O PAR o fET SVILFEF OSS eS ODL CRAL ET 5 i a ee Vr cate so eo Obl MSS OT Lich Bt ste ie SESS A Click 2 Click the Translate Single Sentence button on the toolbar WE Selected Area Translation Translates original text selected in a cell or translates selected cells 1 Click the character string in a cell or the Sentence Number button to select the text you wish to translate a Highlight by dragging Move while pressing the left button EE wee woa EA i me RLE Click sentence number button while pressing lt lt Ctrl gt gt key 2 Click the Selected Area Translation button on the toolbar 3 RE Cte atte TEAR EESO Ima RLE You can select Confirmation Translation from the Translation menu to retranslate the translated text back to the original language for confirmation Tips Explorer drag and drop function A file selected in Explorer can be dragged and dropped into the Translation Editor window Q Retranslating the translated text for confirmation 56 Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor 2 3 Switching between EJ and JE Translation Directions Translation Direction ae The translation direction is usually set to a
52. Translation Editor the translation memory item which is the most similar to the original phrase is displayed to the Translated text cell as a translation increasing translation efficiency WE Searching Stored Translation Memory Data in Mail Translation This section describes how to utilize translation memory when performing translation in mail software Outlook Express is used here as an example For details on how to activate Mail Translation refer to 6 1 Starting Mail Translation on page 109 This section describes how to create mail by using translation memory to create translated text sentence by sentence 1 Run Outlook Express and display the mail creation window 2 Click the Search for similar sentences in Translation Memory button m on the Mail Translation Toolbar The Translation Memory Another window appears For details of the layout of the Translation Memory Another window refer to 10 3 Working with the Translation Memory Window on page 185 3 Enter a sentence in the Translation Memory Search box and click the Search 8 button Shows the list of translation memory items already stored in the translation memory 179 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 4 Select the translation memory item on the list that best matches your situation Click 2 I to display a simplified list when you want to display many translation examples in the window at the same time Click to display a detai
53. an Excel worksheet e The original text is replaced by the translated text in Excel The translated text cannot be placed on the clipboard or other Excel sheets 95 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics M ATLAS Tab and ATLAS Toolbar ATLAS Tab for Excel 2007 a All Sentence Translation g Find Delete Word ATLAS Help Translates the entire book Searches for words in a translation Displays the help at once dictionary Lets you change the menu for application priority of a translation and delete translation b Sheet Translation words saved to a user dictionary Translates the sheet that is displayed f Add Word k Word Entry Support Adds words to a Helps with creating batch c Selected Sentence user dictionary registration file Translation Translates the selected text Q ey Q Direction AUTO x Ey T Word Registration Template Eg Sal Environment General bd Add All Words Translate Translate Translate Translation Add Find Delete Word Entry ATLAS All Sheet Selected Editor Detail Settings Word Word TA Add To Translation Memory Support Help Translate Transi e Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Batch Add Help e d Translation Editor Translation Direction h Word Registration m Cancel Opens the entire Specifies the input and Template Quits the document or output language Displays a template for current selected text in Select from AUTO EJ creating batch registration translation Translation Edi
54. and uncheck Use only certified plug ins Preferences Categories Basic Tools Commenting A C Use single key accelerators to access tools Documents Create links from URLs Full Screen PP sole Lied bl le bk f C 1 Click Page Display Make Hand tool read articles C Make Hand tool use mouse wheel zooming JavaScript Measuring 2D Measuring 3D Meeting Multimedia C Show splash screen Multimedia Trust A New Document _ Use only certified plug ins R 2 Re move Online Services th C h eck Reading C Emit passthrough PostScript when printing Application Startup For details refer to W Setting up Acrobat and Adobe Reader in Basics on page 80 17 uononpon u Introduction 3 Click the Layout Translation button on the tool bar Translation pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional File Edit Yiew Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window ATLAS Help TRAORE MA O Os PA Create PDF d Combine Files lt Changing the Quick ATLAS Startup Method You can set Quick ATLAS to automatically start up when starting Windows The activated Quick ATLAS program is resident on the task tray Operation 1 Right click the Quick ATLAS icon on the task tray and then select Options from the displayed menu The Quick ATLAS Options dialog box appears Select the Start Quick ATLAS when starting Windows checkbox Click the OK button The set
55. are displayed in the Clipboard Translation dialog box This section describes the structure of the Clipboard Translation dialog box and buttons g x This invention describes a multi mode optical switching device compr ising several regions interfacing with inorganic semiconductors Toolbar Original Text Input box Displays the original text You can edit directly TORALO FERAT ao C DINO ARa SIV IVFE FID FEF ORAL IT ERAALET a Translated Text Output box Displays the translated text T Memory da Replace A Add Property Delete x You can ed it d irectly Match Original Text Translated Text Source 100 This invention describes a m CODFBBA SHEED EAB FIT User d 16 Each mode generates positro SE FIDCL KoM EE User d Tra nslation Memory In the window Appears when you click the Translation Memory button Default setting Copy Content of Translated Text Output box Display Horizontally Copies translation results for editing Displays original and translated text Available when the translated text is edited directly horizontally Switch Translation Direction Changes the translation direction when re translating as follows Font size Changes the font size and style ant EJ JE m ane amp ps l ae 9 Kar HA Start Translation Display Vertically L Help Starts re translation after Displays original and Displays Clipboard the original text is edited translated text
56. ceeeceesseeeeeeeeeeees 204 2 AdO VN O MOIS Mi tate Paecerenmc neh cee A ance ees 219 3 Managing Data of User Dictionaries eee cceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesneeesaes 231 4 Hints on Pre Post editing for EJ Translation cccccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 240 5 Hints on Pre Post editing for JE Translation cccccccccceeceeeeeeseeeeeees 246 6 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment Settings 256 7 Editing the Main Window wdrsetashanssticeetiatiames ths tate daaccusieaeiiel 263 1 Setting the Translation Style Translation Style With ATLAS translation results can be adjusted by setting grammatical information and translation styles according to the document to be translated The translation style can be set for each translation environment separately 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and then select the environment name you want to set from Translation Environment Settings SS ATLAS Main Window er GF YB ws S g Environment Help Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Translation Environment Nami Translation Environment List Translation Environment Settings gt j Current Translation Environment Operating Environment Settings amp Setup Application Translation General Z 2 Click the English to Japanese or Japanese to English tab and then click the Translation Style button Detail Settings T
57. convenient for scheduling synchronization late at night or at other times when access to the translation service is low lt 2 __ The Translation Server allows the registration of one schedule setting Multiple administrators can be assigned Dictionary Administration Tool authorization however if multiple dictionary administrators manage ATLAS dictionaries care must be taken to prevent overwriting schedule settings made by other administrators Make one schedule setting and do not change this setting during daily update operations xlpueddy 1 Click the Server button in the Main Window and select Dictionary Management SS ATLAS Main Window rr e Q9 e Ee B amp B H Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Manipulate dictionary on server or client Ri Dictionary Management Al Configure Server Connection 2 Click the Acquire List button in the ATLAS Dictionary Management dialog box 3 Select the User Dictionary to be uploaded from the List of Client and click the Scheduled Upload button Multiple User Dictionaries can be selected L y LOUT oS LEVI IVg www my wor Gi GVL J Fal oni Stik Tachninal NieHenan NAi a lt x Log Viewer AID no z 1 Select a dictionary quire List of Server Dictionaries Automatically Next Time Update Now Scheduled Upload to be uploaded 2 Click Client List Client
58. copied text on the clipboard Key Type Translation You can translate text without lifting your hands from your keyboard Mouse Translation Translates sentences you want to translate on a Web page or on applications by simply clicking the mouse E Translation support functions ATLAS is equipped with the following functions for supporting translation Dictionaries ATLAS analyzes words and grammatical information in the dictionaries to create translated text ATLAS provides the following three types of dictionaries Standard Dictionary which is provided as the default dictionary Technical Dictionaries listing technical terms for different fields User Dictionaries to which users can add words and translations The User Dictionaries includes Common Dictionaries which can be shared by multiple users Translation Memory Using the ATLAS Translation Memory increases work efficiency when translating or creating large amounts of manuals and technical documents with a common sentence style The translations created by users are stored and accumulated in the Translation Memory as translation memory items They are automatically retrieved from the Translation Memory and displayed the next time similar sentences are translated Reusing these stored translation memory items helps to minimize the correction work increasing translation efficiency Assistance To obtain better translations ATLAS is equipped with functions to fi
59. dictionaryO002 with the translation environment set for General Notes You must first remove the User Dictionary from Dictionaries Used in Translation before deleting it from the List of Available Dictionaries 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and then select General from Translation Environment Settings 2 Inthe List of Available Dictionaries select User dictionary0002 and then click the Delete button Detail Settings General Dictionary Settings English to Japanese Japanese to English Translation Memory List of Available Dictionaries Dictionaries Used in Translation 1 Common0001 D User dictionary0002 fejUser dictionary0001 1 Select dictionary 60 Business Packet lt lt Don t Use 61 Manual Packet 62 Mail Packet Priority 63 Entertainment Packet New 64 Chat Packet 65 Patent Packet Property v 67 Patent Procedure Packet Import Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0001 Coe Common Dictionary Help o 2 Click 3 Click the Yes button All of the registered words and translation memory in User dictionary0002 will be deleted After being deleted they cannot be restored even if Detail Settings dialog box is closed by canceling Delete dictionary 131 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 4 Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you
60. eNS deorbit lt X H gt lt WA B gt gt i i 29 drit lt X B gt lt 4 drit 0 gt 7 gt ild Si BAATS re enter lt X Bih gt lt B gt lt a re entry O gt gt Hi Si HBAAItTS st lt xXx B gt lt A R gt lt 4k sat sat sitting sits gt gt S il Sil 7A 4 take full advantage of lt X gt lt H gt lt ik took full advantage of taken full advantage of taking full advantage of takes full advantage of gt lt 2 taking full advantage 7 gt When adding an English idiom use preposition or adverbial phrase gt i EDED ERAS drag out lt X W gt lt A R gt lt i a gt Verb Adjective Noun Format as follows to place an object between a verb anda a RAA Japanese verb A English adjective A lt Japanese verb form gt A lt English Noun gt A lt English plural form gt Japanese verb form Contents of entry lt A E gt Entered only when the Japanese verb form is F3 For Japanese verb form refer to Reference for Japanese verb form in Basics on page 148 English Noun Contents of entry lt 7 A English Noun A English plural form number gt If a Japanese verb can be translated as a noun specify a corresponding English noun Ex different Ezz 4 difference For the English plural form number refer to Plural form number table in Basics on page 148 English plural form Contents of entry l
61. edit translation results Loading a document in lt Translation Editor gt 1 Click the Editor button in the Main Window SS ATLAS Main Window P E S lE S A E Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Glick on an icon to start processing 2 Click the Open button 48 ATLAS Translation Editor untitled File Sit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help 3 Select the file you want to translate and then click the Open button Look in O Sampe amp e ae Ee coop Jesamp E TOBACCO O Ichitaro Jewdadd Yakurei ae E Jtmsmpl 1 Select the file J NATUPRO E Etmsmpl H Sweden File name fEisamp Cec ick Each sentence of the loaded file is displayed in each Original text cell on the Translation Editor window uo1 0npo1 u Introduction Tips 4 5 Loading a file from Windows Explorer You can load a file from Windows Explorer To do so right click a file on the Windows Explorer select Send To and then ATLAS Translation Editor Also you can drag and drop a file from Windows Explorer into the Translation Editor Files the Translation Editor can read The Translation Editor can read the following types of files Text files txt Horizontal translation files trc Combined translation file trd Original files jpn eng Vertical translation files tra Translation files eng jpn Rich
62. example shows the selected words in a pair of double brackets Ex 1 We call him the big boss ALTE BIL FREKEWRALEMVUET We call him the big boss AAT eBIE He big boss EFEVET Ex 2 Original text Translated text HETI TILLY kKAX N F ERE Toilet paper is written the letter in China HATIK IL Yy hA FRR EBS Toilet paper is written FH in China 1 Select the string of original text you wish to leave as it is in the translated text Original text Translated text He Cth LD vk rE E 2 Select Insert Non Translation Brackets from the Edit menu File Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Undo Delete Ctrl Z Gut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Delete Del Insert Control Brackets Insert Non Translation Brackets Insert Translation Memory Variables Hints gt To delete the control brackets select Delete Mark from the Assistance menu and select Control Brackets Non Translation Brackets or All gt The brackets used as Control Brackets and Non translation Brackets can be changed 1 Select Translation Environment from the Translation menu 2 Select the English to Japanese or Japanese to English tab and click the Translation Style button 3 Use the Brackets tab to set Control Brackets Non Translation Brackets Set Control Brackets become single brackets while set Non translation Brackets become double brackets Set brackets become valid when the next symbol i
63. for Translation Dictionaries Used in Translation on page 126 Neither 2 A4 nor Standard Dictionary can be used as a User Dictionary name A dictionary name cannot be prefixed with parenthesis When you import a User Dictionary in the shared folder of another PC be sure to select Full Control of the Share Permission option Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary HM Downloading User Dictionaries The latest user dictionaries and ATLAS Series plug ins are posted on the ATLAS Internet Update Web page This section describes how to download user dictionaries from the ATLAS Internet Update Web page lt 2 __ _ To download plug ins you must login as a user with Administrator permissions 1 Click the Help button in the Main Window and select Internet Update ATLAS Main Window er e Q9 BF A B amp GB SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Display URL of ATLAS update Help Gontents F1 Help Index Internet Help hternet Update ATLAS Product Information About ATLAS The ATLAS Internet Update Web page is displayed For details on subsequent operations refer to ATLAS Internet Update Web page E Importing a User Dictionary from Another PC Import You can use ATLAS user dictionaries created on other PCs on your PC This section describes the steps to import User dictionaryPCA with the translation env
64. found in the Standard Dictionary or Technical Dictionaries E Dictionaries ALTAS has the following three types of dictionaries For details refer to Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary in Basics on page 122 Standard Rots ee Dictionary User Dictionary Technical Dictionary Standard ATLAS To be created by the user Field specific Technical Bonin dictionary Dictionary Cannot change the You can create up to 1000 Cannot change the contents dictionaries contents Q Created by the user amp Install l Optional Products 2 Set in Dictionaries Settings None Used in Translation 2 Set in Dictionaries Used in Translation Set as Changeable Dictionary Hints gt In order to use User Dictionaries or Technical Dictionaries for translation they must be set as Dictionaries Used in Translation gt ATLAS provides the following Technical Dictionaries as default e Business Packet e Manuals Packet e Mail Packet e Entertainment Packet e Chat Packet e Patent Packet e Patent Procedure Packet e Business mail sample 26 Adding Words Dictionary Tool Translating Mail Mail Translation E Adding words After ATLAS is installed User dictionary0001 is automatically created The following explains how to add words to this dictionary This section describes the steps to add IT VFO DxryY3aF as a translation of IT Professional 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and then select J E Add Word
65. gt lt 182 Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory Hints gt The translation memory can be displayed in a separate window for lt Clipboard Translation gt lt Mouse Translation gt lt Automatic Clipboard Translation gt lt Acrobat Translation gt and lt Word Translation gt Step Translation Click the Translation Environment Settings button and select Another Window under Translation Memory Window in the Translation Environment Settings dialog box The translation memory will not be displayed in a separate window in lt Adobe Reader Translation gt 10 2 Starting Translation Memory SS Searching and editing of translation memory data can be done either in the Translation Memory Another window or in the Translation Memory In the window where part of the translation memory data is displayed as part of the calling source window SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg The lt Translation Memory gt can be used from any of the functions Translation Editor Clipboard Translation Mail Translation Mouse Translation Automatic Clipboard Translation Acrobat Translation Adobe Reader Translation and Word Translation It is not possible to directly start lt Translation Memory gt from the ATLAS Main Window Excel Translation or PowerPoint Translation To use the translation memory with these programs open lt Translation Editor gt from either of the functions and then start lt Translation Memory gt from lt Tra
66. in the current translation direction ee ee when Translation Memory is selected in Output Format Output Format C Japanese Enelish C Enelish Japanese Used to select the output contents and format Note that user dictionaries that are downloaded from Internet Update are not displayed in the Dictionary box 155 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 3 Click the OK or View button Output of the word list was terminated User dictionary0001 0 words were output to the following output file C work User dictionaryO001 TXT Display the contents of the output file Translation Memory translations are shown in the Translation Editor window Other data is displayed on the Notepad vew A Exits the dialog box When the View button is clicked the output results are displayed on the notepad or others as shown below P User dictionary0001 TXT Notepad gt batch addition format Japanese dictionary file C Documents and 2ttings info_desktop2 Local Settings Application ata Fujitsu aATLaAs v12 O JUWOOOL DIC rEnglish dictionary file C pocuments and ettings info_desktop2 Local Settings Application ata FujItsuX ATLAS V12 O EUWOOOL DIC moutput Historym tOutput 0 wordsjcNormal 0 words cAbnormal 0 words 4 26 2005 11 43 44 le Edit Format View Help Jester dictionaryoOool EJ translation priority mode Comment For the Japanese English or English Ja
67. in which a word other than the last changes its form specify it as an Irregular noun Ex tS bookof account Irregularnoun books of account 142 Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary Verb Verb JE Japanese Verb Negative Form Lah English Verb Verb Pattern C Ihtransitive Transitive Both Form Past Past Participle Present Participle Present after He Objective Particle E Sometimes Translated as Noun Yes English Noun fex R treat JRL 1 treatment 360094 gt add i6N0 addition gt f Regular Noun Sineular and Plural Uncountable Plura C Trreeular Noun Negative Form According to the Japanese in the Japanese Verb entry box the negative form for the Japanese is automatically displayed When there are several possible negative forms select one of them from the list box Verb Pattern Select the English verb pattern Form The form of the verb in the English Verb box is displayed in each entry box for Past Past Participle Present Participle and Present after He If the displayed form is inappropriate click each entry box and enter the appropriate form Objective Particle Select an objective particle for the Japanese verb after selecting Transitive or Both for Verb Pattern Sometimes Translated as Noun Set whether a verb can be used as a noun If so check the Yes checkbox enter the c
68. into a small subroutine Correction The program is divided into small subroutines Article Improper articles should be rewritten or deleted Ex Original Thit RHF AR CER NEHECHS Translation This is a device used for the final test Correction This is the device used for the final test eoo ATLAS generally uses the as an article In the following cases however a is used instead e In There is sentence structure ERD D S There is an examination e When a noun is modified by an adjective I LOR ot bought a beautiful book Tense Tenses may not be translated properly since they are not usually clarified in Japanese In this case correct them in translation Ex Original Al RIRAL TLS Translation The Al technology has advanced Correction The Al technology advances Japanese unique expressions Japanese unique expressions such as HA ah TLA are not translated into reasonable sentences In this case the English translation must be corrected Ex Original COVIK DT FILIZ ROEI CRAEAABS NTS Translation The following functions are prepared in this software Correction This software has the following functions 252 Chapter 5 Hints on Pre Post editing for JE Translation 5 3 Major Problems and Their Solutions for JE Translation io This section explains major problems for translation and their solutions E Problems of element analysis Word division e Pr
69. is not set After specifying the backup media click the Update Information button Backup information such as Most recent backup or available space is displayed gt Backed up dictionary files are saved as the dictionary file name dbk extension gt To change the back up folder because of a lack of memory etc copy AtIDicBR dat and the dictionary file name dbk extension to a new folder Doing so will carry over the backed up data from the old folder 23 SliINsoYy uoIe sues JONeg BulAsiUudY JO SjuIL s nbiuyoa peoueApY Advanced Techniques 3 95 Restoring User Dictionaries Restore Dictionary This function is allows you to restore the user dictionary common dictionary which you backed up once eo Only an Administrator can restore a common dictionary 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and select Restore Dictionary from Management Menu Ss gt _ T eA QG Co BS F Pj Editor Clipboard Mail Quick TLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Restores the user dictionary Environment Help YF EJ Add Word R EJ Eind Delete Word ce A A all Ti Add All Translation memory Dn Merge Dictionary Data Q Reindex Dictionary T Backup Dictionary fi Restore Dictionary 2 Click the Specify folder button Restore the user dictionary Specify restore folder D backup Specify folder Select dictionary Most recent backup Japanese dictionary file Run
70. memory using Translation Editor Hints gt When you want to register all translation memory items using a function other than Translation Editor you can register them with user dictionaries other than the Changeable dictionary For details on storing Translation Memory refer to 10 4 Storing Translation Memory Items on page 191 Furthermore the following contents can be stored in the changeable dictionary Information on top priority words when the priority of a translated word is changed using Find Delete Word or Change Word Information on words translated words that are temporarily removed from use including information on words in the Standard Dictionary that are temporarily removed from use Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary WE About the dictionary icon in the dialog box The following table describes the meaning of the dictionary icons shown on the Dictionary Settings tab in the Detail Settings dialog box Find Delete Word dialog box and other areas ces NN Dictionary Standard Dictionary green User Dictionary other than the Changeable Dictionary d own Technical Dictionary Indicates that the dictionary is a common dictionary of which you are the al green administrator Allows you to set a common dictionary as a changeable dictionary to add words store translation memory or update the dictionary to the Common Folder Indicates that the dictionary is a common dictionary of which you are the l Eal gre
71. message appears indicating that word addition is completed click the OK button Japanese word TT 0719337 English word TT Professional were added to the changeable dictionary in the JE direction The word has now been added ATLAS will now translate IT 70A 7 z wY a as IT Professional Utilizing Translation Memory Translation Memory The results of translation and corrections produced with ATLAS can be stored as translation examples in the translation memory in user dictionaries Translation examples stored in translation memory are used to translate similar sentences in manuals etc increasing work efficiency E What is translation memory Original and translated l l text pair are stored in Translation memory item items can be used repeatedly translation memory Original text What do you think of this plan Translated text COasthizecoRuagn Original text When do you plan to leave for Tokyo Translated text LIDRRA AHHOPE CTH Translation memory Original manual E What do you think of this plan Revised manual CORBEESBUATD E When do you plan to leave for Tokyo p LORRALROPRECID mp p Stored translation memory in future A translation memory database stores translation examples consisting of paired original and translated strings Translation memory items are referenced by the translation memory and used during subsequent translation work when there are similar sentences
72. number of translation memory items found is displayed in the Translation memory search results area To set this number 1 Select Option from the Tool menu 2 Set the number of search results and click OK Translated text searched from translation memory 186 Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory Automatic translation view area Send Translation to Translation Editor button Reflects the content on the automatic translation area to the calling side such as the Translation Editor enclosed Change word area E When you click a word in the has send it back in the Enclosed Jenvelope a automatic translation area a list of peo HATENE DALTE EA related words appears HA Clicking a displayed word reflects it in the translated text in the automatic translation area The words of the user dictionary are Automatic translation area displayed in red Displays the original text and translated text in the Translation Editor When you pass the mouse pointer over a word the corresponding translation original word is enclosed by a blue border Clicking the Send Translation to Translation Editor button fiz reflects the translated text in the Translation Editor The words of the user dictionary are displayed in red Toolbar Send to Editor Selected translated text is reflected in the Detailed View original tool such as the Translation Editor Displays all translation Edit and send to Edi
73. on page 146 Noun Noun JE Noun Plural Form Regular Noun Singular and Plural Uncountable Plural C Fregular Noun Meaning C Human Animal Organization Place Time C Concrete Object Others Sometimes Translated as Adjective M 4 Before J gt Adjective tex 2303168 metallic tool M 2 Before Noun gt Adjective ex 2 R70 gt metallic element Enelish Adjective Noun Plural Form Select the type of plural form of the translation English For an irregular noun enter the plural form in the Irregular Noun entry box Meaning Select the meaning of the noun to be added Sometimes Translated as Adjective If TO is placed after a Japanese noun or a noun is placed before another noun set whether to translate it as an English adjective To translate it as an adjective check the checkbox and enter the corresponding English adjective in the English Adjective entry box The word entered here is called a derived word Hints gt Specify the English noun plural form by referring to the following examples e Regular Noun The plural form is automatically judged e Singular and Plural Select to set a noun that has the same form in both the singular and the plural such as sheep deer and salmon e Uncountable Select to set an uncountable such as news information and coffee e Plural Select to set a noun such as people or police gt Fora compound noun
74. our lt N1 management consulting services gt Thank you very much for the 33rd extension Alesse Re LET Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 4 RATE 25 BACK FORW vv Only Translation memory search results area We would like to thank you very much for applying for our lt N1 management consulting services gt Thank you very much for the other day FA BUNS SOET Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 15 RATE 37 has ina 1 1 BACK FORW Bl We would like to thank you very much for applying for our lt N1 management consulting services gt tib me AmA a a me a ee BACK FORW Translation memory search results area Automatic Translation View area much for applying for our lt N1 management consulting services gt EEO M RBI ILS o EAICRBLJAC CEC RILIEL EBS gt thank you very much BUMS El We woul like to thank you very BILE BACK FORW Only Automatic Translation View area Two display modes are available in the Translation Memory window simple view and detailed view normal view You can toggle between them by clicking the Simple View and Detailed View buttons EI Translation Memory Edit View Tool Help BAB s sey x aoe AUTO We would like to thank you very much for applyit v Thank you very much for the other day FB BVUMESCAWET Thank you very much for the 3Grd extension ARIS RE
75. ovh ck gc s Bae dod wae Bete wc 252 Present Participle 005 213 Print out Translation Editor 76 PAO ted a tela stack cae kek dete aod Ste ced 151 Problems amp Solutions 169 Q QUICK ATLAS as dentate auatdt aaa dads 112 Quick ATLAS Automatically Starting 121 Quick ATLAS Configuring environment 113 R Reading Translation Editor 74 Reading Web Translation 108 Reference for Adding Words 146 Reference for English Verb Pattern 147 Reference for Japanese Verb Form 148 Reference for Judging part of Soeech 146 Index Reindex User Dictionary 234 Rename User Dictionary 132 Replace Translation Editor 70 Restore User Dictionary 238 Restore Dictionary 005 238 Rewriting Special Structures EJ 242 S Search Complete match 149 Search Text strings match 150 Searching Stored Translation Memory 175 Selected Area Translation 9 Selected Sentence Translation Excel 97 Selected Sentence Translation PowerPoint 100 Selected Sentence Translation Word 91 Selecting a cell amp au hud 3 824 due Rea ee Rea 10 Selecting a character string 9 Selection Translation Acrobat 85 Sentence Number button 53 Sentence Style of Translation
76. replaced correctly Manually replace it and reenter the word When translating into English all of the replaced words are displayed in the original form Correct the ending of the word when necessary 2 16 Specifying Parts of Speech for EJ Translation 3 You can improve the translation accuracy by adding a symbol specifying the part of speech after the word The following symbols can be added as parts of speech Noun _N or _n Verb _V or _v Adjective _A or _a Adverb _D or _d 1 Double click the word whose part of speech you wish to add Translated text RROTA RRINE Original text Stay in Tokyo in Tokyo 2 2 Select Insert Part of Speech Code from the Edit menu and select a part of speech Noun Code in this example File Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Undo Translation Ctrl Z Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Delete Del Insert Control Brackets Insert Non Translation Brackets Insert Translation Memory Variables Verb Code Convert Adjective Code Find gt Adverb Code A code _N in this sample identifying the part of speech will be added after the text you have specified 73 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 3 Translate the text The translation result will be displayed Translated text RAOT EO Rn COPE F Original text Stay in Tokyo Stay _N in Tokyo Hints gt You can directly enter a part of speech symbol in
77. text format files rtf Excel books xls xlsx xlsm xlsb Word document files doc docx docm PDF files pdf 1 PowerPoint files ppt ptx pptm 1 ATLAS can only read PDF files when Acrobat has been installed ATLAS cannot read PDF files when only Adobe Reader is installed Click the All Sentence Translation button 8 ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 Sample Ejsamp txt File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Os ileal lex aj x a r seal fal e No Original text Translated text This invention describes a multi mode optical 1 switching device comprising several regions interfacing with inorganic semiconductors Each mode generates positrons and a photocurrent 2 in several regions in response to control signals of different wavelengths of light D Translation starts 5 ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 Sample Ejsamp txt File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help a Pa Hlal 2 AUTO ge General al v g Original text Translated text CORA TASS kA SL ODON a BEDI SIF tet 9 ew Translated text DLV CERBALET J BEAL ODOR COOR ot efl ekki jia BET AENA This invention describes a multi mode optical switching device comprising several regions interfacing with inorganic semiconductors Each mode generates positrons and a photocurrent in several regions in response to control signals of diff
78. the Translation Editor window allows you to tile the Translation Editor and Translation Memory windows as shown below a ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V13 S A BAA EI Translation Memory ption Help Dear Mr Suzuki SpA We would like to thank you very SONI i eg much for applying for our Zia EACLE CE lt N1 management consulting EE KULOB services lt N1 The original and one copy of KN1 BEDD JHI LEa an agreement gt are enclosed 1a saHenTET I think the agreement HoE 40 SHOAL YELE encompasses everything we Se eae talked about last week Attached to this contract is a lt N1 UI ASAD SATO copy of lt N2 the Minutes of F L D gt OAD SEL Understanding gt which resulted To lt N2 from the discussions of lt N1 your mia ay ndin Minutes N group with Mr Yamamoto E ODA LET If it meets with your approval ne NERUL TIEID lt N1 please sign both copies and Fh MAMIE a Ao return the original to lt N1 me gt T FULFILL C lt PESL o Please send it back in the kiia mere 1 enclosed envelope We sincerely hope that our SOARS RL COR handling of this business will meet BOH E AICO REL Wore with your entire satisfaction GAENE TRUET Please let me know if we canbe HID ERDHIZII J OCeH of any service to you HURT oh HEISE F Sincerely yours ave Edit View Tool Help Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 15 RATE 37 We would like to thank you very much for applyi
79. the Original text cell gt You can also use the code to specify the part of speech for other translation functions such as Application Translation gt You cannot use this function for Japanese English translation 2 17 Reading Sentences in the Translation Editor E When Microsoft Agent is installed on your PC you can have it read sentences in the Translation Editor window Microsoft Agent can read both Japanese and English sentences For details on how to download Microsoft Agent visit the ATLAS Web page http software fujitsu com jp atlas Hints gt Before using the speech function perform the following operations to confirm that the speech function is enabled 1 Click the Environment button in the Main window and select Operating Environment Settings The Operating Environment Settings dialog box appears 2 Check the Enable Reading function check box and click the OK button gt To confirm that Microsoft Agent is properly installed click the Environment button in the Main Window select Reading Option and then confirm that Microsoft Agent Japanese Engine and English Engine are all set to Enable Reading Option is displayed when the Enable Reading function checkbox is selected under Operating Environment Settings gt The Japanese Engine can only be used when you login as Administrator or as a user with Administrator permissions However in Windows Vista logging in as Administrator gives
80. the method for displaying matching ratio match value and translation Set the following two items in the ATLAS translation environment settings Match value Specifies to what degree the sentences to be translated and the translation memory items should match Translation memory that matches the setting or better is output as the translation result Display method The method for displaying the result of translated text can be changed to differentiate between text that is translated using the translation memory and text translated by automatic translation Translation using translation memory You can create translation data by consulting data stored in the Translation Memory Specifically when you select a original sentence in an original document opened using an ATLAS function such as Translation Editor to activate the Translation Memory any sentences similar to the original one are retrieved from the translation memory and displayed in the window The original text and corresponding original and translated text found in the translation memory is displayed Also this list is color coded so that you can intuitively recognize which words or character strings match those in the translation memory When you find the right translation from the list you can then select and apply it to your translation On the Translation Memory Another window if you cannot find an appropriate translation in the list you can use the result of machine tr
81. to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button Hints gt When the Don t delete the dictionary files check box is selected the dictionary file stays in the hard disk but cannot be seen as a User Dictionary by ATLAS To set the dictionary file as a usable dictionary you must Import the dictionary gt You can delete the Technical Dictionaries you have downloaded from the Translation Server However you cannot use Don t delete the dictionary files option The Technical Dictionaries you installed using the installation procedure must be deleted using the uninstallation procedure E Renaming a User Dictionary 132 You can rename User Dictionaries In this section the name User dictionary0O002 is changed to Uuser_business when the translation environment is set to General eo To rename a User Dictionary set as Dictionaries Used in Translation remove it from Dictionaries Used in Translation to List of Available Dictionaries then rename it gt A dictionary name cannot be prefixed with parenthesis gt Neither A nor Standard Dictionary can be used as a User Dictionary name 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and then select General from Translation Environment Settings
82. type of the document to be translated Translation Environment ATLAS allows you to set up the Translation Environment that defines the dictionaries and translation style to be used for translation You can use an appropriate environment simply by switching their names without resetting dictionaries and translation methods every time you translate documents ATLAS provides 9 translation environments as follows General Thesis Manual Letter Mail Business Patent Contract Newspaper Magazine Entertainment Select the Translation Environment This section explains how to set the translation environments used for ATLAS You can select the translation environment on the ATLAS Main Window or on each ATLAS function Hints gt After the translation environment is changed for each function the environment set in Main Window is also changed gt Use the Translation Environment button to view the Detail Settings of the current translation environment when changing translation environments For details refer to Help ATLAS Main Window Select from the Environment button in the Main Window ATLAS Main Window eT FF G S e S F amp F FH Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help DER Specify current translation er aal Translation Dininin mnt l it General Thesis Manual Letter Mail Buces Tranglation Editor Fatent Clipboard Translation General k
83. use Outlook Outlook Express Windows Mail Eudora Lotus Notes Mail or Becky you can use the Mail Translation toolbar to translate a displayed mail item For the basics on how to use Mail Translation refer to Translating Mail Mail Translation in Introduction on page 24 6 1 Starting Mail Translation Click the Mail button in the Main Window The Mail Translation icon appears on the task tray and Mail Translation begins ATLAS Main Window r g Cia 3 duik ATLAS Web Useful Tool Sener Tool Environment Help PC screen Mail Translation icon 4 310 The Mail Translation toolbar appears when you launch your mail program Hints gt When you start Mail Translation Startup Guide a simple explanation of how to use Mail Translation is displayed Select Do not show this dialog next time to not display the startup guide the next time you run the program To display the Startup Guide again right click the Mail Translation icon on the task tray and select the Startup Guide command from the pop up menu gt You can set Mail Translation to start automatically when you boot up Windows For details refer to 6 4 Automatically Starting Mail Translation on page 111 109 Basics 6 2 Layout of Mail Translation toolbar This section describes the structure of the Mail Translation toolbar and the buttons used The Mail Translation toolbar is only displayed when Mail Translation is act
84. vertically Translation help Translation Editor Translation Memory Translation Environment Starts up the Translation Editor Starts up the Translation Settings Starts Translation Editor used to Memory Changes Translation store translation memory etc environment 101 SVI1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics Translation Memory In the window appears when you click the Translation Memory button Default setting For Translation Memory In the window refer to W Translation Memory In the window Layout in Basics on page 190 4 2 Hiding Clipboard Translation dialog box Eee When it is not necessary to check the translation result after Clipboard Translation you can hide the Clipboard Translation dialog box In this case the translation results are copied to the clipboard 1 Click W on the right side of the Clipboard button in the Main Window and select Clipboard Preview ATLAS Main Window INY N Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Display the te we Clipboard Translation B Clipboard Preview 2 Click the Translation Environment Settings button 3 Check the Only translate without the window when called from the main window check box and click the OK button Translation Environment Settings Translation Environment Name General iv Only translate without the window when called from the main window lranslation memory window Ano
85. 0 eee 240 CUSE ex seat 208 a Sarnia Goat ined gS et ay EEES 216 Clearing administrator rights 165 Clipboard Translation 20 48 101 Clipboard Translation dialog box 101 Code of Translation EJ 205 Code of Translation JE 213 Collaboration with Translation Server 3 Combined translation fille 57 Comma and Period 5 205 Comma at Both Ends of Relative Clause 218 Common Dictionary 123 157 Common Dictionary Changing the Administrator 165 Index Common Dictionary Converting a user dictionary 162 Common Dictionary Delete 168 Common Dictionary New Making 161 Common Dictionary Setting a Common Folder 160 Common Dictionary Upload Download 163 Common Folder Management Tool 169 Complementing omitted words EJ 241 Compound Proper Noun Containing Undefined WOM 3 decoy he oar de ne eae eke Ga ears 207 Compound Word of Katakana 206 Configure Server Connection 276 Confirmation Translation 61 Control Non Translation Brackets 212 218 CON enean ess oes ook eae ee 66 COUIED v 32 veute beeches ede eas 210 COULD BE 34554 324 42 9425 aa 210 COUME prane tere N a wor Gees E 140 Creating a Common Dictionary 161 Creating a User Dictionary 127 D Wale eta 5 bs cath as 2 o
86. 006 08 06 2006 08 06 2006 08 06 2006 06 06 2006 06 06 2006 05 06 2006 02 06 2006 01 06 2006 31 05 2006 25 05 2006 25 05 2006 25 05 2006 25 05 2006 25 05 2006 25 05 2006 25 05 2006 lt 13 48 56 328 13 47 45 890 13 40 16 593 09 44 44 312 10 34 06 812 10 19 09 921 09 21 20 437 11 43 16 281 09 52 06 281 09 15 38 968 14 51 31 546 14 51 18 703 14 25 53 078 14 25 40 296 14 08 03 453 13 26 43 593 13 22 23 515 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 090 TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI TRDI SUCCESS_CHA SUCCESS_CHA SUCCESS_QUI SUCCESS_SER SUCCESS_QUI SUCCESS_SER SUCCESS_SER SUCCESS_SER SUCCESS_SER SUCCESS_SER SUCCESS_QUI SUCCESS_QUI SUCCESS_QUI SUCCESS_QUI SUCCESS_QUI SUCCESS_SER SUECESS_SER 557365 _ 979897 836583 _ 979897 _ 979897 426173 Index Symbols fe aa Gi tee alas NETES ESEE EEST 262 eng Extension 00200 e eee 58 jpn Extension 00200 e eee 58 tmx Extension 0000 eee eee 197 tra Extension 0 0000 ee eee 57 tre Extension n a nnana annann 57 drd Extension 4 52 6 edt Ge a a 57 XT EXTENSION seie ar E bees a 58 In Alphabetic C
87. 1 FIS QUPUT i a a Ge eae 154 Files created by ATLAS 57 Files the Translation Editor can read 6 Files the Translation Editor can Save 7 FNA TEX tard od hte cies eda hee 69 Finding Words Dictionaries 149 For Letter Mail EJ 207 For Letter Mail JE 214 For Newspaper 2 0000e eee 213 FOP alent Ged oir ent tee h aea eae 207 FOr Paten JE ccu5 irna ae 214 FOMM e eiua a Sato 140 141 143 144 Fuzzy MAIC epas 2c ets donee etna RA 30 H HEID Sh oe tee or ha lcceS Aura Saat aa 35 Hints on Translation EJ 240 Hints on Translation JE 246 Horizontal translation file 57 Toto anig E E E elmer 245 Hom JE 5 oe err 1G e ea eE ae te Me 254 FAUS esc i s aes arh Batty aan deeded 4 ar 217 Imperative 0 0 02 205 215 Import Translation Environment 259 Import User Dictionary 129 Insert Control Brackets 12 Insert Non Translation Brackets 14 Insert Translation Memory Variables 197 Install Application Translation 79 Internet Update 00 3 35 Inverted structure EJ 244 J Japanese Negative Form 148 Japanese unique expressions 252 Japanese English File Output 154 K Key Type Translation 48 115 Key Type Translation Layo
88. 102 Select the translation environment The translation environment for Automatic Clipboard Translation is the same as the environment specified for Mouse Translation For details of how to specify the translation environment for Mouse Translation refer to 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment on page 47 Q Translating by copying a sentence WE Switching Automatic Clipboard Translation ON OFF You can switch Automatic Clipboard Translation ON OFF 1 Right click the Quick ATLAS icon on the task tray and select Automatic Clipboard Translation ON status Selecting the command again turns the feature OFF v Mouse Translation When you turn the feature ON the translation result of Key Type Translation the text in the clipboard is automatically displayed ATLAS Menu gt Options Help Startup Guide Version Information Shut Down Quick ATLAS E1517 ON status 118 1 9 Chapter 7 Quick ATLAS Basics Layout and Type of Dialog BOX Mouse Translation Key Type Translation Automatic Clipboard Translation WE Layout of dialog box This section describes the structure of the dialog box displayed for Mouse Translation Key Type Translation and Automatic Clipboard Translation and the buttons that are available For Mouse Translation and Automatic Clipboard Translation Pin Unpin Sets whether to automatically close the window when another window
89. 261 1281 1301 1321 apt 6 m Aeman mi a ae Ae a Al a era Introduction Chapter 1 The General Theory Chapter 2 The Postulates of the Classical Economics Chapter 3 The Principle of Effective Demand Words 5 474 SD English U S Insert 94 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation 3 Click the Translate Selected button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar ATLAS G RN Direction AUTO Y Ei K Output Destination Preview Dialog Box Sia Environment General X H jovertiear Horizonta as Pair Transla Translate J Translation Step Fa j r Add Find Delete ATLAS All Editor Translation yz Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Trans Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help When the translation is completed the results are displayed Translation Result Preview Translation Result Ashi SORE Replace with Selected Area Copy to Clipboard Cancel 4 Do either of the following When replacing selected original text with the translated text 1 Click the Replace with Selected Area button When copying to the clipboard 1 Click the Copy to Clipboard button Hints gt If you select multiple sentences in different places in Word 2002 or later their translation may fail part of sentences may be translated 3 4 Translating an Excel File pen eMM i The following explains how to translate the text of
90. 49g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques E COULD 1 COULD Specifies how could should be translated Original text You could stay here DIT CIE CE ELE Hi tHIkK CIE CHET di tlkT CIEL THEMEVECA Bisel WECE EL Bisteee c WEL CEDEVEEA TLE IA Y ELT Atko TIREI ABAD Y ELL 2 COULD BE Specifies how could be should be translated HaMBVYET HBL TRET SHBMHVET g Original text This illness could be fatal CORRS CH SBAMHYV ET CHOGEMSHVYELE COMAMILMaAH CHOBEMHVYIELL CEITMILEZYECATCLE COMRMILMMH TRHANIE Y EHATLE Hints gt With Tcouldbe setto G2Itnl EY EtA the negative form in the original text is translated into the form TH VEZIA YU EtA If TTIR Y EHACLEI is specified the negative form in the original text is translated into the form CHS WEIL YEGCACLE 210 Chapter 1 Setting the Translation Style Translation Style E MAY 1 MAY Specifies how may should be translated Original text He may borrow three books at a time Setting Translated text Rit EIS HOEY SHLLNEtA klt EIS 3 MOAEEY SPELNELA TEDEWEA IL EIS MOREY TEMEVELA lk EIL3MOREHVSTL ES Rit HEIL 3 MOREY ET 2 MIGHT Specifies how might should be translated Original text He might borrow three books at a time klt ESMOR SPELNELA klt EIS 3 MOREY SPELHELA klt EIS 3 MOREY TEMDEVELA lk ES MOAEIEY STL ES klt ES MOAEIEY SHELNECA TLR E MUST 1 MUST Spec
91. A lt English verb pattern gt A lt Objective particle gt A lt English form gt English verb pattern Contents of entry lt X A B gt lt X Ait gt lt X A Bit gt For the English verb pattern refer to Reference for English verb pattern in Basics on page 147 f nothing is entered the pattern is automatically judged by ATLAS Objective particle Contents of entry lt H7 A Particle for object gt Required for an English transitive or intransitive transitive verb For the available types of particles refer to Objective particle in Basics on page 147 English form Contents of entry lt 221 EA Past Past particle Present particle Present after He gt Enter the English form If nothing is entered the form is automatically judged and added by ATLAS Sample gt KAR Si WET like lt X W gt lt B W gt gt PSA Si WEO sut lt X W gt lt i I gt gt KAR Si OASFHL flatter lt X gt a Adjective Adjective Format HZ ia KARA Japanese adjective A English adjective Sample gt PRH EE ASAE uncontrollable 2 226 Chapter 2 Adding Words Noun Adjective Format Zid 722 A Japanese Noun A English adjective A lt without O gt without O Y Contents of entry lt M L gt Specify how to translate English adjective noun Ex lt L gt specified local paper gt HARE lt N L g
92. A search is made of the Translation Memory and the results are displayed ATLAS Clipboard Translation Iam Suzuki from the XYZ Co Expansion 33 is pleased Gertainly T Memory amp Replace Add Property Match a 13 JTH o TAHTA i There was a deliberate calc LIELA F eSTRO However the theft and the LILIS ie But Iam trying to keep the COMBI TABRIT A considerably impossible r Multiple hybrid optical dewi Since that first settlement fad 4 SORBED Tve been fighting for over t FISTS TARE eA T niet think it s a hie mictake ID translation memory was found Refer to W Translation Memory In the window Layout on page 190 for how to read the Translation Memory In the window 2 Select the translated text you want to use and click the Replace button or Add button The selected translated text appears in the translated text column of the clipboard translation c Text 13 LETH o THIT Y There was a deliberate calc User 12 LIN JAE eSTRO However the theft and the User 12 LINAS ie But lam trying to keep the User 10 CORBI TTBS A considerably impossible r User 10 BRE CHASM SE Multiple hybrid optical devi User 10 ZORD RRL Since that first settlement User 10 tld TIMOR bMS Ive been fighting for overt User a L Zh hA RRG cea T niet think it s a hie mistake leer 10 e memory was found l 4 x
93. AATA Att k Store the registered data in the file 1 Select the text string you wish to translate as a clause Translated text Original text Store the registered date IENEI Select by dragging 2 Select Insert Control Brackets from the Edit menu File Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Undo Clear Translation Lock Ctri z Gut Gtr Copy Ctrl C Delete Del Insert Control Brackets Inzert Non Translation Brackets Hints gt To delete the control brackets select Delete Mark from the Assistance menu and select Control Brackets Non Translation Brackets or All gt The brackets used as Control Brackets and Non translation Brackets can be changed 1 Select Translation Environment from the Translation menu 2 Select the English to Japanese or Japanese to English tab and click the Translation Style button 3 Use the Brackets tab to set Control Brackets Non Translation Brackets Set Control Brackets become single brackets while set Non translation Brackets become double brackets Set brackets become valid when the next symbol is entered However existing symbols are not changed and the original brackets become invalid when re translated 13 uo1 0npo1 u Introduction Selecting a Non Translation Text String Insert Non Translation Brackets You can select an original text string you want to leave untranslated in the translated text The following
94. AR CHRE NEEM BRAVER BL ks TC Hilt BMES EATUS ELD JERES AHS HC o TLS Even the criticism that Japan is refusing the internationalization of the technology by the language barrier because the majority of the research of the science and technology in Japan is announced in Japanese has arisen O BAILSITSHFRiNOMROAMAISAABCHRE NS TORD AAD ERNER CHO BEMEe HBA CUS ELD JERS A HS HC o TLS The majority of the research of the science and technology in Japan is announced in Japanese Therefore even the criticism that Japan is refusing the internationalization of the technology by the language barrier has arisen Action gt Avoiding using a conjunctive particle Ex x OA THRISKRRIGEL THOM RIER LA b A Ya VIDDUT Ohi DRAILGO TEE The discussion about the home automation has become active recently though the OA market reaches at the term of growth O OATHIBISRRHITEL i ARLI AY 3 VILDU TC ODA Ezo Cie The OA market reached at the term of growth The discussion about the home automation has become active recently 246 SliNsoY uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY 104 SyuIH s nbiuyoa peoueApY Chapter 5 Hints on Pre Post editing for JE Translation Avoiding verbose expressions Verbose expressions may be translated into awkward English sentences causing misinterpretations Action Deleting unnecessary words Ex Xx YIRKUL VS RMORRICCK Put software into the state of the start O YIR DIFERE Start software Action Rewriting a sente
95. AUTO 7 Output Destination Output to Another Doc ea Environment General 7 D vertical Horizontar Save as Pair Translate Translate Translation Step Add Find Delete F ATLAS All Selected Editor Translation Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help 8 6 4 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 3 ae fi Se a E Control Menus If you click this button a list of commands for this window is displayed Selected Sentence Translation ATLAS can also translate selected parts of Word files For details refer to 3 3 Translating a Word File in Basics on page 88 Tips Select the translation environment You can specify the translation environment used with Word Translation For details refer to 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment in Basics on page 47 Reflecting translation results from the Translation Editor in source documents Translation Editor can be started from Word Translation You can reflect translated text which is translated with the Translation Editor in the original Word document For details refer to Hi Reflecting and saving translation results in source documents in Basics on page 59 Automatically translating text sentence by sentence When lt Step Translation gt is executed from lt Word Translation gt text in the Word document can be automat
96. Auto Translation ON state Original Text Orieinal Text OFF state state where Auto button was not pressed The web page is displayed in its original language Translate it by pressing the Translation button if necessary ON state state where Auto button was pressed An automatic translation is made simultaneously with the display of the web page An ATLAS translation in progress message will appear You can discontinue translation by clicking the Cancel button Hints gt Ifthe displayed page update was executed by clicking the Update button a of Internet Explorer the translation will not be executed even if the Auto button is in the ON state 107 SV1LV Buisp 4L s seg Basics 5 4 Reading Sentences Aloud aaSaSSa This section describes how to have the speech agent read aloud text strings selected in Web Translation Hints gt Microsoft Agent must be installed on your PC to use the speaking function For details of how to download Microsoft Agent visit the ATLAS home page http software fujitsu com jp atlas gt The speech function does not operate with Internet Explorer when it was started up before Microsoft Agent is installed Close Internet Explorer and then restart it gt Before using the speech function perform the following operations to confirm that the speech function is enabled 1 Click the Environment button in the Main window and select Operating Environme
97. CORI SttO lt N1 gt B We would like to thank you User i BSS CaM ELEA Itis Suzuki who visited that User In the window EELEE SOSE Could you send the correct User j Adobe Reader lt NIDEMELSL PERE S Attached to this contract is User Appears when you click 24 SEDAR BEL TOD We sincerely hope that our User s the Translation Memory 10 translation memory was Found button Default setting Copy Content of Translated text Box Copies translation results Display Horizontally i i i Displays original and translated text Switch Translation Direction horizontally Changes the translation direction when re translating as follows AVIO L EJ JE Changes the font size and style ale mh Aue Start Translation L Help Starts retranslation when Display help the original text has been edited Display Vertically Displays original and Translation translated text vertically Environment Settings Changes Translation environment Font Settings Translation Editor Starts up the Translation Editor Translation Memory Starts up the Translation Memory When Adobe Reader is used for translation this icon is not displayed 83 Basics WE Maintaining layout during translation The Acrobat PDF file is translated while maintaining the layout of the original document This function is not available in Adobe Reader Start the procedure after you open a PDF file 1 Click the Layo
98. Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Setup translation function into the applications Translation Environment Settings gt Operating Environment Settings amp Setup Application Translation 2 Check the application to be used with ATLAS and click the OK button The applications for which the Application Translation was installed when ATLAS was installed are checked by default If the checked applications are open close them and click the OK button Check the application to be used in Application Translation Remove the check mark when Application Translation is not to be used i Word 2007 W Excel 2007 jf PowerPoint 2007 jf Adobe Reader 8 Please terminate all the checked applications before clicking the OF button coe ob _ After the installation of Application Translation is successfully completed the Exiting Application Translation setup message appears When the application is started the ATLAS tab appears l z Documenti Microsoft Word i x a id Tee Environment General ntal eal Save as Pair Translate Translate Translation tep Add Find Delete All Selected Editor ct JEZ v Detail Settings Word Word Bakes Original and Translation Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Page l 0of1 Words 0 Japanese Insert In case of Word ATLAS tab E Setting up Acrobat and Adobe Reader To translate in Acrobat
99. D BEIE E Setting Translated text though The voltage is normal though the current is abnormal The current is abnormal but the voltage is normal ESD Specifies how clauses set in the h E 3 pattern should be translated Original text WARY S NTUOADARL E Setting Translated text whether Check whether parts are detached Check if parts are detached Position of If Clause Specifies where the if clause should be placed in the translated text Original text L7 ZISRY MHNIL Me PTS Setting Translated text At beginning of sentence If the mistake is found in data processing is interrupted At end of sentence Processing is interrupted if the mistake is found in data F AKI Specifies how a purpose clause should be translated Original text LAF LAF FERBITFSEDICINNAZTI FS Setting LE Setting Translated text Set the password so that the system may protect data without may Set the password so that the system protects data 217 syns y uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY 6 Advanced Techniques E Phrase 1 2 3 1 2 218 g 4 before Noun Phrase Specifies how a present form noun modifier should be translated Original text Hx Yapo nm Setting Translated text ed Noun Phrase Detached parts Noun Phrase to be ed Parts to be detached F 5t Specifies where a to infinitive indicating a purpose should be place
100. Dictionaries and its translation to a User Dictionary l To add a word in EJ translation click the Tool button in the Main Window and then select EJ Add Word To add a word in JE translation click the Tool button in the Main Window and then select JE Add Word ATLAS Main Window T A S 6 lA amp Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Add the Word Ed EJ Add Word Eu Find Delete Word T EJ Extract All T EJ Add All 14 JE Add Word WR JE Find Delete Word 2 Set each item and then click the Settings button Part of Speech JE Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0001 lt 1 Changeable Dictionary Japanese lt ME D 2 Japanese English book of account D 3 English Part of Speech Japanese English Noun Noun am 4 Select Part of Speech Verb ike C Verb C Adjective Adjective mae ie C Adjective C Verb dverb Adverb Unit Unit Particle Preposition A Clic 1 Changeable Dictionary Select a dictionary in which you want to save a word 2 Japanese Enter a Japanese word Up to 80 characters including spaces can be added Note that Japanese entries containing a space cannot be used in JE translation 3 English Enter an English word Up to 123 letters including spaces can be entered 4 Select Part of Speech Specify a part of soeech combina
101. EL TATE RVA CE Starts with the following functions TOET available BACK FORW Clipboard Translation Quick ATLAS Mouse Translation Starts with the following functions available Automatic Clipboard Translation Acrobat Translation Translation Editor Adobe Reader Translation Mail Translation Word Translation at the time of Clipboard Translation Step Translation Quick ATLAS Mouse Translation Automatic Clipboard Translation Acrobat Translation Word Translation at the time of Step Translation E Translation Memory Another window Layout or In the Translation Memory windows you can compare original text with translation memory items found in translation memory Color coding of translation memory items makes it easy to identify their match status resulting in highly efficient translation In the Translation Memory Another window display these areas can switch positions and one area can be hidden by using the Display Switching button Translation Memory Another window Areas Translation Memory Another window is divided into two areas 185 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics The translated text retrieved from translation memory is displayed in the Translation memory search results area The translated text is displayed in the Automatic translation view area E Translation Me mory Seles Edit View Tool Help Toolbar gt FIFE 01 1 wD Searchbar Aut
102. ES SET CIS MILHEKADEMER lt FETT YE VICBBT SET CIS WISHEEAOFMEB lt OLY TLR AYR VICRBT SES CIS MIZHGKAOFEME BS FET OYE VICES SET CIS Mirta FEE ET E SHALL 1 SHALL Specifies how shall should be translated Original text He shall wait for you till you come back HEEMRSEC MLBGKEGIEOELET tQDELEF HETMROEC MLHGLEROLDELET HEEMRSEC MLHCLEAWCL ES HEEMRSET MLHTREBOIEY TT LEBVES HELDROET MELHBLEAIC LIVES HEEMRSEC MALBGKEBEET 208 Chapter 1 Setting the Translation Style Translation Style 2 SHOULD Specifies how should should be translated Original text You should apologize for your rudeness BEEORLEMSNE TF bE ORLEMSNE TT HItMISEY EEA HET ORALA AS RINI Y EEA SEEORALEMZTLES CEMBBELWCS HETEORALEHSCEMBELUWTCS LET HISTLORMALE AVES E CAN 1 CAN Specifies how can should be translated Original text You can stay here Setting Translated text Hite CIMETERS DHT CIE TE ET di te Talk CISEL TEDEWECA Hi tlk lt CICMET SBA YET Hie telko CICMEL ET 2 CAN BE Specifies how can be should be translated Original text This illness can be fatal Setting Translated text COWRISMAH HN CH SBAMHY ET DPELNETA COMAMILMaAH CHOAt NECA CHOWEMHYVET COMAMILMAH CHOHEMHVET T Y EKA TORAL CEITMLGY EA Hints gt With canbe setto TRIthIf Y EA the negative form in the original text is translated into the form TA b BRITAJ EEA 209 syns y uoejsuei 19
103. I The sentence might have been written by the person who had a humorous conception Clarifying modification Write logically corresponding sentences since sentences without proper correspondence between modifier and modificand or sentences without a modificand for a modifier or vice versa are not suited for translation Action gt Making proper correspondence Ex x COSBHIL TOKRCHS This photograph is the situation O ZOBE TOKROURNUCHS This photograph is evidence of the situation 250 Chapter 5 Hints on Pre Post editing for JE Translation Clarifying logical relations between clauses A sentence consisting of two or more clauses may not be translated correctly if the relation between them is not clear Relations between 2 clauses include cause result purpose measures and conditions Action Defining logical relations between clauses Ex x F4VMRAY VIL BAe fe Cause The tire slipped and the accident happened O 44 VKAZAYU VY FLCEROIL Ph t The accident happened because the tire had slipped Ex x DIVEVATALMSBAICCY kY SES AARMOBSADMBIZZIK Result The plant system became huge and the introduction of a more advanced control technology was needed O FIVYEVATLABAICE o HBR Y BES AMRMOBADYBILGD 12 gt The plant system became huge therefore the introduction of a more advanced control technology was needed Ex x DL Fe HA FELELJ ATETA Measures It steps on the brake and it is possible to st
104. Insert Control Brackets in Introduction on page 12 Avoiding ambiguous expressions An ambiguous sentence allows different interpretations ATLAS translates a sentence based on the most likely interpretations This may lead to translation different from the writer s intention Japanese homonyms written in hiragana are also not suited for translation since they allow different interpretations xt UL Using a definite expression Hil x COSA E mAb Oe 4TS This company produces the one of an appropriate quality O IZOHI BIG RAOMmt LETS This company produces commodities of an appropriate quality 249 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques Action Using an articulate expression Ex x lt PRIKe SHORRACLE The police made him the mastermind of the event O 23RILKt SFORBBCAGLE The police considered him to be a mastermind of the event Action Writing homonyms in kanji Ex x lL EAXAHS He is ninkigaaru O lk ARABS He is popular O Wik MMH He has the term of office Using clear Japanese Since terms coined by appending 4E or 4 or abstract sentences are not suited for translation they should be changed into clearer Japanese Action gt Avoiding awkwardly coined words Ex xX COMISBANWRBE BHOKEAIC KD TEANEDCHSI The sentence might have been written by the person who had cartooned conception O FOMISIT EFAREMS HO EAIL KD TEMNEDCHSA
105. JERAI 4 HAOSMBAMYE 30 000 yen is necessary for the member and the participation expense of 40 000 yen is necessary for the nonmember 248 Chapter 5 Hints on Pre Post editing for JE Translation Hints gt ATLAS translates a sentence with no subject into the passive voice It can be translated as follows however by changing the translation style e Translate a sentence with no subject into imperative form e Insert S to indicate a subject for a sentence with no subject or O to indicate an object for a sentence with no object during translation Writing sentences that avoid different interpretations A sentence allowing different interpretations is not suited for translation since several different translations are possible Action Changing word order to clarify modification Ex x AE AILRMENSAY e SERAT The message displayed in memory A is stored O KRMRENSAYR VEAEY AIRA D The displayed message is stored in memory A Action Using to clarify modification Ex x AE AILRMRENSAY e SERTA The message displayed in memory A is stored O X AII RRENGDAY L VEBMTS 1 The displayed message is stored in memory A Hints gt When there are two or more possible modificands ATLAS recognizes the one closest to the modifier as the modificand This recognition of modification however can be changed by using control brackets e g For details refer to Selecting a Text String as a Translation Unit
106. LO TT 3 Click the Add To Translation Memory button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar ATLAS Q eu Direction AUTO X Ei 2 Word Registration Template Sa Ao A 7 Environment General X TR add All Warde Translate Translate Translate Translation Fa gt Add Find Delete z ATLAS All Sheet Selected Editor Detail Settings Word Word Ti Add To Translation Memory Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary oa ee Help 4 Select the dictionary in which you want to store the translation memory data Store Translation Memory Dictionary JPN SSRIS SSCA ELELESSIATASLTHNET ENG think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last week JNA COL EROMA EAD EDAEN HADR F SWETLIG NRL ETET ENG If it meets with your approval please sign both copies and return the original to JPNISFIOF UCT CIBIE FSU ENG Please send it back in the enclosed envelope JPN S IDEAS CBBL TORE OO EAC CME EIS OOH THIET ENG We sincerely hope that our handling of this business will meet with your entire Skip first line Add All Guit Details Close Help 5 Click the Add All button After the data is stored the resulting information appears on the display 195 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 6 Check this information and click the Close button if the data is OK Hints gt When using Excel to register translation memory items note the following e If you attempt to perform registration and no c
107. Letter Mail Translation Shortcut Key Press Crtl Alt key of your choice to set shortcut key Automatic Translation Ctrl Alt A EJ Translation Ctrl Alt J JE Translation Ctrl Alt E The shortcut keys appear Translation Editor Ctrl Alt B You cannot directly enter T E Gea the shortcut key name Start ATLAS Mail Translation cancel The shortcut keys appear You cannot directly enter the shortcut key name Hints gt The key of your choice can be any function key F1 etc or alphanumeric key However note that the number pad keys cannot be set to shortcut keys as the key of your choice gt You cannot directly enter the shortcut key name in Translation Shortcut Key 3 Click the Settings button 6 4 Automatically Starting Mail Translation SSS This section describes how to set Mail Translation to start up automatically when you boot Windows 1 Click the Translation Settings button Sasettines on the Mail Translation toolbar 2 Check the Start ATLAS Mail Translation when starting Windows check box Mail Translation Settings Translation Environment Name Letter Mail eal Translation Shortcut Key Press Crtl Alt key of your choice to set shortcut key Automatic Translation None EJ Translation None JE Translation None Translation Editor None Translation Memory None j Start ATLAS Mail Translation when starting Windows 3 C
108. Memory List of Available Dictionaries Dictionaries Used in Translation Common0001 W use I Usergictionary0001 i Use gt gt lt j ull User dictionary0002 N i Jj Dame u Vicuuriary 2 Click 60 Business Packet AR REA 61 Manual Packet 62 Mail Packet Baits 63 Entertainment Packet New Property v 67 Patent Procedure Packet Import Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0001 Delete Common Dictionary Help cael Hints gt A dictionary can also be moved by right clicking the desired dictionary in the List of Available Dictionaries box and selecting Use gt gt from the displayed menu gt The maximum number of user and Technical Dictionaries that can be set as Dictionaries Used in Translation is 32 in total gt To remove an unnecessary dictionary from Dictionaries Used in Translation select it from the list of Dictionaries Used in Translation and then click the lt lt Don t Use button Click the OK button in the Detail Settings dialog box The Confirm Save dialog box appears Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary 4 Select Save and click the OK button Save General lt lt _o_ H AAOamo__ ___ l Click f Save az The above operation allows User dictionary0002 to be used for translation in the General translation environment Hints gt When you do not wish to overwrite previous data in Step 4 but retain it refer
109. Memory 70 v General Thesis phe i Letter Mail We are considering the plan I sent this morning Business the outstanding items Patent Contract Newspaper Magazine Entertainment Memory 70 tt OM AS an te rm EE Ie LEAT eA If you do not need the Memory70 translation environment name file created during this exercise you can delete it ala e Translated text ACI SBOE 87 12 What do you think of my plan Hints gt f there are only a few sentences that match the items stored in translation memory in which case text is displayed in blue orange color you can try setting a lower match value In addition creating separate translation environment names files for each match value makes it easy to switch between various translation environments You can also configure the translation environment to not display the fuzzy match brackets and the display that indicates the degree to which a source text string matches items already stored in translation memory In addition you can specify that 100 matches or automatic translation are placed in brackets and also change the type of bracket used For additional details on this and related topics refer to Help Translation memory data that matches part of a source text string may be utilized in the translation without displaying 100 Match or Fuzzy Match The rest of the string is automatically translated The Translated Text cell c
110. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to search the translation memory to reflect translated text gt By using Translation Editor you can reflect the translated text in E mail after confirming the match value with the translation memory or editing the translated result If you set the match value of the translation memory the search results are displayed on Translation Editor in different colors based on the match value increasing translation efficiency For the method of creating E mail using Translation Editor refer to Help WE Searching Stored Translation Memory Data in Clipboard Translation A method for using the Translation Memory In the window for lt Clipboard Translation gt is described below The Translation Memory In the window can be used for the following functions lt Clipboard Translation gt lt Quick ATLAS gt lt Mouse Translation gt lt Automatic Clipboard Translation gt lt Acrobat Translation gt 181 Basics lt Adobe Reader Translation gt lt Word Translation gt at the time of Step Translation The following description begins with the state where the clipboard translation window is displayed Translating Contents of the Clipboard Clipboard Translation in Introduction on page 20 1 Click the Translation Memory E i ATLAS Clipboard Translation TERNE HILXYZHDAD BATHS HABIT SSE T thi Iam Suzuki from the XYZ Co le Expansion 33 is pleased lt Gertainly
111. S R LET Thank you for your trouble Be HVYMESCAWVET Thank you for your kindness variously the other day FAs A OASES IIEL I asked her to do too much for this plan z BACK FORW Simple View T E Translation Me mory Edit View Tool Help BAB sre sx 2 AUTO We would like to thank you very much for applyil w El CS Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 15 RATE 37 We would like to thank you very much for applying for our lt N1 management consulting services Thank you very much for the other day FEA BUMESCAWET C Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 15 RATE 37 Eek We would like to thank you very much for applying for our lt N1 management consulting services gt Thank you very much for the 30rd extension ARISES RL LET C Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 4 RATE 25 BACK FORW Detailed View The dictionary in which the searched translation memory item is stored and the score match value are displayed in the detailed display screen 189 gJ o a O dp z lt C o gt gt rm gt Cp Basics E Translation Memory In the window Layout In the Translation Memory In the window you can compare original text with translation memory items found in translation memory Replace button Add button Replaces with selected translated text Adds selected translated text from the translation memory ATLAS C
112. SEH dL KOM Opal CHO BITRE IC 2 photocurrent in several regions in response to ee ee SS ie control signals of different wavelengths of light 2 Specify a file type and name and click the Save button The file is saved as a horizontal translation file trc Save As Save in B Sample Coop A Opo Select the file type sn file name Filename Ejbing trd lt __ 3 Click Save as type Horizontal translation file trc Cancel Help For the formats in which files can be saved refer to Hi Files created by ATLAS in Basics on page 57 Selecting a Text String as a Translation Unit Insert Control Brackets E When translating an English text into Japanese You can select a text string as aclause The following example shows the selected string in a pair of brackets Ex x If notspecified O If specified a Original text Translated text looked up the word in the dictionary FhIAHEOMBARAELE looked up the word in the dictionary ALES CZOBBARAANELE 12 Translation by Comparing Original and Translated Text Translation Editor E When translating a Japanese text into English You can define the adjunct controlled words The following example shows the selected words in a pair of brackets Ex x If not specified O If specified a Original text Translated text Dy fNWILBBIFSTF AERMH EK Store the data registered in the file gg Ira bic
113. SVE Cf Al lt p following sentence Place at sentence end Original text 0 368A tH HRHT Al lt p lt lt Delete gt gt Key SORA Sar an NFE aS A jai yp SCALES BEKAIN nest C OBIT BEI peice tel BaT petat E pele DIST OTN RA Ei DL CRAL BEFAL KD path CEDEO all BU Chg tests ker att Selecting a Text String as a Translation Unit Insert Control Brackets By specifying text strings as translation units or clauses before starting translation you can increase translation accuracy When translating from English to Japanese you can specify the text string as a clause or coordinate phrase When translating from Japanese to English you can clarify the modifying expressions which modifier corresponds to which modificand Select the character string and right click Inserting Brackets For details refer to Selecting a Text String as a Translation Unit Insert Control Brackets in Introduction on page 12 Selecting a Non Translation Text String Insert Non Translation Brackets You can select a text string you want to leave untranslated in the translated text Select the string of original text you wish to leave in the translated text and right click Insert Non Translation Brackets For details refer to Selecting a Non Translation Text String Insert Non Translation Brackets in Introduction on page 14 Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor 2 8 Disabling Translation and Editing Tr
114. Software 0000 0 eee 271 C 1 Users of ATLAS V14 and V8 cc ees 271 D UANSAINNGATLAS redai ateheeed dvethot ete Saewe Seabeneiweene 273 D 1 Uninstalling Application Translation 0 0 0 eee ees 273 D2 Unmstalng ATLAS seceded iriad Medd Oi ee eel ek eee od eS 274 E Managing Dictionaries on Translation Server 0 00005 275 E 1 About Translation Server 0 0 cc ee eens 275 E 2 Configuring Settings for Connecting to the Server 276 E 3 Uploading Dictionaries 0 0 eens 277 E 4 Downloading Dictionaries from the Server 000 eee eens 281 E 5 Deleting a User Dictionary from the Translation Server 282 E 6 Scheduling Dictionary Synchronization and Confirming Results 285 MAOS 0 Netee oed n e a AEA ete ae Cnt hi ee eee 289 vill Introduction Welcome to ATLAS After installation try using ATLAS This part describes operations introducing the basic functions of ATLAS Funcions Ol ATCAS ccecotectera soci vb ct see a co aeetaectces Reacswereaues 2 Stanno ATLAS meee ee 4 Translation by Comparing Original and Translated Text Translation Editor 5 Translating Word Files Word Translation ccccsececeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeees 15 Translating in Acrobat Application Translation ccccccceseeeeeseeeeseeeeeees 17 Translating Contents of the Clipboard Clipboard Translation 00 20 Translating Web Page
115. Solutions nananana aana anaa 169 Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory 0000 eee eee 174 10 1 Searching Stored Translation Memory Data 0085 175 10 2 Starting Translation Memory 0 000 eee 183 10 3 Working with the Translation Memory Window 005 185 10 4 Storing Translation Memory Items 2 00002 e eee eee 191 10 5 Deleting Translation Memory Items 00000 c eee eee 198 10 6 Using the Text Alignment Support Tool 0 0 cee eee 199 Advanced Techniques Hints for Achieving Better Transla tion Results Chapter 1 Setting the Translation Style Translation Style 204 1 1 Translation Style EJ Translation 0 0 0 00 ce ee 205 1 2 Translation Style JE Translation 0 0 0 0 ccc ee 213 Chapter 2 Adding Words cs vaa adus ne sd CAs eeund Cadwees os oad ws 219 2 1 Available Combinations of Parts of Speech 2 eee 219 2 2 Entering Text into an Add All Text File 0 0 20 cee eee 220 2 3 Adding All Words Adding All 0 0 ccc ee eee 228 2 4 Adding Multiple Words at Once from Excel 0 0000 c eee aes 229 Chapter 3 Managing Data of User Dictionaries 4 231 3 1 Extracting Data from User Dictionaries Extract Dictionary Data 231 3 2 Merging Data of User Dictionaries Merge Dictionary Data 232 3 3 Rebuilding User Dictionaries Reindex D
116. Store Translation Memory from the menu Translated text AN SEB Alt BEC mre qE 3 LS 2 NA Original text Uds invention desc ribes a multi mo wite hing dev ric amp COM Figlia a de e opt ical Add Word Find Delete Word oqe generates p J te PEER Store Translation Memory O O g of diffe Zs Y After the data is stored the resulting information appears on the display Check this information and click the OK button if the data is OK Store Translation Memory Data Successfully Stored 3 Sentence Failed to Add Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory Hints gt Storing translation memory items in the translation memory is functionally the same process as storing translation examples stored using Add Example based Translation Data in the older version of ATLAS Example based translation data stored using the old version can be used as translation memory item as Is For details refer to Storing proper nouns and date amp time as variables Store Translation Memory with Variables on page 197 WE Using a File to Store Translation Memory Data You can store compiled translation memory data using a file you prepare You can also select in which user dictionary the data is stored when two or more user dictionaries are available 1 Create a file that contains the translation memory data you want to store The file must be either a vertical translation format file TRA or plain tex
117. Synchronization fails either translation can not be performed or different translation results are returned Use Log Viewer to check whether Dictionary Synchronization was successful Check the log and use log output to solve any problems that occur 1 Click the Server button in the Main Window and select Dictionary Management V ATLAS Main Window Se Editor Clipboard Mail Manipulate dictionary on server or client Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help RB Dictionary Management Z Configure Server Connection 2 Click the Log Viewer button in ATLAS Dictionary Management dialog box 2 ATLAS Dictionary Management Server List of Server Modified _ Acguie List Standard Dictionary Standard Dictionary 05 10 20 a Config Connection 01 tae RoLIE Technical Dictionary 04 25 20 ORR BF Technical Dictionary 04 29 201 Set Schedule O3AaFE RAH Technical Dictionary 04 25 20 D4 pian Technical Dictionary 04 25 201 Delete Eal nei Hei Tachnie sl Niction arn nazarni gt Log Viewer All Dictionaries 30 Basic Dictionary 1 Technical Dictionaries 25 User Dictionanes 4 J Acquire List of Server Dictionaries Automatically Next Time Download iN Working Area Client 3 Use the displayed output to solve problems and performe synchronization again E og ATLAS Dictionary Management Date TIME Z FUNC cuent PL DICT 288 08 06 2
118. THAN Specifies how to translate MORE THAN Original text more than two 11 For Letter Mail Specifies whether to use letter mail grammar Original text We will call you tomorrow Setting Translated text On ATe Blk AA HEEICBRATAIAEVY CI BA BRELES 12 For Patent Specifies whether to translate by giving priority to interpretation for patent specific sentences Original text means to spin said device for 60 s Setting Translated text 60 PAREO REEERE tA LCSRRLET 60 PBN ECO eis amp len S tt O FE 13 For titles Specifies whether to use translation style suitable for titles Setting Translated text RAD HFISDHECREL KE DR E CHB ANERN DHA 207 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques E WILL 1 WILL Specifies how will should be translated Original text Iwill write a letter to you as soon as arrive in London Setting Translated text OVE VICSIBS SES CEI PMILHEEADEMEBZ lt KDLYU TT DYE VIBES SET CIS MAHEKADFEMEB lt STLES OYE VICES SEF CIS MEDRE FEEC OLY TT YR VICRIBT SES CIS WLHGKAOFMES lt FETT OYE VICES SET CIS MAHEEAOFEMEBEET 2 WOULD Specifies how would should be translated Original text would write a letter to you as soon as arrive in London Setting Translated text AYR ICRI SES CI MISHGKADFEMEBKTLES AYE VICBIBT SET CIS MAHEKADFEMEB lt TLES YR VICBIBT SET CIS MAHEKAOFEMEBK VLU TT DYE VIC
119. Techniques 3 Select the registration direction on the Entry Words Support dialog box The registration direction determined once cannot be changed during processing To change the registration direction add new sheet by clicking the Add Sheet button or initialize the present data by clicking the Initialize Sheet button 4 Select the parts of speech in the Parts of speech list box and click the Input Word button 1 Click 2 Click When listbox Part of Speech is selected and Input Word button is pushed the model data is input to the corresponding sheet Verb Verb Adjective Verb Adjective Adjective Noun Adjective Verb Adjective Adverb Adverb Format 453 437 Japanese noun English noun English plural form number Meaning number Counter gt Example l The form of the selected part of speech is inserted in a sheet The cells for inputting data are displayed in light blue 5 Refer to the Property Guide of the Entry Words Support dialog box and edit the form that is inserted in the sheet When moving cursor to the light blue cell in a sheet displaying the Entry Words Support dialog box explanation of values such as form and Meaning Number is displayed in the Property Guide of the Entry Words Support dialog box 6 After entering all words click Add All Words button on the Entry Words Support dialog box or click Add Word button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar
120. VEHUMESCAWIET DORREAN B ETA Sls atl TARRO ARL Bog HSD IDEENE DTE TEDRDIT EFES O TIES RE 7o Translating Mail Mail Translation 3 Click the Start Translation button on the Mail Translation toolbar r Translate ji ata LUA Editor D Translation starts CRITM S2 Settings amp Help EJ Exit w Translation Results Dear Ms Stewart Thank you for your mail We would like to accept your proposal but we would like to have more information Font Size 10 Hints gt When you are still working on a mail message the translated text replaces the original text gt The data is also copied to the clipboard You can then use lt lt Ctrl gt gt lt lt V gt gt to paste the data to other applications such as Notepad gt If ATLAS does not support your mail client use Clipboard Translation or Mouse Translation to translate mail messages You can set Mail Translation to start automatically when you boot up Windows For details refer to 6 4 Automatically Starting Mail Translation in Basics on page Tips 111 Q Automatically Starting Mail Translation 25 uo1 0npo1 u Adding Words Dictionary Tool During translation ATLAS analyzes translations and grammatical information in the dictionaries to create translated text Through the effective use of the dictionaries it is possible to improve the accuracy of translation This section describes how to add words not
121. Verb At the End of Sentence He went to Tokyo Position Select where to place an English adverb Unit Unit JE Position After Number ex 1 dollar Before Number ex 1 Noun Plural Form Regular noun Singular and Plural Uncountable Plural C Irregular Noun Position Select whether to show an English unit before or after a number Noun Plural Form If After Number is selected for Position select the type of an English plural form For irregular nouns enter the plural form in the Irregular Noun entry box 145 SV1LV Buisp 4L s seg Basics E Reference for Adding Words This section explains how to specify the parts of speech when adding new words to ATLAS 146 User Dictionaries Reference for judging part of speech J Adjective noun E Adjective adverb Modifies a noun with 73 added to the end J Adjective E Adjective adverb Ends with tj and modifies a noun J Verb E Verb or adjective noun Makes a polite verbal expression with TLF or F added to the end English preposition or prepositional phrase J Particle equivalent E Preposition equivalent Fah calm calmly 2 AR healthy healthily Rl FAIA stimulative LL pleasant LL beautiful beautifully BALZ bright brightly triga LY unload it attend attention ST 7 analyze analysis th independent independence ka lt shorten AS fat WS cut kC swim 2
122. Vista Tian Weare bana Vista Home Premium Windows inte ns iste o Vista Home Basic Riri A a e e E Windows XP Professional mo INQOWS Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 2000 Microsoft Office Word 2007 Ci 2007 Microsoft Office Word 2003 Word 2008 2003 Word2003 iy P or Microsoft Word Version 2002 Word 2002 Microsoft Word 2000 Word 2000 2000 Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Aca 2007 Microsoft Office Excel 2003 Excel 2003 xce Microsoft Excel Version 2002 Excel 2002 Microsoft Excel 2000 Excel 2000 Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2007 PowerPoint 2007 Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2003 PowerPoint 2003 2003 5 E ee Microsoft PowerPoint Version 2002 PowerPoint 2002 Microsoft PowerPoint 2000 PowerPoint 2000 Microsoft Windows Mail6 Windows Mail 6 Windows Mail Mail ee eo Office Outlook 2007 Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 Office Outlook 2003 S Me mee esas Microsoft Microsoft Outlook Version 2002 Version 2002 Microsoft fiat one 2000 eae Acrobat 8 A e Acrobat 7 Adobe Acrobat 6 Adobe Acrobat 5 Acrobat Official names Adobe Reader 8 Adobe Reader 7 Adobe Reader 6 Adobe Acrobat Reader 5 Lotus Notes R7 0 7 0 2 R6 5 6 5 5 R6 0 1 6 0 5 R5 0 Eudora 7J rev2 0 Eudora 7J rev1 0 7J 6 2J 6J 5 1J Mini Becky Internet Mail Ver 2 Ver 1 Windows Inte
123. When you are first learning how to use Key Type Translation the Quick ATLAS Startup Guide is a valuable aid that can help you quickly get up to speed on the Quick ATLAS system For details refer to W Startup Guide in Introduction on page 36 You can select the translation environment used with Key Type Translation For details refer to 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment Tips on page 47 Q Select the translation environment M Setting the start key for Key Type Translation Depending on the application the lt lt Ctrl gt gt lt lt Shift gt gt lt lt T gt gt key combination may already be assigned to another function In that case instead of the lt lt T gt gt key you can press any key to set to start Key Type Translation 1 Right click the Quick ATLAS icon on the task tray and select Options 2 Click the input field of Shortcut Key Settings for Starting Key Type Translation and press lt lt Ctrl gt gt lt lt Shift gt gt key of your choice The shortcut key entered in Shortcut Key Settings for Starting Key Type Translation is displayed For example if you press lt lt F12 gt gt as the key of your choice the setting is displayed as shown below Quick ATLAS Options Start Quick ATLAS when starting Windows Use pop up dialog when using Mouse Translation or Key Type Translation Shortcut Key Settings for Starting Key Type Translation Press Ortl Shif
124. Word Englis Verb Verb WeeASS take full advanta 6 1 Word Englis Adverb Adverb DNE lightly 7 1 Word Englis Adjective Verb OAsF flatter 5 amp lt gt Exclude c 2 Click Dictionary Name User dictionary0001 x New Enty Hints gt To check the detailed dictionary data right click the word or translation memory item and select Properties from the menu 5 Select a User Dictionary to save the merge results using the arrow button W and click the Add Words button 1 Word Englis Adverb Adverb HMI lightly 7 1 Word Englis Adjective Verb OMA flatter a v lt 1 Select User Exclude __Fxchde Y Don t Exclude dictionary Dictionary Name User dictionary0001 o _ NewEnty PERAR E a eo Merge results cannot be registered when e The translation Memory the user wants to register already exists in the dictionary e The deactivated word s information notation part of speech the user wants to register already exists in the dictionary 233 syns y uoejsuei 199g BulAsiUudY JO SyuIH s nbiuyoa peoueApY Advanced Techniques 3 3 Rebuilding User Dictionaries Reindex Dictionary E When too many words are added to a user dictionary common dictionary and dictionary access speed slows down it is possible to rebuild the dictionary to improve translation speed and processing time required to add words eo Only an Administrator can rebuild Common dictionary
125. Word f Find Delete Word g ATLAS Help WE Translating the entire text of all objects All Sentence Translation You can translate the entire text of presentation objects and replace the text contents with the translated results 1 Click the Translate All button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar Direction AUTO E Wad Translate Jranslate Translation Editor Translate Edit Environment General Detail Settings Environment Settings ATLAS AER Add Find Delete ATLAS Word Word Help Dictionary Help 99 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics E Translating selected sentences Selected Sentence Translation You can translate a selected text area of presentation objects you have created in PowerPoint and replace the text contents with the translated result 1 Select the text area you wish to translate TES HoT Direction aumo Environment General Detail Settings Add Find Delete Word Stitt o EE See ei to published 100 4 Basic Operation of Clipboard Translation This chapter describes how to translate clipboard data use of Clipboard translation dialog box and how to export translation results to the clipboard 4 1 Clipboard Translation dialog box i gt Clipboard Translation is operated by clicking the Clipboard button in the Main Window When Clipboard Translation is used the translation results
126. a eS y 4 to a User Dictionary Unknown word e Problem A sentence with unknown words may not be translated correctly Ex We will attempt to reaccommodate passengers fh T 5 I reaccommodate LERE WAS IEY CTF e Solution Add non added words to a User Dictionary before translation Ex Add reaccommodate as B t4 to a User Dictionary Ftb Ik HEE BERS 4 OE HASIAY CF 243 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques E Problem of structure analysis Modification e Problem When several objects for modification are possible a sentence may not be translated correctly Ex Clean the room with heater cE 3 CES aR T ESL e Solution Specify the object of modification using Ex Clean the room with heater E 4 2HS WES RRL TK FEES LY Omitted predicative e Problem Correct translation is impossible when a predicative is omitted Ex Remove tire assembly from rotor mounting face conduit retainer from control assembly HRED OO F RY HRE SBSOHMEREDSFIVIE LUI amp RY HL TSK TES LY e Solution Add a predicative Ex Remove tire assembly from rotor mounting face remove conduit retainer from control assembly OD A RY TItRMDbSAAVP RUA ERY AL TK ESL SLT AH BAS SPORERES MY HLT ESL Parallel phrases e Problem Complicated parallel phrases may not be translated correctly Ex The fibers which stand out of a carpet or piece of cloth
127. a file type and a file name and click Save Save in O Sample v B Coop 5 yIchitaro E Ejbilng tre E sample trc 1 Select the file type 2 Enter file name e SS lt 3 Click ration file tre v Cancel Help File name Jesamp tre Save as type Horizontal tr Translation file eng txt 58 Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor E Reflecting and saving translation results in source documents Operations such as translation and post editing can be applied to Word Excel PowerPoint and PDF documents as loaded in Translation Editor and the results can be returned to the original layout 1 Select Open from the File menu specify the document file to be translated then click Open button The text of the specified document will be loaded to the Original text cell 2 Translate the area you wish to translate For detailed explanation of Translation refer to 2 2 Translation on page 56 File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Diese x lalejx ej lee eer see Original text Nature conservation SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg RAIRE SYE Pay MEHAR aE ZIRE OOD Delimiter It is displayed at the corresponding location 3 Select Reflect translated sentence in xxx from the File menu The name of the application used to create the reflected document is displayed in xxx 4 Specify File Name and click Save A confir
128. alic part ATLAS install folder 9 8 Problems amp Solutions Ee C Read this section when you have trouble using the common dictionary function or want to use it in a different way E Common dictionary download related issues You do not want to display a download common dictionary confirmation message each time you start up ATLAS e Solution Display the Common Dictionary dialog box and specify an item other than Show Confirm Dialog when ATLAS starts in the Download Method box 169 SVI1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics You do not want to display the download result dialog box e Solution Display the Common Dictionary dialog box and specify Do not show results of processing in the Show results of processing box Downloading of common dictionary fails e Cause There are the following discrepancies between the common dictionaries in the Common Folder and common dictionaries user dictionaries in user s PC There is a dictionary that has the same dictionary name but has different file name part 1 There is a dictionary that has the same file name but has different dictionary name part 2 There is a dictionary that has different administrator part 3 This may happen when you change the Common Folder or use Windows Explorer to copy a common dictionary to the Common Folder With ATLAS users cannot have dictionaries with the same dictionary name file name in their PC or Common Folder e Solution Use the follo
129. an English TOKYO gt Tokyo word into uppercase letter but converts the remaining characters into lowercase letters Double to single byte Changes double byte English Japanese KATOU lt AkKD gt conversion Kana and symbol characters of atextinto KATOU lt wth gt single byte characters N ah oh Single to double byte Changes single byte English Japanese KATOU lt thi gt gt conversion Kana and symbol characters of a text into KATOU lt vAkKDU gt double byte characters Decode English extension into Japanese function has been included in ATLAS V12 to avoid garbled characters when using the Windows 95 operating system However Windows 95 and Decode English extension into Japanese are not supported for ATLAS V13 and later versions The following explains how to convert a single byte 47 yb into double byte syf FY w K k Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor 1 Select 47 Jyh eile text Translated text Two or more hybrid optical devices can be changed into an optical interface by the method similar to the electronic gate used with the electron device in using a light impulse 2 Select Convert from the Edit menu and select 1 byte code gt 2 byte Insert Control Brackets Insert Non Translation Brackets Insert Translation Memory Variables code ar o File Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help a Undo Input Ctrl Z Cut Ctrl x z Copy Ctrl C lt Pa
130. anslation However a color coded display will not appear in the following situation e When using the back button or the forward button in the Translation Memory Another window e When Adds word correspondence information is unchecked in the option dialog box by selecting option from the tool menu For a color coded display select translation memory from the list and click the Word Correspondence selected sentence only button on the toolbar or click the Word Correspondence all search results button C Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 45 RATE 100 And fve e going to get this done And Viele going to get this done E E The matching word 176 Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory Word matching status Display color Match between original text and original text in translation memory Light blue Match between original text in translation memory and translated text in Dark blue translation memory Match between original text original text in translation memory and Pink translated text in translation memory When reflecting into the Editor the contents of translated text in a list Select translation memory items from the list and then click the Send to Editor button You can also right click Translation Memory and select Send to Editor from the displayed pop up menu ft View Tool Help E E g a v ileal S 2 Click UTO And we re goi
131. anslation user dictionary words saved to a user dictionary eG F ghna jy we Environment General od Translate Translate Translation Step Add Find Delete Al Selected Editor Translation F Detail Settings Word Word Translate lranstate Ed Environment Settings Dictionary t 1 ey Output Original and Translation Output Settings e c Translation Editor Translation Direction Text Output l Cancel Opens the entire Specifies the input and Destination Quits the document or output language Specifies the output current selected text in Select from AUTO EJ destination of the translation Translation Editor and JE translation Translation Environment Output Original and Translation d Step Translation Select the translation Translation is inserted after the Translates sentences environment settings best original text one at a time in the Step suited for your document Translation dialog box Detail Settings Create a new translation environment or change the settings ATLAS Toolbar for Word 2003 a All Sentence Translation h Align Right and Left b Selected Sentence i Align Top and Bottom Translation e pneu Translating m gt SE Output to Another Document Preview Dialog Box Environment Settings c Translation Editor d Step Translation f Add Word g Find Delete Word j Save as Pair k ATLAS Help Output Format of Tran Output Settings Translation Settings Output
132. anslation Lock After you have reviewed or corrected a cell of translated text you can protect it by disabling further translation and editing You can suppress the following operations Translation commands Translate Single Sentence Selected Sentence Translation and All Sentence Translation Assistance commands Sentence Division Spelling Check and Delete Mark Edit commands Cut Paste Delete Convert and Replace Control mark insertion commands Insert Control Brackets Insert Non Translation Brackets and Insert Translation Memory Variables The locked cell will be enclosed with blue lines E Disabling translation and editing 1 Select the sentence number of the cell you wish to lock Translated text his invention explains an optical switching device of the multimode that comprises some Hi areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor Click Sentence Number button 2 Select Translation Lock from the Edit menu File Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Undo Translation Ctrl Z Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Delete Del Translation Lock E Releasing the translation lock 1 Select the sentence number of the cell you wish to unlock Click Sentence Number button 63 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 2 Select Clear Translation Lock from the Edit menu and select Clear Sentence Number Selection File Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Undo Transl
133. anslation displayed in the lower section of the Translation Memory window Chapter 1 Basic ATLAS Functions 4 Post editing The translation using translation memory specified as 100 match does not require any changes Even for translation with less than 100 only a partial change completes the translation Original Translation i Translation memory match value Next RAVaAIJYILEF Click the OK button 81 match l Change the different part Click the Next button At this time using the Translation Memory allows you to do the following Edit translation memory items Delete translation memory items After that review the translation for which translation memory is not used text that is automatically translated to perform final checking on the entire translation E ATLAS Translation Example Translation of a revised manual Translation memory is very suitable for revised manual translation Since manuals frequently use similar expressions compared to other types of documents the hit ratio Match Value of the translation memory is high and the ratio at which translation memory is used throughout a document is very high For that reason when the old version of translated contents is stored in translation memory and is used for the revised manual sentences that are not changed do not need to be translated again Furthermore translation memory is used at a high ratio for not only the sentences that are partiall
134. apanese verb form gt A lt Objective particle gt A lt English form gt syns y uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY English verb pattern Contents of entry lt S AB gt lt X Ait gt lt KHRABIHS For the English verb pattern refer to Reference for English verb pattern in Basics on page 147 Japanese verb form Contents of entry lt A A E gt Entered only when the Japanese verb form is EX For Japanese verb form refer to Reference for Japanese verb form in Basics on page 148 Objective particle Contents of entry lt Byaal A Particle for object gt Required for an English transitive or intransitive transitive verb For the available types of particles refer to Objective particle in Basics on page 147 229 Advanced Techniques English form Contents of entry lt 21 EA Past Past particle Present particle Present after He gt Enter the English form If nothing is entered the form is automatically judged by ATLAS Sample gt i i GREAT S de orbit lt xM B gt d gt i i DILIEFAD A stake full advantage of lt 3c th gt lt l gt lt 4k took full advantage of taken full advantage of taking full advantage of takes full advantage of gt gt Bjal Hal ITET jettison lt eH gt lt A R gt lt hi gt a Adjective Verb Format EA B 3 A Japanese adjective A English vero
135. appears and the translation memory is searched for translations of the source text being selected Search results are displayed in a list in order from the highest SCORE value For details on the layout of the Translation Memory Another window refer to E Translation Memory Another window Layout on page 185 175 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 2 Select the suitable text for creating the translation from the list of the retrieved translation memory data E Translation Memory Edit View Tool Help apga aaya A AUTO And we re going to get this done And we re going to get this done CLUTCH BIL CNS TSC SOV CT C Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 36 RATE 69 And we re going to get this done And we re going to get this done ELC MBS CREST SUSOHVUTT BACK FOR W Click to display a simplified list when you want to display many translation examples in the window at the same time Click 2 to display a detailed list when you want to check in which dictionary the translation memory items are stored or the match value 3 Check the selected translation memory item and edit as needed Check the word correspondence status When you select the translation memory from the list showing correspondence information color coded words are displayed depending on whether the data conforms When you move the cursor over a word boxes appear framing the word and its corresponding tr
136. artners that he wanted to quit FP restaurant L ARDY confided TABA Ay dine GEESE partnert bk 7 want L Ya ut Md 1 Ifthe original sentence is long it may be divided into multiple sentences which are delimited by a semicolon in the translated text 2 When the original text in an Office or PDF document you loaded is separated by a line feed etc a delimiter is displayed at the corresponding location 3 If an original sentence cannot be translated due to a syntax problem each word of the sentence is translated separately Hints gt In Japanese to English translation if you select S for Omitted Subject as the translation style of Japanese English translation in case 1 or if you select O for Omitted Object in case 2 the translation results will appear as shown above For Translation style refer to Help gt About the delimiter The delimiter is about 1 3 the height of the other cells and an is inserted in front of the sentence number The delimiter cannot be deleted copied to the clipboard or cut gt For details on Translation Style refer to the online help KII 55 SV1LV Buisp 4L s seg Basics 2 2 Translation SESS ATLAS translates the sentences you have entered in the Original text cells into the target language E All Sentence Translation Translates all sentences in the Original text cells 1 Click the All Sentence Translation button Kd on the toolbar E
137. ary User dictionary0001 Delete Common Dictionary Help seen Current changeable dictionary 3 Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button Hints gt You can also change the priorities of the Technical Dictionaries in the same way as User Dictionaries Note that they cannot be moved to a level higher than that of the User Dictionaries The priority of the Standard Dictionary cannot be changed Changing the priority of Dictionaries Used in Translation can also be performed using drag and drop Alternately you can use the right click menu to move a dictionary In this case as well change of priority is possible only within the respective categories e g within User Dictionaries or Technical Dictionaries Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary Displaying Contents of Changeable Dictionary Display All Changeable Dictionary You can view all the words registered in the Changeable Dictionary 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and then select EJ Find Delete Word or J E Find Delete Word SS ATLAS Main Window er e Q S Q E Q Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool En
138. ary on page 133 191 Basics E Storing Translation Memory Items from Translation Editor Register the translations and results edited in Translation Editor in translation memory You can register multiple translation samples in translation memory at one time Translation memory items are stored in the user dictionary changeable dictionary used in the current translation environment 192 1 Click the Detail Settings button E on the toolbar and select the dictionary in which you want to store the translation memory data Translation memory data is stored in the Changeable Dictionary For details on how to set up the changeable dictionary refer to 8 2 Setting Dictionaries to be Used for Translation Dictionaries Used in Translation on page 126 Select the sentence numbers of the cells of sentences to be stored When more than one sentence number is selected the translation examples can be stored in the translation memory in batch To select all the sentence numbers at once click the No button E o Cn Click Original text I Translated text AY l CBE tee mi gt Ka rises ch mode generates positrons and a a hotocurrent in sev feral regions in response to bntrol signals of different wavelengths of light a j e photocurrent in each mode opore ouate the transmission of the high frec DIEA et ey Right click a Translated text or Original text cell and select
139. as the English plural form number irregular noun Sample Biy Hi KF JL dolar 0 lt WwE gt Particle Preposition Format B za AiE za A Japanese particle A English preposition Japanese particle Enter a Japanese word corresponding to the English preposition English preposition Enter a preposition or prepositional phrase Sample Biid Aligaal 2ZEDEtELKS inthe face of e Chapter 2 Adding Words E EJ Noun Noun Format 42 55 44 38 A Japanese Noun A English Noun A English plural form number A Meaning number A lt Counter gt English plural form number For English plural form number refer to Plural form number table in Basics on page 148 For an irregular noun add singular and plural forms respectively Meaning number For Meaning number refer to Noun meaning number in Basics on page 147 Bi 3 Eel Contents of entry lt Bi xa A Japanese counter gt Enter one of the following noun counters fl OD A Be BB OH a AL MM BB Je ti GL BB AL BL RL RT tE a FEL When L is entered no counter is added When nothing is specified a counter is automatically added by ATLAS according to the word meaning Sample gt 4 2 W payloadbay 0 40 gt Z Z 2X bloodhound 0 14 lt BR m gt Verb Verb Format 4a 7 A Japanese verb A English verb A lt English verb pattern gt A lt J
140. ation dialog box is different from the part you want to translate use Automatic Clipboard Translation For details refer to 7 4 Automatically Translating Text on the Clipboard Automatic Clipboard Translation on page 117 gt When you are first learning how to use Mouse Translation the Quick ATLAS Startup Guide is a valuable aid that can help you quickly get up to speed on the Quick ATLAS system For details refer to W Startup Guide in Introduction on page 36 You can select the translation environment used with Mouse Translation For details refer to 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment Tips on page 47 Q Select the translation environment 114 Chapter 7 Quick ATLAS Basics 7 3 Translating while entering text Key Type Translation You can translate text without lifting your hands from your keyboard 1 Click the Quick ATLAS button in the Main Window SS ATLAS Main Window ve A 9 8 S SG amp Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Glick on an icon to start processing The Quick ATLAS icon appears on the task tray and Quick ATLAS starts 2 Start a text editor such as Notepad 3 Move the cursor to the location where you want to enter the translation result and then press lt lt Ctrl gt gt lt lt Shift gt gt lt lt T gt gt key Report Notepad Sel File Edit Format wiew Help on of ATLAS The K
141. ation Environment in Basics on page 47 Specify a range and translate it with Translation Editor Select and right click a character string from Internet Explorer and select ATLAS Translation Editor from the right click menu displayed The selected character string and its translation are displayed on the Translation Editor Q Translate a selected text area 23 UOIJONPOUUy 24 Translating Mail Mail Translation If you use Outlook Outlook Express Windows Mail Eudora Lotus Notes Mail or Becky you can use the Mail Translation toolbar to translate a displayed mail item Outlook Express is used here as an example Ceo gt During Mail Translation the clipboard is used to get mail contents Also the translation results are copied to the clipboard 1 Click the Mail button in the Main Window ATLAS Main Window e o 0 S FGF y Editor Clipboard Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Glick on an icon to start processing Environment Help The Mail Translation icon appears on the task tray and Mail Translation starts 2 Launch Outlook Express and display the mail you want to translate f Translate Auto v Weditor rm Settings PHelp Ej Exit amp Yesterday SE hd File Edit View Tools Message Help t Ff sw amp xX 6 Ow Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next ddresses From suzuki Date 200446 A38 17 39 To xxxxx xx xx co m Subject Yesterday AF7 hA X I
142. ation Lock Ctrl Z Copy Ctrl C Clear Translation Lock Clear All Clear Sentence Number Selection Hints gt If you wish to unlock all cells at the same time select Clear Translation Lock and Clear All in this order 2 9 Checking Spelling Errors Spelling Check Cs A word not found in the dictionaries is detected when the Original text cell is checked for spelling The detected word is shown in a pair of brackets 1 Select the cell or cells you wish to check for spelling Original text Translated Text Pr his invention explains an optical switching device of the multimede that compr ome areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor Each mode generates the positron and focurrent in some area responding to the oncerning wavelength with 2 Select Spelling Check from the Assistance menu File Edit Translation Dictionary Option Help Sentence Division Spelling Check Export Undefined Word Hints gt New words can be extracted from a text and added to the dictionary using batch addition Do this by adding extracted files For details refer to 2 10 Exporting Undefined Words to an add all text file Export Undefined Word on page 65 gt To delete the spelling check marks such as select Delete Mark from the Assistance menu and select Spelling Check Mark or All gt To change the spell check mark type select Translation Environment from the Translation menu and click the
143. ation Translation This is not a problem Click the Enable Macros button to continue operation If the Enable Macros button is disabled you can select the Always trust macros from this source check box to enable the Enable Macros button For details refer to the online help If you have installed Office but have not yet run any Office applications set up of Application Translation may fail Before trying to set up Application Translation first confirm that Office applications Word Excel PowerPoint can start up normally 78 SVI1LV Buisp AL solseg Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation Hints gt In the initial settings the translation direction is determined automatically based on the text selected for translation If the translation direction is incorrect set it manually For Application Translation the settings can be found as follows e Word Translation Click the ATLAS tab in Environment Settings For versions of Word earlier than Word 2003 click the Translation Settings tab in the Environment Settings dialog box e Excel Translation Click the ATLAS tab in Environment Settings For versions of Excel earlier than Excel 2003 in the Environment Settings dialog box e PowerPoint Translation Click the ATLAS tab in Environment Settings For versions of PowerPoint earlier than PowerPoint 2003 in the Environment Settings dialog box e Acrobat Translation Open the Layout Tran
144. ation direction from EJ JE EJ Top and Bottom and JE Top and Bottom Auto Translation Translation Choose whether or not to execute Translation of the automatic translation each time a link web page is executed is traced on a web page a Translation H Auto Translation Original Text ATLAS J L Original Text A menu including ATLAS Toolbar Settings Overseas useful links Displays the original text Japanese page and Help appears when you click this mark before translation When you select ATLAS Toolbar Settings you can implement the setup of the ATLAS Tool Bar display method and that of the translation environment Chapter 5 Basic Operation of Web Translation Hints gt This function requires the installation of Web Translation Internet Explorer If Web Translation is not installed by selecting Custom at the time of ATLAS installation perform the installation to add this function For installation refer to Setup Guide gt To upgrade Internet Explorer first follow the steps below to uninstall ATLAS lt Web Translation Internet Explorer gt Then after upgrading Internet Explorer reinstall ATLAS lt Web Translation Internet Explorer 1 Click the Start button and select Control Panel from the Settings menu or select Control Panel directly from the Start menu 2 Double click the Add or Remove Programs Add Remove Programs icon For Windows Vista Click the link for Uninstal
145. ation memory data click the Store Translation Memory button To select a translated word from the Automatic Translation View area 1 Click the word you want to change in the Automatic Translation area Click ag The list of the translations of the selected And we re going to get th ZUT Wisane ETE TT word is displayed 2 Click the word you want to adopt RE And we re going to set this done z ZUT WcB ACNE He DBYTS ae Click Wy ew BACK FORW The selected translation is refected on the corresponding word 3 Click the Send Translation to Translation Editor button The text of the Automatic Translation View area is added to the Translated text cell in the Translation Editor Correct the translated text as needed 4 Ifyou want to perform the same operation on nearby cells in the Translation Editor click the previous next button A W Repeat the procedure after Step 2 178 Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory Hints gt Selecting Translation Memory Align Windows from the Assistance menu in the Translation Editor window allows you to tile the Translation Editor window and Translation Memory Another window gt Store phrases frequently used in documents such as manuals and technical references in the translation memory as translation examples When the phrase which resembles to the stored translation memory item is translated with
146. ation memory is displayed in brackets Also the match value is indicated in as well Because this is a fuzzy match the translated text partially differs from the translation of the original text The translator needs to check which part is different and correct the translated text accordingly 3 No translation memory items that can be used Automatic Translation Characters in the translated text cell are displayed in black and the result of automatic ATLAS translation is displayed The translator needs to check the translated text and correct as needed If you store the results of corrections performed in items 2 and 8 in the translation memory they can be used when translating similar sentences the next time When processing manuals and technical documents in which similar or identical expressions and sentences are used frequently translation efficiency increases if you store and accumulate corrected items in the translation memory on an ongoing basis For details refer to Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory in Basics on page 174 33 Introduction 34 8 If you do not want to use the translation memory setting the next time set the Environment Name drop down menu setting in the Translator Editor to General 5 ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 Sample Etmsmpl txt DER File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Caos teil fea lt lex a ge Original text
147. b 168 Chapter 9 Using the Common Dictionary lt 2I ___ You cannot delete the common dictionary which is set in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box If the common dictionary you want to delete is set in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box click the lt lt Don t Use button to move the common dictionary to the List of Available Dictionaries box 3 Confirm the message and click the Yes button The common dictionary on your PC is deleted and a message appears asking whether to delete the common dictionary in the Common Folder 4 Click the Yes button 5 Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button 9 7 Common Folder Management Tool eas You can use the Common Folder Management Tool for the following common dictionary related operations Clear the common dictionary administrator information Delete a common dictionary in the Common Folder Display detailed information about a common dictionary Use this tool to manage common dictionaries in the Common Folder The Common Folder Management Tool is installed in the install folder of ATLAS Example C Program Files ATLAS V14 cdictool exe It
148. b Translation Internet Explorer 1 Click the Web button in the Main Window SS ATLAS Main Window ef if e v SA E Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Glick on an icon to start processing Internet Explorer starts up 2 Display the Web page you want to translate BELLAS Qtranslation Auto Translation Original Text lt ATLAS Tool Bar We GY CO MARAE ROA StA a A dhe ere FUJITSU THE ressievciries ARE INFINITE Japan ody E thst bi gt PEI gt TLR RHA TABASE ROI HE ver gt WAR SLROURMRO Ia th 2 TINO T V MRECBNLAT ae 3 Click the ATLAS Translation button on the standard buttons toolbar For Internet Explorer 7 the ATLAS Translation button is hidden by default Click gt gt on the right side of the Command bar and select ATLAS Translation For Internet Explorer 6 if the window is not wide enough to display the ATLAS Translation button click gt gt on the right side of the Standard Buttons toolbar and select ATLAS Translation BILAS Qtranslation W Auto Translation Original Text l T OUR MME StA m amp dh i Page Gp Tools eC Click of Send to OneNote IM Receare h QD Teansiation starts Messenger BILAS Qtranslation GW Auto Translation Original Text OuRRK MME StA A Be D ies GT oan FUJITSU 18 ressvsscirees ane INFINITE Japan e Home Si
149. button of the toolbar To print a specific cell select the sentence number of the cell and click the Print button 2 Select options and click the OK button The Font button allows you to select the type and size of font that is printed In the initial setting characters are printed in the same typeface and size as the characters displayed on the screen Print Print Format Print 4rea Print Horizontally fe All Cancel C Print Vertically G Font Properties C Print Original text C Select Page Print Translated text 1 5 ps o Hep SelectPrint PrnterA a Check this box to print out the file name The translated text is printed according to the settings 76 E Printout examples Horizontal translation Aa T VES RECRZOLP ENA 3 AIDI TFYOWEASO 3 0 vy mB O b RU LE pbphnhTUOZED AX LIE ETE AICADRE ADM PALCI Vertical translation JLA eo ZA E gt gt Kingdom of Sweden Ice eeZOrv EIT A Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor Kingdom of Sweden Advice of safety and public peace There seem to be a lot of people to whom the nature loosens as soon as entering a country because of being said that the public peace of Sweden is better than that of other European nations E gt gt Advice of safety and public peace JAD r FYOBBRISHOA Oy MAB EDSRWESDNTTWSEH AB Lie ETEAICADRCARDAWES TS E gt gt There seem to be a lot of people to whom the nature loo
150. button in the dialog that appears e Adobe Acrobat Reader 5 Select Document Security from the File menu 82 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation 3 2 Translating by Acrobat Adobe Reader AA The following explains how to translate PDF files by Acrobat Adobe Reader E ATLAS Toolbar and ATLAS Acrobat Translation Dialog Box This section explains about ATLAS Toolbar Acrobat Translation The toolbar buttons shown on Acrobat differ from those on Adobe Reader wo Acrobat Adobe Reader a Selection Translation a i Translates the selected text I amp a Translation Editor Ca lt U Translates using w D Translation Editor Page Translation Extracts all the text on Layout Translation the displayed page and D Translates PDF documents while translates it N maintaining the original layout When you translate a page or selected area the translated results are shown in the ATLAS Acrobat Translation dialog box Some functions differ in Acrobat and Adobe Reader Acrobat 7 Displays the original text You can edit directly iB SOIT ABA LELA gje I think the agreement encompasses TATHBSELTHVET everything we talked about last week Translated Text box Displays the translated text You can edit directly T Memory amp Replace Property x Original Text Translated Text Source EA HO E A e I think the agreement enco User Translation Memory
151. can back up a common dictionary 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and select Backup Dictionary from the Management Menu S ATLAS Main Window ara Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Backs up the user dictionary Ed EJ Add Word RR EJ Find Del ete Word El rt Fiet A nn Ah a aa Be ae A Aa Sie a a Se a a bY OF TF OTF OFT OT OF ORS OH OO OY OO Sw Bi Add All Translation memory yt Merge Dictionary Data Q Reindex Dictionary Pj Backup Dictionary OOF Daninoa Mintinnnins 2 Select the dictionary you want to backup from the Select dictionaries list and click the Specify folder button Backup the user dictionary Select dictionaries Most recent backup J dictionary file for backup Run Common0001 C Documents and Settings User dictionary0003 C Documents and Settings Delete Common0002 C Documents and Settings User dictionary0001 C Documents and Settings User dictionary00U2 C Documents and Settin Update Infomation S ele ct lt 2 Help Specify backup folder D backup Specify folder a 2 Click Free Space 2 G bytes Selected Num 1 Dic Size 420 K bytes Processing status There is no backed up dictionary in the backup folder 3 Click the Browse button to select the target folder for backing up dictionary and then click the OK button Specifies the folder
152. can be specified by appending _N noun _V verb _A adjective or _D adverb to a word using either upper or lower case Ex Stay in Tokyo RRERRIZLYT lt F amp L Stay_Nin Tokyo RRCORE Chapter 4 Hints on Pre Post editing for EJ Translation Action Adding to a User Dictionary When a participle form ing en of a verb is used as a part of a compound noun ATLAS may not distinguish it from a verb or an adjective In this case add such compound nouns to a User Dictionary before translation Ex After experimenting process perform the demonstration Apt RRL RIC FEVARKL YaVeERAL T ESL Add experimenting process as 5 178 before starting translation FER TIEOBIO FEV ARL YaVeERAL TESS Ex ATLAS has specialized grammar for technical manuals ATLAS IHi 3 PILOT MII MIKE SPICE ELE Add specialized grammar as 2 FA3C3 amp before translation ATLAS ZIk Ra FY ILOTEOOBANMADROVY ET 4 2 Major Problems and Their Solutions for EJ Translation E This section explains major problems for translation and their solutions E Problems of element analysis Word division e Problem When a phrase composed of several words is analyzed with a dictionary ATLAS gives priority to the longest match Ex When mass storage is added as AB r mass storage capacity is translated as A22 RLRE e Solution Replace it with KRt A during post editing or add mass storage capacity as Acts o
153. ce Translatial 7 1 4 ap 2 3 4 5 Extracted original text is displayed after Words extracted as undefined words appear within 1 Part of speech gt sal Z Gal 2 Undefined words extracted undefined words 3 2 Location storing translation 4 English inflection O regular 5 Noun Meaning number 1 concrete object 65 SV1LV Buisp 4L s seg 66 Basics 3 Usea text editor to open the output file and enter the correct translation into the area sample Notepad J EIE gt Dictionary Management 30 4420 Dictionary Management ESH o 1 gt Elmproved Office Translation al 50 Improved Office Translation 7 7 0 1 3 4 Save the file The add all text file is now completed For details on how to use this file to add all words refer to 2 3 Adding All Words Adding All in Advanced Techniques on page 228 Hints gt For details on add all text files refer to 2 2 Entering Text into an Add All Text File in Advanced Techniques on page 220 Changing Characters Convert A text string in a cell can be converted as follows Upper to lowercase Converts uppercase letters of the specified TOKYO tokyo conversion text into lowercase letters Lower to uppercase Converts lowercase letters of the specified tokyo TOKYO conversion text into uppercase letters Capitalization Converts the first character of
154. cifies whether compound katakana words in the translated text should be separated or not Original text online questionnaires WE Style2 7 Divide Sentence Automatically Specifies whether or not the translated sentence should automatically be separated into shorter parts with punctuation marks such as And for long original sentences Original text Last week some 200 students gathered near Rangoon University shouting pro democracy slogans and waving the red flag of the National League for Democracy the party of Aung San Suu Kyi winner of the 1991 Nobel Peace Prize Setting Translated text REMAAD AYVeEWAC HRREESHORME VV Vi ty R F E 1991 FOS VN LEMSORAD N F 4 H TC MH 200 AN E YFKE lt Cee UV Ae E 4 2000 ADBEMS YY KZA CHEVYVELE REMAA AYVeEWATC HRREBHRORMAHROT 7 Y HY R F KRRON F AI 1991 FO AIE FE OD Has 8 Subject YOU Specifies whether or nota you subject should be translated Original text You can operate it this way Setting Translated text CMDKFICENEBECEERT HILO DK DSICENEBECEES 206 Chapter 1 Setting the Translation Style Translation Style 9 Compound Proper Noun Containing Undefined Word Specifies whether or not a proper noun that contains words not in the user dictionary should be translated Original text I went to North Walsham Hospital Setting Translated text hl North Walsham Hospital IZT EL tz FAZIE Walsham ARIETE ELT 10 MORE
155. click your desired translation environment name in the displayed list The Detail Settings dialog box appears 2 Select the common dictionary and then click the Delete button on the Dictionary Settings tab Ceo You cannot delete the common dictionary which is set in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box If the common dictionary you want to delete is set in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box click the lt lt Don t Use button to move the common dictionary to the List of Available Dictionaries box 3 Confirm the message and click the Yes button The common dictionary on your PC is deleted 4 Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button E Deletion of common dictionaries by administrator Delete common dictionaries from common dictionary administrator s PC as well as common dictionaries in the common folder 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window to select Translation Environment Settings and click your desired translation environment name in the displayed list The Detail Settings dialog box appears 2 Select the common dictionary and then click the Delete button on the Dictionary Settings ta
156. cold gt 7 Editing the Main Window This chapter describes how to edit the Main Window items and configuration as well as kana kanji conversion control 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and select Operating Environment Settings ATLAS Main Window I TF e S F amp F e Bw B B Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Configure the operating environment of the main window Translation Environment Settings P Operating Environment Settings amp Setup Application Translation Reading Option 2 Click the toolbar items you wish to select to enter a check mark You can set up the display style of the Main Window and the button configuration Enter a check mark to automatically turn Japanese input On or Off when the cursor enters the character Toolbar IME entry screen tine Environment Settines Always Show Front IME Control Active W Show the Button Name Reading function Set to use the reading Enable Reading function _ function when using the Sth Translation Editor or during Layout Folder Settings Web Translation Specifies the work folder for a Cance Helo ee user dictionary or documents used in ATLAS W Large Icon W Show the Status Bar 3 Click the Layout button The Customize Toolbar dialog box is displayed 263 syns y uoHe sues 19499 Dulnaiyoy 104 SyuUIH s nb
157. comprises some areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor Original text _ 0 360A sR Ex TEDEN Fe Pee Each mode generates the positron and Ser YF ie lee let eee gt st Pil COMAE seh iM ni Ca Cursor 2 Enter the text string you wish to search for in the Find box of the toolbar S Ga aS alex Auto e Ere POH Ra o 3 Click Find Next or Find Upward Ca tal al x elel a ge Genet gal fram 69 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 4 Repeat Step 3 for continuous search ATLAS Translation Editor D ATLAS sample trc Sele File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help ole A E Bs x AUTO ge General El eal IF CHE Original text Translated an CMRI Sa CHER SL 1 lt DG This invention explains an optical switching 1 the atat ovh FEN DAFA BSL OLT device of the multimode that comprises some SHBALET areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor SEH dl lt M pak OLOR af CR Each mode generates the positron and 9 amS BIOU CRTC Re ES photocurrent in some areas corresponding to o the control signal concerning wavelength with different light SE ge ae CAMERE Photocurrent by each mode originally adjusts 3 Mme ep the transmission of the high frequency control signal Te CPASHASTT hela RD AE CRE Two or more hybrid optical devices can be 4 i ar SrtA TA Celi koT BAD Ichanged into an optical interface by the eS Se RIA CNG method similar to the electron
158. convert a common dictionary to a user dictionary when you select common dictionary in Step 2 and click the Convert User Dict button in Step 3 9 4 Uploading Downloading Common Dictionaries E Common dictionaries are updated as needed accompanying additions or changes to registered words and or translation memory data To permit use of updated dictionaries for translation common dictionaries are automatically downloaded upon ATLAS start up and are automatically uploaded when exiting ATLAS 163 Basics When auser of common dictionaries starts ATLAS common dictionaries are automatically downloaded from the common folder to the user s environment When the administrator of common dictionaries exits ATLAS common dictionaries are automatically uploaded from the administrator s environment to the common folder This section explains how to upload download dictionaries to the Common Folder manually lt 2 Common dictionaries cannot be uploaded downloaded if the Common Folder has not been set Before Uploading Downloading common dictionaries check that Common Folder has been set 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window to select Translation Environment Settings and click your desired translation environment name in the displayed list The Detail Settings dialog box appears 2 Click the Common Dictionary button The Common Dictionary dialog box appears 3 The procedure differs depen
159. ctionary Option Help AP AUTO ge General z Ql amp Original text Translated text 0 3685 tS ek fe oL TDMA ie See ORL TE re eS ae gt Translated text This invention describes a multi mode optical switching device comprising several regions interfacing with inorganic semiconductors EFL KODNI ODE IBC Pores SS Sl Chast te ie se Each mode generates positrons and a photocurrent in several regions in response to control signals of different wavelengths of light WE Translating one cell only Translate Single Sentence 1 Double click the Sentence Number button of the Original text cell you wish to translate No Original text Translated text wra A This invention describes a multi mode optical 1 switching device comprising several regions E interfacing with inorganic semiconductors OF mode generates positrons and a Doubl lick eric control signals of different wavelengths of light The photocurrent in each mode independently 3 modulate the transmission of the high frequency control signals yy Translation starts Translated text This invention describes a multi mode optical switching device comprising several regions interfacing with inorganic semiconductors Original text oad Stet ia TSB tab eT E 3o Jia ie EN uea eak e lranslated text ETE EBI The photocurrent in each mode independently 3 modulate the trans
160. ctionary in Use the dictionary used in top priority is called the changeable dictionary The changeable dictionary is indicated at the top of the List of Available Dictionaries in the Detail Settings dialog box Use the V A buttons to change priority and set a new changeable dictionary For details refer to 8 4 Setting Changeable Dictionary on page 133 Detail Settings General Dictionary Settings English to Japanese Japanese to English Translation Memory List of Available Dictionaries Dictionaries Used in Translation a Common0001 lo ejUser dictionary0001 lt L Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0002 g Standard Dictionary 60 Business Packet lt lt Don t Use al 61 Manual Packet 62 Mail Packet et 63 Entertainment Packet New ree 64 Chat Packet 65 Patent Packet Property 66 Basic Sample E 67 Patent Procedure Packet Import Changeable Dictionary D isplays the d ictionary Delete User dictionary0001 set as the changeable Delete ete er Caneel The following can be performed with the changeable dictionary Store words and translation memory Search delete stored words or translation memory Temporarily stop using stored words Output a list of stored words or translation memory to a file Use a text file in the batch addition format to store words using a batch operation Use a horizontal translation file to store translation
161. ctionary other than the Standard Dictionary Dictionary of Origin Marks i l You can mark translated words from dictionaries other than the standard dictionary Use a mark not used in the text as the mark is inserted as a character 1 Select Dictionary of Origin Marks from the Assistance menu 5 ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 Sample Ejsamp txt File Edit Translation ESSER Dictionary Option Help plie Bl 5 Sentence Division o y cy Spelling Check Export Undefined Word Delete Mark Translated Sentence Format settings Translated Sentence Format Settings for dictionary of origin marks 2 Select a dictionary and a mark type and click the OK button It is possible to set a different mark for each dictionary Dictionary of Origin Marks Seth 1 Select a mark M Mark with Dictionaries 1 OO User dictionary0001 Og 60 Business Packet V Mark with Dictionaries 2 V Mark with Dictionaries 3 2 Select a dictionary ae Og 60 Business Packet 60 Business Packet Dictionary of origin marks are displayed as character after translation 68 Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor 3 Perform translation see page 56 The translated words taken from the dictionaries other than the Standard Dictionary are marked 5 ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 Sample Ejsamp txt Fil
162. ctionary pointed out by the error message and then download the common dictionary Cause Part 2 Cause Part 3 Procedure differs depending on the type of dictionary pointed out by the error message e When the dictionary is a common dictionary Green icon Convert the common dictionary to user dictionary convert it back to the common dictionary and then download it 170 Chapter 9 Using the Common Dictionary e When the dictionary is a user dictionary Use the ATLAS Merge Dictionary Data dialog box to recreate a new user dictionary For procedure see 1 After that delete the user dictionary pointed out by the error message 1 Procedure to recreate a new user dictionary 1 Display the ATLAS Merge Dictionary Data dialog box by selecting Tool Management Menu Merge Dictionary Data in this order from the ATLAS Main Window 2 Click the Extract button of the ATLAS Merge Dictionary Data dialog box to extract the dictionary data 3 Click the New Entry button to create a user dictionary 4 Click the Add Words button to store the extracted data in the user dictionary you created E Common dictionary upload related issues You do not want to display the common dictionary upload confirmation message when quitting ATLAS e Solution Display the Common Dictionary dialog box and specify an item other than Show Confirm Dialog when ATLAS quits in the Upload Method box You do not want to upload a common dictio
163. d Translation Memory Data in Mail Translation Searching Stored Translation Memory Data in Clipboard Translation WE Searching Stored Translation Memory Data in the Translation Editor This section describes how to utilize translation memory in the Translation Editor In preparation for using translation memory specify the Dictionaries Used in Translation and change the Match Value of Used Translation Memory beforehand For details refer to Utilizing Translation Memory Translation Memory in Introduction on page 29 The following procedure assumes you have entered translated text in the Translation Editor and the search results are displayed in different colors based on the match value 1 Select a sentence number for which the color of the translated text is orange or black then right click on the cell and select the Translation Memory Display Window command from the pop up menu 1 Select sentence no ce 2 LK 6 lt lt lt lt _ 2 Right click Add Word 6 Since that first settlement offe Find Delete Word more and more and more evide Store Translation Memory There was a deliberate calculay Sut 7 period of years to market tobe Copy children even though it was ille tobacco Delete Selected Area Translation 8 I think they ought to rethink th Ganfirmation Translation 9 Because we re going to get ii MEISEL E E 3 Click tha athan The Translation Memory Another window
164. d in the translated text Original text TY YUE RRS SE OI BRERYAT Setting Translated text To check the engine parts are detached Clause to Parts are detached to check the engine Comma at Both Ends of Relative Clause Specifies whether a comma is used at both ends of a relative clause Original text BABS SHRRMBREHALE Maii Translated text The computer that understood the natural language output the voice The computer that understood the natural language output the voice Brackets Control Non Translation Brackets Sets symbols used to mark sections in the original text for controlling or for non translation to either of the following sets of brackets or J lt gt or ATLAS translates the original by handling ranges enclosed in the specified brackets as controlling or non translation sections For details please refer to Selecting a Text String as a Translation Unit Insert Control Brackets in Introduction on page 12 and Selecting a Non Translation Text String Insert Non Translation Brackets in Introduction on page 14 Spelling Check Mark Brackets Sets the marks to be used for executing spelling check on the original text to either of the following sets of brackets lt gt or O With the Spelling Check command selected ATLAS checks for misspelled words and words not included in dictionaries and then displays those words enclosed in the specified type of brackets For detai
165. ding on what you want to do e To upload common dictionaries Green icon administrator Click the Upload Now button Lo Mm ManUJuUz LO M MONUU Download Method Show Confirm Dialog when ATLAS starts oes Upload Method Is show Confirm Dialog when ATLAS quits bE Click Show results of processing Show results of processing mile l l U l l All common dictionaries are uploaded to the Common Folder To download common dictionaries Pink icon user Click the Download Now button Download Method 5 Show Confirm Dialog when ATLAS starts ey Click Show results of Steet A Show results of processing tt results of processing Upload Method Show Confirm Dialog when ATLAS quits a ey All common dictionaries are downloaded 164 Chapter 9 Using the Common Dictionary Hints gt You can use the Download Method box or Upload Method box of the Common Dictionary dialog box to specify the method used to download upload common dictionaries 4 Click the OK button The screen returns to the Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box 5 Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box a
166. directly Switch Translation Direction Changes the translation direction when re translating as follows wo EJ_ JE p gt Jase OA As Start Translation Starts re translation after the original text is edited Translation Editor Starts up the Translation Editor Starts Translation Editor used to Memory store translation memory etc Display Vertically Displays original and translated text vertically Translation Memory Starts up the Translation Display Horizontally Displays original and translated text horizontally Font size Changes the font size and style L ne Displays Clipboard Translation help Translation Environment Settings Changes Translation environment 119 SV1LV Buisp 4L s seg Basics For Key Type Translation Pin Unpin Sets whether to automatically close the window when another window is activated Display Translated Text Output Pin Application Lock Information Always displays the window When the application or file name is in the foreground even when specified displays the application another window is activated or file name into which the translated text is inserted Unpin Help Automatically closes the Displays Help window when another window is activated Translation Environment Settings Used to select a translation environment Switch Translation Direction Used to specify the translation direction from Auto JE and EJ E Changing
167. e lt lt Don t Use button to move the common dictionary to the List of Available Dictionaries box 4 Click the Property button 5 Click the Change Admin button Dictionary Property Common Dictionary Dictionary Name Japanese Dictionary JCw0001 DC English Dictionary Ecw0001 DC oO Administrator J Computer Name SS_aaaaa a fe 6 Confirm the message and click the Yes button 7 Click the Modify button When the common dictionary upload processing confirmation dialog box appears always click the Yes button The administrator of the common dictionary is set and the screen returns to the Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box At this time the icon of the common dictionary changes from pink to green 8 Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button 167 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 9 6 Deleting a Common Dictionary re I This section describes to delete common dictionaries E Deletion of common dictionaries by user Delete common dictionaries from user s PC 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window to select Translation Environment Settings and
168. e Behe es 255 O ODE It ite ttt a ts vee AE a a Bane the 214 Objective Particle 141 143 147 Omitted ODieCh sirrien niaaa eens 215 Omitted particles 2 tae g eaa e Poke 254 Omitted predicative 254 Omitted predicative EJ 244 Omitted SUDIEGCE 5 vexdewaeot Gewese y 215 Original Tless2 23 260 20tseda eat aesisse 58 OUlDUl FORMAL 22 52 ca 52aarnde vane Yau 262 p Page Translation nannaa anaana aaan 85 Parallel phrases EJ 244 Part of Speech Settings in EJ translation 140 Part of Speech Settings in JE translation 142 Part of Speech Code nnana nananana 73 Particle Preposition EJ 228 Particle Preposition JE 224 Parts of speech iw sca Samana aacen sk ant 139 Parts of Speech Available Combinations 219 Parts of Speech Specifying for EJ 73 Patent aS iss cate tO cite ed oe ene et 207 AAIE e ec sian Maye mates Geeta he hess 218 PU 2 tea te ta Betting Sens Bee Eo crete Oh ee ee ease T 252 Plural form 140 141 142 145 Plural Form Number Table 148 Pop up mode Type of dialog box 120 POSHO Sco oc acto toa Secs edie ace bok Gece aha 141 145 Position of If Clause 217 Post editing 40 43 240 246 PowerPoint File Translation 98 PowerPoint Translation 98 Pre editing 20005 40 240 246 Proposition
169. e Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Dle rire n AUTO ge General Bal cy Original text Translated text This invention describes a multi mode optical switching device comprising several regions interfacing with inorganic semiconductors Each mode generates positrons and a SEF lt DAO TEIN CLO Fld of BR photocurrent in several regions in response to pa aa Ste control signals of different wavelengths of light Finish translating Number of dictionary of origin marks 1 words Hints gt Follow these steps to delete source dictionary marks If the translated text includes the same marks brackets as the selected source dictionary mark they are deleted as well as the source dictionary marks 1 Select the Translated text cell or string whose source dictionary marks you want to delete 2 Select Dictionary of Origin Marks from the Assistance menu and click Delete marks If no cell or string is selected the operation is applied to all translated sentences All source dictionary marks in the selection are deleted from the text 2 14 Searching for and Replacing a Text String Find A specific text string can be searched for and replaced with another text string E Find 1 Place the cursor in an Original text or Translated text cell Translated text n g i A eit 9 Ol KIOMA This invention explains an optical switching Pose ODL device of the multimode that
170. e LTE ELE REO SE EA DUES ae SVS Ra EA Page 1 of 1 Words 220 res Japanese Insert C3 HI w Document3 Microsoft Word Table Tools tes Home Insert Page Layout References Mailings Review View ATLAS Design Layout p ee m r n e pemn na m ce nET oan 5 vy _ a pug 2 _ Cy ee 2 4 8 10 12 g l4 16 18 20 24 264 ae 303234 3638 ie e d4 4648 Ii Nature conservation Britain has enforced the policy to protect rich nature and valuable ruins ete and the law over many years Britain played a leading role by Earth Convention in Rio de Janeiro of 1992 where an important agreement had been signed Britain has protected the flora and fauna of the home country over many years Flora and fauna of Britaine The provinces The main plante The main animale The Hidlandse Oake Page 1 of1 Words 95 SB English U S Insert 93 SV1LV Buisp 4L s seg Basics lt 2 _ _ f you select Output to Another Document the layout of the original text is preserved in the translation However layout is not preserved if Output Original and Translation is checked in the Environment Settings dialog box f you select Output to Another Document the clipboard is used for translation After translation the contents of the clipboard are removed 3 Click the Save as Pair button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar to save the original and translated text Q e R S Di
171. e Stopped words Even if a part of soeech has been set to the highest priority for a word the translation results will not reflect it if ATLAS mistakenly interprets the part of soeech of the word The priority is effective for a word having different translations with the same part of speech 1 Search for the word whose priority you want to change For details refer to 8 7 Finding Words Registered in Dictionaries on page 149 151 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 2 Select the word to set to the highest priority and click the Priority button Find Delete Word Japanese gt English Environment General Z Changeable Dictional Searched Word 1 Select a word Search Japanese C English RAH greatly BRA giant 004 RA grand Hints gt If the selected word is included in a Non Changeable Dictionary the word is automatically added to the Changeable Dictionary as the highest priority word HM Stopping Words Not Usable You can stop a particular word you do not want to use from being used for translation This function is useful in the following cases To translate a phrasal verb used in a verbal idiom e g play it by ear F m I as an independent verb e g play 4 lt lo translate a combined expression like oil and fat word for word To stop a part of speech that was interpreted mistakenly in an EJ translation when stopping that part of soeech has no negative
172. e User Dictionary that is used as the top priority dictionary during translation is called the Changeable Dictionary Only one Changeable Dictionary can be set for a single translation environment When there is only one user dictionary that dictionary is automatically used as the Changeable Dictionary This section describes the steps to set User dictionary0002 as the Changeable Dictionary with the translation environment set for General Hints gt The Changeable Dictionary is represented by the icon ej on the Dictionaries Used in Translation box 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and then select General from Translation Environment Settings 133 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 134 2 Inthe list of Dictionaries Used in Translation select User dictionary0002 and then click the A button to move it to the top of the list Detail Settings General 1 Select dictionary Dictionary Settings English to Japanese Japanese to English Translation Memory List of Available Dictionaries Dictionaries Used in Translation Common0001 Toe EA User dictionary0001 JCommon0002 a User dictionary0002 fa 60 Business Packet g Standard Dictionary a i iar Packet pal lll G 2 Click 62 Mail Packet Pane 63 Entertainment Packet New 64 Chat Packet 65 Patent Packet Property 66 Basic Sample 67 Patent Procedure Packet Import Changeable Diction
173. e documents eo MSXML 3 0 or later must be installed before you can use Text Align File TRG MSXML 3 0 is automatically installed when Internet Explorer 6 or later is installed 1 Click the Useful Tool button in the Main Window and select Text Alignment Support Tool ATLAS Main Window R Editor S S ely S A amp Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Launch Text Alignment Support Tool gl Text Alignment Support Tool PS Text Alignment Support Tool i Edit Settings Alignment Help Open Text or Word Document Ctrl T Open Tab Separated Text File Ctrl 4 3 Select Source Language Type to specify Source and Translation files and click the OK button Open Text or Word Document Source Language lt ____ _ 1 Select source language type i Source File files ATLAS V1H Sample Ejsamp txt_ lt _ __ _ 2 Specify source text file Trandlation File jles ATLAS VI SampleJesamp tkt 3 Specify translation text file 199 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics The contents of the file are loaded ps Text Alignment Support Tool C Program Files ATLAS V13 Sample Ejsamp txt _ SEE File Edit Settings Alignment Help oe he RR ot fe General E This invention describes a COA SO Sa ci multi mode optical switching Do Depa amp DIET S VL device comprising several regions FE FOS UBRB CO DLIT inter
174. e is automatically translated and the result is displayed B sample txt Notepad File Edit Format wiew Help This invention describes a multi mode optical switching device comprising several regions interfacing with inorganic Select and copy the sentence semiconductors fsla nanes EEs EIEE Ea oE Loea sles photocurrent in several regions in response to control signals leigm he photocurrent in each mode independently modulate the transmission of the high frequency control signals D The translation result is displayed ATLAS Clipboard Translation Ea OUVRinea ame Each mode generates positrons and a photocurrent in several regions in response to control signals of different waveleneths of light 117 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics Clipboard Translation provides a way to translate text copied to the clipboard The differences between Clipboard Translation and Automatic Clipboard Translation Tips are as follows e Automatic Clipboard Translation Upon copying a sentence translation is automatically started and the translation result is displayed Clipboard Translation Translation does not start after copying a sentence until you select Clipboard Translation in the Main Window After translation the text in the clipboard is replaced with the translated text You can also avoid displaying the Clipboard Translation dialog box For details refer to 4 2 Hiding Clipboard Translation dialog box on page
175. e is large delete unnecessary common dictionaries Even when common dictionaries are used translation results differ from those done on another PC e Cause The priority of the downloaded common dictionary Pink icon cannot be set higher than user dictionary using the up arrow A of the Detail Settings dialog box For that reason the translation result may differ when only common dictionaries are used and when both user dictionaries and common dictionaries are used e Solution Move the user dictionaries from the Dictionaries Used in Translation box in the Detail Settings dialog box to the List of Available Dictionaries box to make them unavailable for translation If translation is done by a group in addition to the type and priority of dictionaries in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box translation style settings etc must also match see page 159 173 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg 10 Using the Translation Memory The translation memory stores text pairs consisting of original and translated text in a database Using the accumulated translation results in combination with automatic translation can improve translation efficiency You can register translation memory items in Translation Memory and search and edit the data in the Translation Memory window In accordance with the specified match value this function extracts stored translation memory items and displays the results in the Translation Memory
176. e translation environment You can select the translation environment used with the Translation Editor For details refer to 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment in Basics on page 47 Files the Translation Editor can Save The Translation Editor can save the following types of files For details refer to 2 4 Saving the Translation Results in Basics on page 57 e Combined translation files trd e Horizontal translation files trc e Vertical translation files tra e Original files jpn eng e Text files txt Q Loading a file from Windows Explorer Translation using lt Translation Editor gt Oooo E Translating all sentences All Sentence Translation 1 Open the file you wish to translate Introduction 2 Click the All Sentence Translation button S 5 ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 Sample Ejsamp txt File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help la fale olex wo eq ier as 24 o Original text Translated text This invention describes a multi mode optical 1 switching device comprising several regions interfacing with inorganic semiconductors Each mode generates positrons and a photocurrent 2 in several regions in response to control signals of different wavelengths of light D Translation starts VE ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 Sample Ejsamp txt File Edit Translation Assistance Di
177. ected sentences in Basics on page 85 eo Depending on the PDF document to be translated there are cases where translation cannot be implemented due to the setup of security information and setup reference which is disabled on the screen For details refer to Notes in i Setting up Acrobat and Adobe Reader in Basics on page 80 Reflecting translated text created with Translation Editor to PDF document It is possible to reflect the translated text from Translation Editor to the original PDF document by starting lt Translation Editor gt from lt Acrobat Translation gt For details refer to Hi Reflecting and saving translation results in source documents in Basics on page 59 Tips 19 uo1 0npo1 u Translating Contents of the Clipboard Clipboard Translation This section describes the method to translate a small amount of sentences easily 1 Open the text file with Notepad and then select the text you want to translate and copy it to the clipboard P Jesamp Notepad 5 Ed Fie Edit Format View Help CERRO EAS Scie ool 6 OAR Be aL E Pc OR ee TRAA ET 2 Click the Clipboard button in the Main Window ATLAS Main Window 5 e f S S F SA amp Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Click on an icon wat processing D Translation results appear F ATLAS Clipboard Translation AUTO k EE Io SEB t Be aR ICH This invention e
178. ed text S or It as Subject It detaches parts Imperative Only T F 4 Parts are detached Imperative All Detach parts 214 Chapter 1 Setting the Translation Style Translation Style 2 Omitted Subject Specifies how a sentence with its subject omitted should be translated Original text HAAS A Setting Translated text S will arrive tomorrow 3 Omitted Object Specifies how a sentence with its object omitted should be translated Original text HADUH A Setting Translated text The computer processes it 4 FS4HEAHS without Subject Specifies howa 4 A HS1 sentence without a subject should be translated Original text F FAMEBSTAVMENAS It is necessary to It is necessary to process data 5 F ATE T without Subject Specifies howa I IZh T sentence without a subject should be translated Original text BRAG lt CEACES Setting Translated text It is possible to It is possible to go to Tokyo Kanna E Imperative 1 T LTFRSb Specifies howa L TFL sentence should be translated Original text WmERYIFPLTES U Setting Translated text Please Imperative Please detach parts 215 syns y uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques 2 t Specifies howa lt amp t 7ZL sentence should be translated Original text YVAFAICBYUAECAL Setting Translated text The system is not allowed to interrup
179. eduled to execute at later date For details on Dictionary Synchronization refer to the manual of Accela BizLingo V3 0 WE Uploading User Dictionary for Immediate Synchronization Upload a User Dictionary to the Translation Server and perform Dictionary Synchronization 1 Click the Server button in the Main Window and select Dictionary Management S ATLAS Main Window yr E G9 F amp F A B amp B Q Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Editor Clipboard Manipulate dictionary on server or client Fi Dictionary Management Al Configure Server Connection 2 Click the Acquire List button in the ATLAS Dictionary Management dialog box 2 Appendix 3 Select the User Dictionary to be uploaded from the List of Client and click the Update Now button Multiple User Dictionaries can be selected E WSR RT lecnnical Victonary UZD ZU 4 Akane Technical Dictionary 04 25 20 fal nei iE Tarhninal Nintianam NAN ee Log Viewer All Dictionaries 29 Basic Dictionary 1 Technical Dictionaries 25 User Dictionaries 3 1 Select a dictionary to be uploaded 2 Click cquire List of Server Dictionaries Automatically Next Time Update Now onary Name Modified New 3tandard Dictionary Standard Dictionary 03 28 2006 C Import ull User dictionary0001 User Dictionary 06 05 2006 1 Merge Dictionaries Rename lt gt Delete All Dictionaries 2 Basic
180. effect For example Original click the checkbox marked Translation FoyIRYZARVY ICEAVY yD l Stopping click noun changes the translation as follows Translation Y IS2nkEFLVIRYVIRZEDYYVILTCERSL 1 Find the word you want to stop For details please refer to 8 7 Finding Words Registered in Dictionaries on page 149 2 Select the word to stop using then click the Not Usable button Find Delete Word Japanese gt Enelish Environment General e Changeable Dictiona Searched Word 1 Select a word Search Japanese English HAH greatly Priori riorit 003 RA giant stalls 004 A grand Add Word RENN i 3 Confirm the message and click the Yes button 152 Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary Hints gt The same notations or parts of speech as the stopped word are all stopped For a stopped word priority setting or deletion is unavailable gt To release a stopped word click the Cancel Not Usable button on the Find Delete Word dialog box Ceo The information relating to a stopped word is recorded in the Changeable Dictionary If no Changeable Dictionary is available no User Dictionary set in Dictionaries Used in Translation this function is disabled When a search is conducted for the translation side Japanese for EJ translation or English for JE translation this function is not available Before opening the Find Delete Word dialog box check the
181. elected translated text from the translation memory to the translation memory 10 4 Storing Translation Memory Items ooo There are four ways to store translation memory items Using the Translation Editor Specify the original text and corresponding translated text in the Translation Editor Using a file Prepare a vertical translation file tra or plain text file txt that contains the translation memory items you want to register and import the file For details on what files can be registered refer to 2 4 Saving the Translation Results on page 57 Using Excel In Excel specify a range of cells you want to register Using the Text Alignment Support Tool Use the Text Alignment Support Tool to align original text with translated text and then register the results 10 6 Using the Text Alignment Support Tool on page 199 Registration from lt Translation Memory gt Edit the translation memory search results from the Translation Memory Another window or the Translation Memory In the window and register lt 3 Translation memory items are stored in the User Dictionary However if you attempt to store translation memory from the Translation Editor or from the Translation Memory it is registered in the Changeable Dictionary In such a case register translation memory data after setting up the Changeable Dictionary For details on changeable dictionary refer to 8 4 Setting Changeable Diction
182. ells are selected an area of cells is selected automatically e If you select a range of data including a blank cell and attempt to register the data as a translation memory item an error message appears and it cannot be registered At this time the cursor moves to the affected cell Correctly select the range you want to register in the translation memory and then try again gt If you cannot register a translation memory item the Translation Editor displays a registration failure message number If registration was attempted from an area other than the Translation Editor the registration result is displayed in the dialog box Clicking the Details button in the dialog box displays the reason for failure Correct the original or translated text as needed and try registration again gt The translation memory can be used in both the J gt E and E gt J translation directions gt Since the number of words and translation memory items added in one user dictionary affect processing speed you must rebuild the dictionary when the current dictionary reaches 10 000 words or memory items gt It is recommended that you keep the total number of translation memory item entries in a changeable dictionary to around 10 000 You can create larger dictionaries by the following methods e Extracting or merging dictionary data e Register the TRA format file which is created by extracting all data from Translation Editor However if the dictionary co
183. emory search simultaneously Search for Translation Memory simultaneously when the translation button is clicked in the Translation Environment Settings has to be checked and Translation Memory has to be displayed in the window The ATLAS Step Translation dialog box opens which displays the original text and translated result 2 Correct the translation result as required There are a variety of available operations including translation memory search word search registration and word selection SS ATLAS Step Translation S VQmEa aug Navi Next eei ad Ee gt gt Always replace Replace The setting becomes effective the arti Windowsa TS y next time you boot Windows OTATTE Te For details on the Translation Memory word search registration and word selection refer to one of the following respectively e Translation Memory gt 10 3 Working with the Translation Memory Window on page 185 e Word Search Registration 8 7 Finding Words Registered in Dictionaries on page 149 8 6 Adding Words on page 136 e Change Word gt 2 15 Selecting a Translated Word Used for Further Translation Change Word on page 72 3 Click the Next button or Replace button e When you click the Next button the selected range is replaced by step translation and the next text is continuously translated If Always replace is not checked the selected range is not replaced by translated text but the next t
184. en administrator and also that the common dictionary is set as a changeable dictionary Indicates that the dictionary is a common dictionary of which you are a user a pink The dictionary was downloaded from the Common Folder and can be used for reference purposes only 125 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 8 2 Setting Dictionaries to be Used for Translation Dictionaries Used in Translation ee This section describes how to set up created user dictionaries downloaded user dictionaries or installed technical dictionaries so that they can be used in translation In the following example we show how to set up the User dictionary0002 for use in the General translation environment 126 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and then select 2 3 General from Translation Environment Settings SS ATLAS Main Window er e Q es o amp E g Editor Clipboard Mail Quick TLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Translation Environment Nam Translation Environment List Translation Environment Settings gt ef Current Translation Environment Operating Environment Settings Setup Application Translation Thesis In the List of Available Dictionaries select User dictionaryO002 and then click the Use button Detail Settings General 1 Select dictionary Dictionary Settings English 1 Japanese Japanese to English Translation
185. ention describes a multi mode optical switchine device mode optical switching device TOLSMA BRADIETST comprising several regions interfacing with inorganic comprising several regions IVFE FORSVIREEITO semiconductors interfacing with inorganic LTB E To semiconductors OD FAA SEM EHT ao COND Aka S TIL FE FORSEMIRRAICDL IT HAALE TT The window display changes accordingly Changing the Font Size Style 1 Click the Font Settings button A 2 Change the font size and or style and then click the OK button Font Font style MS PISSA Regular A Small Fonts System Sample Aadh amp r rE Script Japanese 103 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg 3 1 5 Basic Operation of Web Translation You can translate a Web page on Internet Explorer 6 7 For the basics on how to use Web Translation refer to Translating Web Pages with Internet Explorer Web Translation in Introduction on page 22 About the ATLAS Tool Bar 104 When Internet Explorer is started the ATLAS Tool Bar appears in Internet Explorer If the ATLAS Tool Bar does not appear click Tools button and then select Toolbars ATLAS Toolbar The ATLAS toolbar is checked and the ATLAS Tool Bar appears For Internet Explorer 6 click View and then select Toolbars ATLAS toolbar This section describes the structure of the ATLAS Tool Bar and buttons Translation Direction The menu appears when you click this mark You can select transl
186. ents as a source document This file has both the source document data and 57 SV1LV Buisp 4L s seg Basics File type Explanation Original file J A file with the Japanese text only It is created when Translation file e English text is translated into Japanese with the Translation Editor and it is saved as a translated text file or e Japanese text is translated into English with the Translation Editor and it is saved as the original text file This is a text file and can be edited with Notepad or other applications A file with the English text only It is created when e English text is translated into Japanese with the Translation Editor and it is saved as the original text file or e Japanese text is translated into English with the Translation Editor and it is saved as a translated text file This is a text file and can be edited with Notepad or other applications Text file txt An ordinary text file that can be edited with Notepad or other applications E Save You can save a file by overwriting The existing file contents are lost Hints gt You can click the Save button to save a combined translation file trd a horizontal translation file trc or a vertical translation file tra only 1 Click the Save button on the toolbar E Save As You can save a file by specifying its format name and storage location 1 Click the Save As button f on the toolbar 2 Specify
187. erent wavelengths of light Select Save As from the File menu ya ATLAS Translation Editor G Proeram Fil Sif Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Optic New Open Print Translation by Comparing Original and Translated Text Translation Editor 6 Specify the type of file and file name then click the Save button Save in Sample X Coop O iIchitaro E Ejbilng tre uo1 0npo1 u File name Ejsampl tre Save as type Horizontal translation file trc v Cancel Help You can load a file from Windows Explorer To do so right click a file on the Windows Explorer select Send To and then ATLAS Translation Editor Tips Also you can drag and drop a file from Windows Explorer into the Translation Editor Entering original text from the keyboard You can input text directly in the Original text cells with the keyboard Pasting original text via clipboard You can load documents created with other applications into the Translation Editor via the clipboard Check the translated text by re translation You can re translate the translated text back to the original language by selecting Confirmation Translation from the Translation menu Creating Translation Memory You can store an edited and completed translation sentence as a translation memory item to enable the reuse of translation data For details refer to Utilizing Translation Memory Translation Memory on page 29 Select th
188. erge data of User Dictionaries Before merging User Dictionaries you must convert them into the MRG format To do so refer to 3 1 Extracting Data from User Dictionaries Extract Dictionary Data on page 231 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and select Merge Dictionary Data from Management Menu ATLAS Main Window ev A G e S SA E Editor Clipboard Mail Quick TLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help YA EJ Add Word R EJ Eind Delete Word Be a ee A a i a a Oe SR OP a Oe a Oe A ee a i Oe a eM ST NF BR NF SS RS NSS NS OS OY eS Merge from extracted dictionary data Bi Add All Translation memory byt Merge Dictionary Data Erl Reindex Dictinnary 2 Click the Add button T3 ATLAS Merge Dictionay Data Input Files e File Filename User dictionary0003 MRG User dictionary00C lt 2 Click Files of type Dictionary Data File MRG v Cancel 232 Chapter 3 Managing Data of User Dictionaries 4 Check the contents of Words Translation Memory Deactivated Words Information Delete the data Sa do not wish to merge by clicking the Exclude button English P Wore A 1 Select a Da 1 i 1 E nglis Verb Adjective aac ED c _ lable 2 word 1 Word Englis Particle Preposition 6rbtes in the face of 3 1 Word Englis Adjective Adjective Ilf ge uncontrollable 4 1 Word Englis Noun Noun tak bloodhound 5 1
189. es Used in Translation Finding will be terminated Meaning The operation has failed due to insufficient memory Cause Setting several translation memory dictionaries containing many samples in the list of available dictionaries and performing translation memory search requires a large memory which may result in operation failure Action Remove the Basic Sample dictionary and other unused translation memory dictionaries from the list 2 0 C For Users of Other ATLAS Series Software This section contains important information for users of ATLAS V14 and users of other ATLAS software The FAQ at the ATLAS Web site http software fujitsu com jp atlas is another source of the most recent information regarding ATLAS lt 3 ____ Operation is not guaranteed if multiple versions of ATLAS are in use simultaneously It is recommended that older versions of ATLAS are uninstalled lt Web Translation Internet Explorer gt can only be used with one version of ATLAS C 1 Users of ATLAS V14 and V8 Both versions of Web Translation cannot coexist when ATLAS V14 and ATLAS V8 are installed The procedure for using Web Translation of ATLAS V14 or ATLAS V8 is described below E When ATLAS V14 is installed on a computer where ATLAS V8 is already installed When ATLAS V8 has not been uninstalled before installing ATLAS V14 Web Translation in ATLAS V8 can be used in this environment without requiring any fur
190. ext will be translated e When you click the Replace button the ATLAS Step Translation dialog box closes and the selected range is replaced by translated text 90 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation E Translating selected sentences Selected Sentence Translation You can translate a sentence selected in Word or translate a sentence where the cursor is located Open a Word file to be translated In the example given below Output Destination on the ATLAS tab is set to Replace Using Original For versions prior to and including Word 2003 Text Output Destination is set to Replace Using Original in Environment Settings 1 Select the original text you wish to translate 3 Ao w Keynes docx Microsoft Word EY a t d P Home Insert Page Layout References Mailings Review View ATLAS 1 i f _ z 1181 1201 i 1 1 I i 1 Introduction Chapter 1 The General Theory Chapter 2 The Postulates of the Classical Economics Chapter 3 The Principle of Effective Demand Words 5 474 lt English U S Insert 2 Click the Tranlate Selected button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar ATLAS a _ j Q i g Direction AUTO v Ei ON Output Destination Replace Using Original Sa paee Environment General x M preriear E Horizontal i Save as Pair Transk Translate J Translation Step E s Add Find Delete Mi 7 ATLAS All Selected Editor Translation De
191. ey Type Translation dialog box appears Alternately you can also right click the Quick ATLAS icon and select Key Type Translation from the displayed menu Press lt lt Ctrl gt gt lt lt Shift gt gt lt lt T gt gt key 4 Enter a sentence in the Key Type Translation dialog box CA ATLAS Key Type Translation 5 Press the lt lt Enter gt gt key A ATLAS Key Type Translation EJ AUTO amp Report txt Notepad Web 17A EEk d fiat Press the lt lt Enter gt gt key D The translation result is input P Report Notepad Kex File Edit Format wiew Help Naane of ATLAS Functon to Translate web paqe 6 To continue translating repeat from Step 3 or 4 If you repeat from Step 4 you do not need to lift your hands from the keyboard 115 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics Hints gt If you start Key Type Translation without specifying where to input the translated text for example if the application to which the translated text is to be input is not running or is inactive a message appears in the Key Type Translation dialog box that says Please type Ctrl Shift T over the translation results output field In such a case open the target file or launch the application click the location at which you want to input the translated text then press lt lt Ctrl gt gt lt lt Shift gt gt lt lt T gt gt key The Key type Translation dialog box becomes available for input gt
192. facing with inorganic HALET 2 3 oloke onta Si ee TORE HES BE KC LS HERDS CS BRANES SO ire sae LE o ETE CHASNABFIC k SENECA ESAT actlekraT BADA Fy y PRPBE OE VAII CHAS CEPTS Each mode generates positrons and a photocurrent in several regions in response to control signals of different wavelengths of light The photocurrent in each mode independently modulate the transmission of the high frequency control signals Multiple hybrid optical devices can be transfofied into optical interfaces by ufing light impulses in a manner sir lar to the alactranic aate uand in Ready Ei Chom HelIHeTER Y MLINE Original text area Alignment area Translated text area 4 Click the Align Automatically button in the tool bar PS Text Alignment Support Tool G Proeram Filest ATLAS V13 Sample Ejsamp txt__ maf File Edit Settings vent Help CAT AE pE o HE O lt lt Gener _ This invention describes a Zensen eens cee A The source and translation text files are aligned Dotted lines indicate non finalized status Check alignment and correct as necessary p Text Alignment Support Tool C Program Filest ATLAS V 13 Sample Ejsamp txt__ SEE File Edit Settings Alignment Help oe aati RPS kh oOxH General E This invention describes a 4 _ 388A SRO Sa ces multi mode optical switching DL DDOR e DRT S VIL device comprising several regions m 7 E Ft OME REE COUT i
193. folder the common dictionary administrator should take corrective measures as described below 171 SVI1LV Puis 4L solseg Basics 1 Delete the upload source common dictionary using the Dictionary Settings tab in the Details Settings dialog box 2 Common dictionaries in the common folder can also be deleted if you operate in accordance with messages after the deletion of the common dictionary stated above Note that when uploading of two or more common dictionaries fails the detailed error message appears for the first common dictionary only must convert the common dictionary to a user dictionary convert it back to a common dictionary and then upload the dictionary As a result the common dictionary that could not be uploaded can be used as a new common dictionary When there are unneeded dictionaries in the Common Folder the administrator of the common dictionary uses the Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box to delete the common dictionaries E Common Folder related issues You want to organize the dictionaries in the Common Folder e Solution When there are unnecessary common dictionaries in the Common Folder or user s PC use the following procedure to organize the Common Folder 1 Use Windows Explorer to back up the common dictionaries in the Common Folder 2 Use Windows Explorer to delete all files in the Common Folder 3 With all PCs that use common dictionaries delete all downloaded c
194. gs dialog box appears Chapter 9 Using the Common Dictionary 2 Click the user dictionary to convert in the List of Available Dictionaries box under the Dictionary Settings tab and click the Property button 3 Click the Convert Common Dict button Dictionary Property User Dictionary Dictionary Name User dictionary0002 Japanese Dictionary C Documents and Settir Enelish Dictionary C Documents and Settir Convert Common Dict Click omei ee 4 Confirm the message and click the Yes button SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg 5 Change the common dictionary name in Dictionary Name box as needed and click the Modify button When the common dictionary upload processing confirmation dialog box appears always click the OK button The user dictionary is converted to a common dictionary and the screen returns to the Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box In the List of Available Dictionaries box under the Detail Settings dialog box the pre conversion user dictionary is replaced with the converted common dictionary 6 Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button Hints gt You can
195. haracters are shown in black e Example Stored translation memory data Source String FHAIR TRALASI EIR oT Translated Text Applicants are requested to apply in person e The following string is translated as follows Source String FHI EZALATT BRBILAABSCALUAGCEILBADTWET Translated Text Applicants are requested to apply in person after filling out the form The underline indicates the part of the string that matches translation memory data Items stored in Add Example Based Translation Data in older versions can be used as is as translation memory data For the treatment of the example based translation data which includes patterns refer to Storing proper nouns and date amp time as variables Store Translation Memory with Variables in Basics on page 197 Translation memory items are stored in the User Dictionary When two or more user dictionaries are used translation memory items are stored in a user dictionary which is set as the top priority user dictionary changeable dictionary in the translation environment The translation memory data is applied to all user dictionaries used by translation For details about user dictionary refer to Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary in Basics on page 122 Finding Detailed Information Help Internet Update Help allows you to check the meaning or use of a function you are not sure of while using ATLAS E ATLAS Online Help 1 Click the Help button in the Main Window and
196. haracters with 262 A Acrobat Adobe Reader Translation 83 Add all File Output 154 Add all output format 156 Add All Text File pei cd oe ears eae aes 220 AJO EJ Sea a cena Oe Fe Can a ee 138 7X6 6 i aie ae ean a ne 138 Adding All WordS naana Sass levies eS 228 Adding Words sei ucwee ken rete pikki 27 146 Adding Words User Dictionary 136 219 Adjective Adjective EJ 226 Adjective Adjective JE 144 223 Adjective Noun EJ 00008 141 Adjective Verb EJ 141 226 Adjective Verb JE 144 223 Adobe Reader Translation 83 Adverb Adverb EJ 00000 eee 227 Adverb Adverb JE 145 223 All Sentence Translation Excel 96 All Sentence Translation PowerPoint 99 All Sentence Translation Translation Editor 7 All Sentence Translation Word 89 Application Translation 50 78 Application Translation Acrobat Adobe Reader 83 Application Translation Excel 95 Application Translation Install amp Setup 79 Application Translation Power Point 98 Application Translation Uninstall 273 Application Translation Word 88 Applications Can be used with ATLAS 52 Antice sy socieads heaeed a iadens 252 255 ASSISIANGS ed gem d een eee eee os 2 ATLAS Unin
197. he Original Text button on the ATLAS Tool Bar Hints gt Change the display setting before clicking the Original Text button 1 Click the ATLAS button on the ATLAS Tool Bar and click ATLAS toolbar settings KART Mit aTeo UD Auto Translation Original Text ATLAS toolbar settings YY sous USSU IDAJO pI IG page l Internet Update Japanese page ATLAS Product Information Help About ATLAS 2 To display the original text and the translation in separate windows check the Show original text in new window check box and click the OK button ATLAS Toolbar Settings Translation Sc Environment Name Translate Automatically when page is displayed Owiewnael baut diamkan mathan Show original text in new window Me re ee SAS eee ew 1 Check C Same as the Internet Explorer setting Display Button Name Yes C No se Click 106 Chapter 5 Basic Operation of Web Translation 5 3 Choose whether or not to perform the translation simultaneously with the display of the page Choose whether or not to perform the automatic translation whenever a page is displayed such as the results of a keyword search or a page jumped to from a hyperlink 1 Click the Auto button Auto Translation Switching between ON and OFF occurs each time you click the Auto button ELAS Translation Sy Auto Translation OFF state ELAS Translation Pf
198. he text area of the worksheet you wish to translate in D EE ean tas a HE 111 111 111 1 SE 229 999 999 2 ABBE 333 333 333 3 Tt 97 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 2 Click the Translate Selected button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar ATLAS Q cF A E Direction AUTO Ei Word Registration Template SS N Environment General v T3 Add All Words Translate Transla Translate f Translation pa i Add Find Delete ATLAS All Sheet Selected Editor m Detail Settings Word Word Add To Translation Memory Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Batch Add Help When the translation is completed the results are displayed B C D a ae PY A 1 tte Ab 3 K4 ist LBS a Branch office Post ORE tk 111 111 111 1 8 Tokyo branch offiThe first Sales D laS Bz 222 222 222 2 ABE R ED 333 333 333 3 tt You can create a list of words and translation memory items that you wish to Q Adding All Words and Translation Memory Items at Once register in Excel and add them at once Tips For details refer to Chapter 2 Adding Words in Advanced Techniques on page 219 and W Using Excel to Store Translation Memory Data in Basics on page 194 3 5 Translating a PowerPoint File SS The following explains how to translate the text of a presentation object you have created in PowerPoint lt 2 ____ The origi
199. hen this text is translated by ATLAS the variable part is automatically translated The characters are displayed in black and inserted in the translated text Fuzzy matching is also used for translation memory with variables For details refer to Help Specifying a Character String as Variables First either in Original or Translated text select the character string which you wish to store as variables by double clicking The corresponding character string in the opposite language text is automatically selected as well Then from the Edit menu select Insert Translation Memory Variables These strings each are enclosed by brackets lt Nx gt x is the number to recognize the English Japanese pairs Extracting and merging multiple translation memory Extract Merge Dictionary Data When translation is being done by more than one translator you can extract or merge individually created translation memory For details refer to 3 Managing Data of User Dictionaries in Advanced Techniques on page 231 197 SVILV Bulsn L solseg Basics 10 5 Deleting Translation Memory Items eeM This section explains how to delete translation memory items To delete translation memory data use Translation Memory Note that you can only delete translation memory items that are stored in the changeable dictionary E Inthe Translation Memory Another window 1 Select a translation memory item from the list and click the Dele
200. hesis Dictionary Settings English to Japanese Japanese to English Translation Memory Line feed text file only How to recognize sentence end C Line feed recognized as sentence end Word wrapped Yes Word doesn t contain the line feed No Word contains the line feed You can set translation style Translation Style Sentence C Word Translation Only C Translation Format Help orei Translation Style Translation Unit Output Format 3 Set each item on the Translation Style dialog box and click the OK button Translation Style Enelish Japanese translation Stylel Style2 WILL SHALL CAN COULD MAY MUST Brackets 1 Code of Translation C lor 2 byte code Kana 1 byte C 2 byte code 2 Imperative LRN C LESI 3 Sentence Style of Translation TAA Ci tg Jandl J 4 Comma and Period oo F Jand Fe J F C F J andis J 5 Translation of Capitalized Words 6 Compound Word of Katakana Cancel Help 204 Chapter 1 Setting the Translation Style Translation Style 1 1 Translation Style EJ Translation _ Se This section describes translation results obtained when the respective translation styles are set along with examples E Style1 1 Code of Translation Specifies how single byte and double byte characters should be used in the translated text Original text PageRead can be used with zero one or more zone list files
201. his function on the local hard disk and click the Next button Follow the instructions in the messages that appear to continue installation Load the ATLAS CD ROM when prompted E When ATLAS V8 is installed on a computer where ATLAS V14 is already installed Web Translation in ATLAS V8 can be used in this environment without requiring any further procedures To use Web Translation in ATLAS V14 in this environment uninstall ATLAS V8 see page 271 and perform the following procedure Repairing and installing ATLAS V14 1 4 5 Click the Start button and select Control Panel from the Settings menu or select Control Panel Double click the Add Remove Programs or Add or Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel window For Windows Vista Click the link for Uninstall or Change a Program default setting Double click the Programs and Features icon in classic view Select ATLAS Translation Standard V14 0 from the list box then click Change Remove or the Remove button Click the Next button in the screen that appears Click Change in the repair screen and click the Next button Follow the instructions in the messages that appear to continue installation Load the ATLAS CD ROM when prompted When ATLAS V14 is uninstalled first the ATLAS Tool Bar no longer appears in Internet Explorer When this happens uninstall ATLAS V8 and install it again D Uninstalli
202. how how to use them 8 1 About Dictionaries oe This section describes the types of dictionaries used in ATLAS You can set the 3 types of dictionaries SVI1LV Puisn AL solseg M Standard Dictionary technical dictionaries and user dictionaries ATLAS provides the following three types of dictionaries Standard Dictionary This is the standard ATLAS dictionary that is used at all times Although it cannot be updated you can temporarily disable the use of specific terms Technical Dictionaries dictionaries for different technical fields Dictionaries listing technical terms for different fields are mainly of two kinds Dictionary data cannot be updated but you can temporarily disable the use of specific terms e Technical Dictionaries provided as standard The following technical dictionaries are automatically installed with ATLAS and are used as part of the ATLAS translation environment with the same name Business Packet Manual Packet Mail Packet Entertainment Packet Chat Packet Patent Packet and Patent Procedure Packet 1 Business mail sample 7 Basic Sample 1 Patent Procedure Packet as well as Patent are set as the Dictionaries Used in Translation in the Patent translation environment Patent Procedure Packet is a dictionary used for patent documents other than patent applications e g notification of reasons of refusal 2 Basic Sample and Business mail sample include translation memory You can
203. i Translation Memory Match Value of Used Translation Memory FO H Sover 4 100 Brackets displayed for translated text Automatic Translation 100 h itch Fuzzy Match fe Not digplayed fe bft displayed f Not digplayed C w 2 Click V 4 Click the OK button Help cancel 5 Select Save as and enter Memory 70 for the Environment Name then click the OK button Save General i Save fe Save as Environment Name Memory 70 E Enter Environment Name Caneel es 6 Click the Open button in the Translation Editor and open Etmsmpl txt Etmsmopl txt is stored in the SAMPLE folder in the folder in which ATLAS V14 is installed Example C Program Files ATLAS V14 SAMPLE When installed on the C drive a __l A Coop 1 Select the file Ichitaro E Jesamp txt T NATUPRG JPN EV yak E Eibilng tre E Jewdadd txt E Natupro tra E Ejzamp txt E Jtmsmpl txt H Sweden jpn Ejsamp_ txt EFI MENUBOX DOC E thisinvention_j2 txt E Ejwdadd txt EFIMENUEOX DOC E thisinvention_j txt a gt File name Ejsamp tet lt a 2 Click Files of ype Readable file txt trestrd trajpnceng docstttxls Cancel Help 32 Typical Use of Translation MemoryUtilizing Translation Memory Translation Memory 7 Click the All Sentences Translation button 5 ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 Sample Etmsmpl txt File Edit Translation Ass
204. ialog box select the Output Settings tab then Text Output Destination Select Output to Another Document and click the OK button 2 Click the Translate All button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar ATLAS RS g Direction AUTO Ei Ki Output Destination Output to Another Doc Gq Environment General T Vertical HJ Horizontar eq save as Pair Translation Step Add Find Delete ATLAS Editor Translation Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help When the translation is completed the results are displayed 3 EENDE Natupro docx Microsoft Word eel i lt wait Z Home Insert Page Layout References Mailings Review View ATLAS Q Ca RE g Direction AUTO Ei on Output Destination Output to Another Doc SE Environment General 1 vertica EJ Horizontar save as Pair Translate Translate Translation Step A Add Find Delete ae ATLAS All Selected Editor Translation Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help n ge 6 4 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 283 30 32 34 36 38 a a 44 46 g A A a SS ave SS SSE ey 3 5 tase int MERCH BRAID MEH SRE E RET SEDO BERD SMHTL TX ELE BERRA OBZAMTPEDNE 12D VAT y RIA SO Mh i Rt iy bl T RHSESHCRMARELELE REKDE oT AE K Eogh k tO te
205. ic gate used with the electron device in using a light impulse Hints gt A text string is searched in an upward or downward direction from the cursor position To search all the cells efficiently jump to the beginning or end of the cell and start searching gt You can also search for a text string by selecting Find from the Edit menu and clicking Find During this search you can distinguish between upper and lowercase letters E Replace 1 Place the cursor in an Original text or Translated text cell Original text Translated text Vee ee 1 DG 18 This invention explains an optical switching a eaS LOLOT device of the multimode that comprises some areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor F TEDEN o RR fk Each mode generates the positron and SSR 4 i eR laa BEd lt Sh ey aetah ah Elleni Cursor 2 Select Find from the Edit menu and click Replace File aie Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Undo Convert Ctri 2 ee Ne Nr Na NANI OY NANI NANI NANI N NI Re Na ee a OO OO OO ANT Find OW Replace 70 Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor 3 Enter the existing string in the Find what box and enter the new string in the Replace with box Replace Original text Findwhat fly Replace with fE Replace Replace All Cancel M Match case lt Check this box to select the case sensitive search for a str
206. ically translated sentence by sentence Functions such as translation memory search and word registration can be used in the Step Translation dialog box For details refer to W Automatically selecting and translating sentences ina document one by one Step Translation in Basics on page 90 16 Translating in Acrobat Application Translation This section describes how to translate in Acrobat using ATLAS In addition to Acrobat files the lt Application Translation gt function of ATLAS can also translate Word Excel PowerPoint and Adobe Reader files by setting up Application Translation Check if the lt Application Translation gt function has been installed by performing steps 1 and 2 of Translating Word Files Word Translation on page 15 1 Start Acrobat and open the PDF document you wish to translate 2 Uncheck the box for Use only certified plug ins on Acrobat 1 Select Preferences from the Edit menu ei Translation pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional T p 1 Jaa jh ba I Create POF Gp Combine Files E a 7 4 S Forms Search Shift Ctrl F Search Results gt Prereroneesa SHE ht click the Quick ATLAS icon on the task tray and then select Options from the displayed menu The Quick ATLAS Options dialog box appears 2 Select the Start Quick ATLAS when starting Windows checkbox Click the 2 Click General from the list on the left hand side of the dialog box
207. ice E AI D YIFE OE IRRE A CERBA lof the multimode that comprises some eae connected with an inorganic semiconducyor Double click either one 2 Select Change Word from the Assistance menu File Edit Translation Dictionary Option Help Spelling Check Export Undefined Word Delete Mark gt Change Word Translated Sentence Format settings 3 Select the translated word you wish to change it to check the Learn box and click Re translate When there is no suitable word in the list enter the Translated text directly When translated text is selected as a replacement the Dictionary name storing the text is displayed 1 Select translation Check if you want to use next time MV Learn ee a A Replace Add Word Cancel v Help Change Word Original Word Translated Word 2 Click aml Dictionary Name Standard Dictionary Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor Hints gt To re translate specified translated text click the Learn check box in Step 3 and click the Re translate button Selected translated text is re translated gt When you click Add Word the Part of Speech dialog box opens For details refer to 8 6 Adding Words on page 136 eo gt If the translated text is a Japanese verb or adjective only its stem is replaced When the conjugated form or part of speech differs the ending of a word may not be
208. ick the Translate All button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar ATLAS Q G ie g Direction AUTO Ei K Output Destination Replace Using Original Sa Environment General overran H Horizontal eq save as Pair Translate Janslate Translation Step cin Add Find Delete Mp TE ATLAS All elected Editor Translation v3 Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Tf Nate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help When the translation is completed the results are displayed Erit Mouse Translation F G hL ET UR ATLAS KA DPILI Vv UT 74 Avid Mouse Translation F GBL EF E ZS ATLAS RIFLET MURR ATLAS FBP Uv LT Fariha oL TLETT AOICHACE 532a Startup HI FATET ZD iaia ATLAS D Menu P29 FH a Si Main Window HHT ALmet at Translation Editor 2Y z 7 Translation FT STATER CHET 9497 ATLAS DA PE Tw S Down J 4 yY ATLAS Y Yyy LT 2 SE 3 Save the document as a Word file using the Save or Save As option If you select Save the existing file data is overwritten by the translated text data If you output the translation results to a translation document file the original and translation document files are saved as separate document files It may then be difficult to determine the correspondence between original and translated document file To avoid this problem select Save Translation For details refer to Displaying original and translated text separate
209. ictionary 234 3 4 Backing Up User Dictionaries Backup Dictionary 236 3 5 Restoring User Dictionaries Restore Dictionary 238 Chapter 4 Hints on Pre Post editing for EJ Translation 240 4 1 Hints for Creating Modifying Original Text 0 0 0 0 eee eee 240 4 2 Major Problems and Their Solutions for EJ Translation 243 Chapter 5 Hints on Pre Post editing for JE Translation 246 5 1 Preparing Appropriate Original Japanese Text 0 0 0c 246 5 2 Refining Translation to Proper English 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 251 5 3 Major Problems and Their Solutions for JE Translation 253 Chapter 6 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment Settings 05 256 6 1 Displaying Lists of Translation Environments 0000005 256 6 2 Creating Editing Translation Environments 00000 0 eee 257 6 3 Deleting Translation Environments 0 00 eee eee eee 258 6 4 Importing Exporting Translation Environment 0000065 259 vii 6 5 Translation Environment Options 0 00 cee ee eee 261 Chapter 7 Editing the Main Window 0 000 c eee eee ene 263 Appendix A LIStOLSNONCULKEYS 226 43 t046ecbes iddwaeiadd oe detdaeidteden 266 B Error Messages ai 4 ie tae badd eee e Pode ew a eee A 268 C For Users of Other ATLAS Series
210. iffer depending on whether you wish to create a new translation environment or edit one Creating a new translation environment 1 Select Save as 2 Enter a translation environment name in the Environment Name field 3 Click the OK button Save Thesis fe Save az lt lt 1 Click Environment Name works lt ___ __ 2 Enter translation environment name at toe Editing a translation environment 1 Select Save 2 Click the OK button Hints gt Up to 20 translation environments can be created in addition to those provided as standard 6 3 Deleting Translation Environments m i This section describes how to delete created translation environments The 9 translation environments provided with ATLAS cannot be deleted 1 Perform the procedures described in 6 1 Displaying Lists of Translation Environments on page 256 2 Select the name of the translation environment you wish to delete in Translation Environment List and click the Delete button Translation Environment Settings Tranzlation Environment List 1 Select Translation General Environment Thesis Edit Manual l a C e Contract Newspaper Py g azine Entertainment Import 3 Check the message that appears and click the Yes button 4 Click the Close button 208 Chapter 6 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment Settings 6 4 Importing Exporting Translation Environment SSS Y
211. ifies how must should be translated Original text He must meet her tomorrow Setting Translated text mit PRA RAICSHRMINIFGYEA TEITMILEY EA wit BRA AICSpHAIHIERYU EA lk HA BAILSSAE CT DO Y ECA Wit HEA RAIER IBV HVYECA 211 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques 2 MUST BE Specifies how must be should be translated Original text She must be sick GEARTH SIME JEE TEWHYECA RAIA CH OIE HVYVECKA CHITNMIFSEZY EKA RASA CEITMILEY ECA E Brackets 1 2 212 Control Non Translation Brackets Sets symbols used to mark sections in the original text for controlling or for non translation to either of the following sets of brackets or J lt gt or ATLAS translates the original by handling ranges enclosed in the specified brackets as controlling or non translation sections For details please refer to Selecting a Text String as a Translation Unit Insert Control Brackets in Introduction on page 12 and Selecting a Non Translation Text String Insert Non Translation Brackets in Introduction on page 14 Spelling Check Mark Brackets Sets the marks to be used for executing spelling check on the original text to either of the following sets of brackets lt gt or J With the Spelling Check command selected ATLAS checks for misspelled words and words not included in dictionaries and then displays those
212. ing 4 Replace the text string Replace Original text T Click here to search and replace a string y one by one Find what my Find N y Replace with HEt Click here to search and replace all strings automatically Cancel Match case __ Cancel Hints gt A text string is searched for and replaced in an upward or downward direction from the cursor position To search all the cells efficiently jump to the beginning or end of the cell and start searching gt You can change the cell to search by clicking an Original text or Translated text cell when searching gt Click the Undo button on the toolbar to cancel the most recent action and return to the previous state 71 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 2 15 Selecting a Translated Word Used for Further Translation Change Word 12 If the translated text has an inappropriate word you can change it to another one When you specify a word it is searched for in the Dictionaries Used in Translation the Standard Dictionary Technical Dictionary or User Dictionaries deo gt For a vertical translation file tra you can select this option after re translating the current text 1 Double click the translated word you wish to change or its original word in the Translated text or Original text cell No Original text Translated text _ DRIED AS ae ist FL lt lt DGD ENGA This invention explains an optical switching dev
213. ion click the Translation Memory button lt Translation Memory gt appears in the window For lt Clipboard Translation gt lt Mouse Translation gt lt Automatic Clipboard Translation gt or lt Acrobat Translations it is also possible to display the Translation Memory Another window from the Translation Environment Settings Click the Translation Environment Settings button z and select Another Window under Translation Memory Window in the Translation Environment Settings dialog box amp ATLAS Clipboard n AUTIO a m a a n O A HE 2 This invention describes a multi Co E8A td EEO HAT HR mode optical switching device TS KOM BRADETSAT comprising several regions IVFE FORMSVIRLEITO interfacing with inorganic LiTH LE TF WE Starting from Mail Translation During Mail Translation Click the Search for similar sentences in Translation Memory button on the Mail Translation Toolbar The Translation Memory Another window appears H Translate Auto WWE Edite E D Settings amp Hep Eg exit WE Starting from Office Translation 184 In Word click the Step Translation button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar The ATLAS Step Translation window appears The Translation Memory In the window appears when you click the Translation Memory button Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory 10 3 Working with the Translation Memory Window E Types of translation memory display
214. ion Retry translation If the second trial also fails exit ATLAS once and restart it If restarting ATLAS cannot correct this situation it may be due to errors in the translation environment Reinstall ATLAS xlpueddy ATLAS individual information file may be deleted or cannot be accessed Do you want to re setup Meaning Settings required for operation have been deleted Do you want to restore them Cause In an environment where your PC is jointly used by others ATLAS has been reinstalled or deleted mistakenly by one of them Action Click the Yes button to restore the environment to enable ATLAS again Or click the No button to exit the program Hints gt If an error other than described in this section occurs retry translation If a second trial also fails terminate ATLAS once and then restart it If restarting ATLAS does not correct this situation it may be due to errors in the translation environment Reinstall ATLAS Server Busy This action cannot be completed because the other program is busy Choose Switch to to activate the busy program and correct the problem Meaning The Translation Editor and the Text Alignment Support Tool take some time to read Office documents Action Wait awhile before clicking the Retry button 269 Appendix Not enough memory Because there are too many translation memory items please remove the translation memory dictionary not in use from the list of Dictionari
215. ion is not available when a vertical translation file tra is opened in the Translation Editor If the text is re translated this function becomes available If the corresponding word is not found or if you have reentered the original or translated text after translation the word correspondence may be lost The following sections are not highlighted e Inflection of Japanese verbs and adjectives e English idioms e Inflection of English words during Japanese to English translation e English irregular verbs during Japanese to English translation e Fixed part in translation memory with variables Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor 2 6 Checking the Translation Results Confirmation Translation You can retranslate the translated text back to the original language for confirmation 1 Select the translated text you wish to check Original text Translated text CARRIED RCSA T SL lt Dp eo Tal This invention explains an optical switching device of the c ee Fansite by ess BS COL VC ERBA multimode that comprises some areas connected withan inorga nic semiconductor SEF iL KONN R Ct Brat ORRICBAT Each mode generates the positron and photocurrent in imal E sete BESET some areas corresponding to the control signal concerning wavelength with different light Po 8E a an CS SpRaleESOE hotocurrent by each mode o ngnaly ac EDE transmission of the high frequency djusts the ontrol signal
216. ionary Management is not installed in the Standard installation of ATLAS V14 Use the following procedure to install Server Dictionary Management 1 Click the Start button and select Control Panel or select Control Panel from the Settings menu 2 Double click the Add Remove Programs or Add or Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel window For Windows Vista Click the link for Uninstall or Change a Program default setting Double click the Programs and Features icon in classic view Select ATLAS Translation Standard V14 0 from the list and click the Change button Click the Next button in the screen that appears Click Modify in the Program Maintenance window and click the Next button Click Server Dictionary Management in the Custom Setup window select This feature will be installed on local hard drive and click the Next button 7 Follow the instructions in the messages that appear to continue installation gt If you have changed the password using the Administration Tool of Translation Server you must also change the Password in the ATLAS Configure Server Connection dialog box oO OAO 1 Click the Server button in the Main Window and select Configure Server Connection ATLAS Main Window rT e YQ y S amp E Q Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Configure server connection for server translation F Dicti
217. ionary sssini ae a e e EAE 122 9 Using the Common DICHOnary seseris 157 10 Using the Translation Memory ccccccccseeccceececeeeeeseeeeceeeeseeeesaueeesaes 174 1 Basic ATLAS Functions This section describes the flow of translation work using translation memory which allows you to use ATLAS more effectively 1 1 Flow of Automatic Translation 40 Translation by ATLAS can be divided into the following four basic steps Preparing the source text ATLAS translates electronic sentence data from the source language into the target language Create the source text Read printed text using a scanner Prepare already by entering data in and convert it into character data existing text your PC using OCR software Pre editing Before starting translation review and pre edit the source text This step involves writing original text that is optimized for translation Pre editing is an effective way to boost translation quality Pre editing includes Defining the separation between sentences Re writing complicated sentences into plain sentences Dividing long sentences into shorter sentences Correcting typos and syntax errors Translation ATLAS translates the source text into the target language ATLAS has the following functions Translation of English text into Japanese text and vice versa Translation Editor Clipboard Translation Web Translation functions and Application Translation Use
218. ionlt N 4 sentence MBER transhateoetTorclt CHS Bahia Root PLAN Fujitsu rs the new product to the United States 5 6 1 S identifies a missing subject in the original text 2 O identifies a missing object in the original text 3 Outputs between and if its analysis has failed This part may have incomplete translation or incorrect word order i in the translated text 4 If the translation has failed the word by word translation results are displayed 5 identifies a missing verb in the original text 6 When the original text in an Office or PDF document you loaded is separated by a line feed etc a delimiter is displayed at the corresponding location English to Japanese translation Original text Translated text ARB Uy 2 CBT S SR CEEI HEIERI OPN ATK CHOAT PRE STA SARER Pe bd MEE Since it is essential to secure rapid and complete combustion in the cylinder of an internal combustion engine the fuel and air mixture must be thoroughly mixed and further it must be in the correct proportions C for all running condition of the engine LE 5i T V RATAN AEDT DO MEOSIS AItN pi oe aE WEA j HMMM Early last week Taro Hosokawa did just that Taro earh lt O last week fiA Hosokawa a over an eel and sake dinner in a fancy 8 just EELS eelt oH sake B 9 Tokyo restaurant confiding to his dining B dinne S B fancy Ze Tokyo 3 p
219. ironment set for General lt 3 When the file name of the user dictionary to be imported is unknown perform Step 2 below and right click the dictionary to be imported in Available Dictionaries or Dictionaries Used in Translation and select Detail Settings from the menu Check folders saved in the detailed information dialog box of the displayed dictionary or Japanese Dictionary File Name and English Dictionary File Name 1 Copy the User Dictionary files dic you want to import onto the hard disk of your PC Copy both the Japanese dictionary example JUW0002 DIC and the English dictionary example EUW0002 DIC 2 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and then select General from Translation Environment Settings 129 Basics 130 3 Click the Import button List of Available Dictionaries Dictionaries Used in Translation E Common0001 User dictionary0001 TD User dictionary0002 Standard Dictionary 60 Business Packet lt lt Don t Use a 61 Manual Packet g 62 Mail Packet Ae ie creer Packet New alls 64 Chat Packet 65 Patent Packet Property 66 Basic Sample 67 Patent Procedure Packet mon Changeable Dictionary 4 Click the Browse button Import User Dictionary LIST oT Importane Victionary 5 Select the folder that contains User Dictionary to be imported and click the OK button Browse for Folder Select folde
220. is activated T Memory amp Replace A Add CREEA ER Me A E RIBS SOIC MOA LL ELE AATAL ABSLCAY ET I think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last week Toolbar A Original Text Input box Displays the original text You can edit directly Property Delete x Pin Match Original Text Translated Text Source a SUH TSI SEIT AA WEL MBIT SttO lt n1 DODE 40 E551 call ELAS EEL EBRAD E lt NIDEMDEBLEL TERE 3 SUDAR BAL TMA FAALELE AHIR A ASS TA EE E KOMOT 10 translation memory was Found Always displays the window in the foreground even when another window is activated x Unpin Automatically closes the window when another window is activated Translation Memory In the window Appears when you click the Translation Memory I think the agreement enco User We would like to thank you It is Suzuki who visited that Could you send the correct Attached to this contract is Translated Text Output box User User User User We sincerely hope that our User Dis plays the It agreed User J Thank you for your kindnes User translated text Each mode generates positr User You can edit directly button Default setting Copy Content of Translated Text Output box Copies translation results for editing Available when the translated text is edited
221. is the same as the environment specified for Mouse Translation 48 Chapter 1 Basic ATLAS Functions Key Type Translation Click the Translation Environment Settings button BE in the Key Type Translation dialog box Letter Mail v Ez Cancel Mail Translation Click the Settings button on the Mail Translation toolbar Mail Translation Settings Translation Environment Name Letter Mail ba Translation Shortcut Key Press Crtl Alt key of your choice to set shortcut key Automatic Translation trit Alt A EJ Translation Ctrl Alt J JE Translation Ctrl Alt E Translation Editor Ctrl Alt Bo O Translation Memory Ctrl Alt Mp Start ATLAS Mail Translation when starting Windows cancel Web Translation Click the ATLAS button on the ATLAS Tool Bar and click ATLAS Toolbar Settings BOR Ca Tranclatinn R 4uto Translation E Original Text ATLAS toolbar settings Overseas useful links Japanese page Internet Update Japanese page ATLAS Product Information Help About ATLAS ATLAS Toolbar Settings Translation Sc ss Environment Nan Translate Automatically when page is displayed Original text display method C Show original text in new window Show original text in this window Same as the Internet Explorer setting Display Button Name Yes C No cancel He 49 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics Application Translatio
222. istance Dictionary Option Help fc a ales l elel a flemm a a e Original text Translated text 1 ilam Suzuki from XYZ Corporation Translation begins When there are translation memory items stored in the translation memory that match the original text in accordance with the translation match value setting they are displayed as follows uo1 0npo1 u 1 100 Match uses translation memory Thank you for your trouble BEEBILE We are considering the plan I sent this morning FEET SIBB OT M o for the outstanding items AMC SS VREBACMWIE What do you think of my plan Toite SRBL ETH 87 I asked her to do too much for this plaf f t COPS V OT MOREY AETA E AEE Will you apologize to her GEHI oA Wik 72 Sato is in charge of additional feature on our E A eget side Please decide on who is to be in chars before DROZ e 1c the next meeting a DMR CICAL 2 Fuzzy Match lt 100 3 No Translation memory uses translation memory items that can be used Automatic Translation 1 100 Match translation memory is used Characters in the translated text cell are displayed in blue and the translated text of the translation memory is displayed Since this is a 100 match the translator should not need to change the translation 2 Fuzzy Match lt 100 match translation memory used Characters in the translated text cell are displayed in orange and text lifted from transl
223. istered correctly 194 Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory 1 Enter the original and translated text in the cells 2 fe BR RE B Al trait Natural protection MEISE CH Sra BA ibs SBP Le 1Britain had enforced the policy and the law to protec 2 REET ASTCOO WEP ARE MITL CS ELIC abundant nature and valuable ruins etc for many BEGAVO SAM its bh tre1o92FOVUAT AA Britain played a leading role by Earth Convention ir OSOHRS eT BES EAS SSE RELE Rio de Janeiro of 1992 where an important agree mei 3 Lo had been signed alte Se MAIL OO RSE SHE A national strategy to promote industrial developmen ae z i Sye S ia 3 controlling environmental pollution and to protect 4 PNP RREVE PRET SIC OD ERRETO TF various living things and forests was shown 2 Select the set of cells you want to add to the translation memory Bw Rat Natural protection REIS EFICHLY BYU gA ihid pura e Britain had enforced the policy and the law to protec freed ScD BRP ABEMITL TELI abundant nature and valuable ruins etc for many BEGAN SA Tehri 992FOVUAT VY 44 Britain played a leading role by Earth Convention it zv IC BES SSeS RLE Rio de Janeiro of 1992 where an important agreemel had been signed mia SAC MAIL OD EHR SHE A national strategy to promote industrial developmen controlling environmental pollution and to protect various living things and forests was shown gt REA REET Silo tO BAH REGETLI
224. iuyoa peoueApY Advanced Techniques 4 The following operations differ depending on what you wish to do Customize Toolbar Available toolbar buttons Current toolbar buttons cose P Separator RE Translation Editor Heset TE Clipboard Translation Help Web Translation Separator _Move Up Move Down ak hice Translating Deleting a Main Window button 1 Select the button to be delete from the Current tool buttons 2 Click the Remove button Adding a button or field to the Main Window 1 Select a button or field from the Available Toolbar buttons 2 Click the Add button 5 Click the Close button Hints gt The order of Main Window buttons and their settings can be returned to the values they had when ATLAS was installed For details refer to Help gt If your PC screen is small and the main window does not fit the screen the Display Button Name is automatically unchecked The button name appears when the cursor is moved to a button in the main window 264 Appendix This part describes additional information you may need Pe EISPOMONOMCUTIKCY Se sxceserdeci eichiw center E E eckicuene 266 B EMO Wie ssa e a aincias inca manaiek Ganon natalensis aun iaamamnanneatmentatenaia ncaa 268 C For Users of Other ATLAS Series Software ccsssccseeecseeeeseetseeeaeeees 271 DUANAN ATLAS airea et We Erte Snot aerate kann eine ene nme serie meta Rte cette tte 273 E Managing Dicti
225. ivated If no toolbar is displayed on the screen activate Mail Translation Switch Translation Direction Search for similar sentences in Switches to Auto EJ JE EJ Top and Translation Memory Bottom Jand JE Top and Bottom in that Starts the Translation Memory order Start Translation Shut Down Mail Translation Translates the mail being displayed Quit the Mail Translation Start Translation Editor Starts the Translation Editor Translation Settings Display Help Changes the translation environment Displays the online help and shortcut key settings for Mail Translation Hints gt When you click the Search Translation Memory button while text is selected in the mail message the translation memory is searched for similar sentences and all matching sentences are displayed in a list gt The translated result is copied to the clipboard You can then paste the text from the clipboard to a text editor such as Notepad save it on disk or print it out 6 3 Setting the Mail Translation shortcut key ESE You can set your software to activate Mail Translation using a shortcut key 1 Click the Translation Settings button EaSettines on the Mail Translation toolbar 110 Chapter 6 Translating Mail Mail Translation 2 Click the input field for Translation Shortcut Key and press lt lt Ctrl gt gt lt lt Alt gt gt key of your choice Mail Translation Settines Translation Environment Name
226. ive Add JE Add for Both Close Help The Add for Both button is not available for the following dialog box Just click the Add JE or Add EJ button e EJ Translation Verb Adjective Adjective Noun Adjective Verb Preposition Particle e JE Translation Verb Adjective Adjective Verb Particle Preposition 5 To add more words click the OK button Japanese word 1ES English word book of account were added to the changeable dictionary in the JE direction To finish addition click the Exit button Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary WE Available Parts of Speech Available parts of speech differ depending on the translation direction Parts of speech available for EJ translation Whenever EJ translation is active you can add words in the combinations of parts of speech as shown below O Add for Both available x Add for Both not available English original Japanese translation Add for Both 1 Adjective 1 Add for Both refers to the function to make a word added for EJ translation available also for JE translation Parts of speech available for JE translation Whenever JE translation is active you can add words in the combinations of parts of soeech as shown below O Add for Both available A Add for Both available except for a derived word x Add for Both not available Japanese original English translation Add for both E 21 Noon Adjective Adjective
227. l Help Deleting schedules 1 Click the Server button in the Main Window and select Dictionary Management V ATLAS Main Window P A gS w g Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment F Dictionary Management Al Configure Server Connection Help Manipulate dictionary on server or client 2 Click the Acquire List button in the ATLAS Dictionary Management dialog box 286 Chapter E Managing Dictionaries on Translation Server 3 Click the Set Schedule button in ATLAS Dictionary Management dialog box gt ATLAS Dictionary Management Server List of Server Dictionary Type Modified Acquire List Standard Dictionary Standard Dictionary 05 10 20 Coico EEEE Technical Dictionary 04 25 201 0RR ETF Technical Dictionary 04 29 20 O3AFE RAH Technical Dictionary 04 25 20 ALLL 04H Technical Dictionary 04 25 2201 Delete fal ng i Tachninal Dictionar n4 2q onr ee i x Log Viewer All Dictionaries 30 Basic Dictionary 1 Technical Dictionaries 25 User Dictionaries 4 Acquire List of Server Dictionaries Automatically Next Time Download N Working Area Client 4 Remove the check mark from Set schedule and click the OK button 1 Remove the check Schedule e 2 Click 28 xlpueddy Appendix E Confirming Dictionary Synchronization Results Log Viewer When Dictionary
228. l a program default Double click the Programs and Features icon classic view 3 Select ATLAS Translation Standard V14 0 from the list box then click Change Remove or the Remove button 4 Click the Next button in the screen that appears 5 Click Change in the repair screen and click the Next button 6 In the Custom Setup screen select I This feature will not be available from the button to the left of lt Web Translation Internet Explorer gt Click the Next button 7 Follow the on screen instructions to uninstall lt Web Translation Internet Explorer gt gt When EJ Top and Bottom or JE Top and Bottom is specified for the Translation Direction the original and translation are displayed top and bottom gt When the ATLAS Tool Bar is hidden use the following operation to move 1 Select Toolbars from the Tools button click Lock the Toolbars and uncheck the box For Internet Explorer 6 select View and Toolbars then uncheck Lock the Toolbars 2 Move the mouse cursor to the upper left end of the tool bar and drag and drop while the mouse cursor is in Status x Ei PA i Search ix a A P Search ser w Standard Buttons Go Address Bar Transl w Go emas Cg Links w ATLAS Toolbar w Adobe POF ck the Toolbars Customize 105 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 5 2 Displaying the Original Text You can change the way original text is displayed when you click t
229. led list when you want to check in which dictionary the translation memory items are stored or the match value UI Translation Me mory Edit wiew Tool Help ES E ES f Fe 2 amp AUTO We would like to accept your proposal 62h We would like to accept your proposal We would like to link your site to ours ST4tio A eared CL Wore iol hil ao BACK FOR MW Al we would like to accept your proposal Dri Gites Gage ATT es ec BACK FOR Ww 5 Check the selected translation memory item and edit as needed When confirming the correspondence between original and translated words Use the same procedure as in Translation Editor For details on operation refer to page 176 When reflecting the translation result shown in the list into your mail message Use the same procedure as in Translation Editor For details on operation refer to page 177 When selecting a translation from the automatic translation area Use the same procedure as in Translation Editor For details on operation refer to page 177 When editing an original text and re searching translation memory Use the same procedure as in Translation Editor For details on operation refer to page 177 180 Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory When editing translation memory items and reflecting them in your mail message 1 Select the translation memory you want to edit from the list and click the Edit and send to Editor button 1 2 Edit the
230. lick the Settings button The setting becomes effective the next time you boot Windows 111 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg 7 Quick ATLAS Basics This chapter describes how to use Quick ATLAS which gives you quick access to ATLAS functions and also explains easier methods for using Mouse Translation Key Type Translation and Automatic Clipboard Translation 7 1 Using the Quick ATLAS icon When you click the Quick ATLAS button in the Main Window the Quick ATLAS icon appears on the task tray and Quick ATLAS starts SS ATLAS Main Window e 2 9 e 86 9A E Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Click on an icon to start processing PC screen Quick ATLAS icon You can use the Quick ATLAS icon to perform the following operations Double click v Mouse Translation Quickly start Mouse Translation p Gutomatic Clipboard Translation Right click key Type Translation Switch automatic Clipboard Translation ON OFF ATLAS Meru Start Key Type Translation E Ophis Quickly access ATLAS commands Help Startup Guide Configure Quick ATLAS environment ens E T shut Down Quick ATLAS TAa Hints gt You can set Quick ATLAS to start automatically when you boot up Windows For details refer to 7 6 Automatically Starting Quick ATLAS on page 121 gt Alterna
231. licking the OK button men tee 2 3 Appendix D 2 Uninstalling ATLAS This function allows you to remove the ATLAS program from your hard disk The User Dictionaries are not deleted even if ATLAS is uninstalled Before uninstalling ATLAS log into the system with a user ID with administrator status 1 Click the Start button and select Control Panel or select Control Panel from the Settings menu 2 Double click the Add Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel window For Windows Vista e Click the link for Uninstall or Change a Program default setting e Double click the Programs and Features icon in classic view 3 Select ATLAS Translation Standard V14 0 from the list then click Uninstall Change or Repair Add or Remove Programs Si Currently installed programs Bi Suna BPN rn Change or Remove BB adobe Reader 8 1 0 Size 86 50MB Programs V ATLAS Translation Standard 14 0 Size 571 00MB Used rarel re 4 To change this program or remove it from your computer click Change or Remove Changi Programs LiveUpdate 2 6 Symantec Corporation Click here for support information CAE S ik Ca Microsoft Office Enterprise 2007 621 00MB Aiara Ss Symantec Antivirus 89 26MB Windows at Components i5 Virtual Machine Additions 0 90MB jB Windows Installer 3 1 KB893803 amp Windows Internet Explorer 7 Set Program Access and Defaults 2 57MB
232. liptbard Translation To Memory AReplace a dd Match Original Text EDE to the translation memory The composition vith a high n feds is selected carefully by the business youth Gampositifn nou and ie cost performance are achieved aN Pe Fo Translated Text 22 HE ToN PET 16 AD TT d e 16 e TR Dee gy CHS et oy Lon Jie e CB eget D translation memory was found Im not trying to k ep them fr The abuse of drug iS social Multiple hybrid op ical device These devices ca also perto However the thet and the s Match Value Property button Displays the ratio of words The Translation Memory matched to the translation memory Properties dialog box appears 190 SOUrCE User d User d User d User d User d Delete button Deletes selected translation memory data from the translation memory Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory Translation Memory Properties dialog box Store Memory button You can change translated text and register them in the translation memory Translation Memory Properties Match Value 100 Source Dict User dictionary0001 Changeable Dict User dictionary0001 Original 2 li XYZD HARE PLET w A Q O d2 alata Iam Suzuki of the XYZ Co 4 lt C v 5 Ko Replace Add Store Memory Close Help gt aay 4 Ty Replace button Add button n Replaces with selected translated text Adds s
233. ls please refer to 2 9 Checking Spelling Errors Spelling Check in Basics on page 64 lt 2I ___ __ The same type of brackets cannot be set for Control Non Translation Brackets and Spelling Check Mark Brackets 2 Adding Words ATLAS allows batch addition of words to a user dictionary and merging of words stored in multiple user dictionaries into one dictionary 2 1 Available Combinations of Parts of Speech SC The contents of an add all text file created with the following combinations of parts of speech can be added to a User Dictionary Hints gt Samples of add all text files Jewdadd txt and Ejwdadd txt are saved in the Sample folder of ATLAS E Combinations for JE J original E derived word E derived word Specified format F nee Verb Verb Noun a Eh za Adjective Noun n MAEA Verb Adverb H A al Baal Adverb Adweb _ mmm wooo f p e Le Prepositon f TB 1 Formats of combinations of parts of speech to be entered in an add all text file 2 For Noun Noun the format need not be specified E Combinations for EJ J translation E original Specified format F1 AE A Verb Verb Eh 5a Sh eal Adjective KAH By Adjective Adjective KAR MAE aun Zl eB Verb Bh an H ZS al E Ta DAMER Formats of combinations of parts of speech to be entered in an add all text file 2 For Noun Noun the format need not be specified
234. ls refer to 8 4 Setting Changeable Dictionary on page 133 158 Chapter 9 Using the Common Dictionary lt 2 ____ When the members of a group share common dictionaries follow these guidelines to obtain consistent translation results m Set the same dictionaries to be used for translation If different dictionaries are used for translation the translation results may differ Use the Use gt gt or lt lt Don t Use button under the Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box to set the dictionaries you want to use m Use the same priority order of the dictionaries used for translation Even though the same dictionaries are used assigning different priority may result in different translation results Use the A or V button under the Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box to make the dictionary priority the same The priority of dictionaries are determined by type as shown below User Dictionary Common Technical Dictionary Common Dictionary gt Dictionary Green icon I Pink icon High priority Medium priority Low priority For that reason when a downloaded common dictionary i Pink icon and user dictionary are used for translation the user dictionary is given priority When an administrator s common dictionary Green icon and user dictionary are used for translation the administrator s common dictionary 2 Gree
235. ly gt lt lonesomely gt Adverb Adverb Format ala Bllza A Japanese adverb A English adverb A lt Position of adverb gt Position of adverb Contents of entry lt 4 EA 1 gt lt mBA2 gt lt tBA3 gt lt iMBmA4 gt Select one of the following numbers to specify the position of the adverb At the beginning of sentence 1 Ex Slowly he went to Tokyo Before verbsssssssrrererssesereeee 2 Ex He slowly went to Tokyo After verp erennere teetter erste 3 Ex He went slowly to Tokyo At the end of sentence 4 Ex He went to Tokyo slowly When nothing is specified After verb is automatically selected Sample gt al g EHI successfully lt E 3 gt 223 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques Unit Unit 224 Format 54 47 Hi fiz A Japanese unit A English unit A English plural form number A lt Position of unit gt A lt English plural form gt English plural form number For English plural form refer to Plural form number table in Basics on page 148 Position of unit Contents of entry lt w EA gt lt BAR gt Specify whether the English unit is to be put before or after the number Ex Before number 1 After number 1 dollar English plural form Contents of entry lt 22 A English plural form gt Enter an English plural form when 9 is specified
236. ly but saving their correspondence data below lt 2 _ f you select Replace Using Original for translation the translated document file inherits the paragraph and other format data of the original document file 92 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation Displaying original and translated text separately but saving their correspondence data By selecting the output destination for the translation to a separate document and saving both the original and translated documents the correspondence data that recognizes the Japanese English pairs is also saved After the saved original document is opened perform any of the following operations to open the corresponding translated document automatically Perform translation again The translation is output to the corresponding translated document Click the Align Right and Left or Align Top and Bottom on the ATLAS tab or ATLAS toolbar 1 Select the ATLAS tab and select Output Destination Output to Another Document ef ee Uw Environment General Translate Translate Translation Step I 7 Add Find Delete ZA 7 All Selected Editor Translation Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help For versions prior to and including Word 2003 1 Click the Environment Settings button on the ATLAS toolbar 2 In the Environment Settings d
237. ly starting Quick ATLAS You can configure your system to start up Quick ATLAS each time you boot Windows For details refer to 7 6 Automatically Starting Quick ATLAS on page 121 7 2 Clicking to Translate Mouse Translation E EE Mouse Translation allows you to translate sentences you want to translate by simply clicking the target sentence while holding down a key The sentence before and after the cursor is translated and the result is displayed 1 Click the Quick ATLAS button in the Main Window E Main Window Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Glick on an icon to start processing The Quick ATLAS icon is displayed on the task tray and Quick ATLAS starts 113 Basics 2 While holding down the lt lt Alt gt gt key click the mouse on the sentence you want to translate You can click any location as long as it is within the first line of the text you want to translate sample txt Notepad Seles File Edit Format view Help THIS Invent a e comprising Seral regions interfacing with inorganic semiconductors q device Click the first line of the text you want to translate while holding down the lt lt Alt gt gt key ATLAS Mouse Translation Gm VoOVR nF EL This invention describes a multi mode optical switching device comprising several regions interfacing with inorganic semiconductors Hints gt Ifthe content displayed in the Mouse Transl
238. make it impossible to export the original text correctly without garbling the characters This makes it difficult for ATLAS to correctly assess the translation direction and produce a good translation e When characters are not correctly imported edit characters directly in the Acrobat Translation dialog box and click the Start Translation button to translate the text again e When the translation direction is not correctly assessed click the button to change the translation direction to the button EJ or JE This change can be made when the Acrobat Translation dialog box is displayed When this dialog box is closed this returns to Avie we gt You can search and register translation memory items while using Acrobat When you use Acrobat you can display the Translation Memory window by clicking the Translation Memory button 3 from the toolbar in the Acrobat Translation dialog box Using this dialog box you can search the translation memory or add items to the translation memory gt For details on the Acrobat Translation dialog box refer to Help Click the Help button to open the Help file 86 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation E Acrobat Translation dialog box You can customize the layout of the Acrobat Translation dialog box such as by switching how the source and translation boxes are aligned horizontally or vertically and changing the display font size
239. manage ATLAS dictionaries Make one schedule setting and do not change this setting during daily update operations Setting schedules 1 Click the Server button in the Main Window and select Dictionary Management ATLAS Main Window yr e SH amp Y H Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Manipulate dictionary on server or client Ri Dictionary Management A Configure Server Connection 2 Click the Acquire List button in the ATLAS Dictionary Management dialog box 285 Appendix 3 Click the Set Schedule button in ATLAS Dictionary Management dialog box 2 ATLAS Dictionary Management Server List of Server Dictionary Type Modified Acquire List Standard Dictionary Standard Dictionary 05 10 20 Tales eae 01 AFR eLse Technical Dictionary 04 25 201 0RR ET Technical Dictionary 04 29 201 Set Schedule 038 RFA Technical Dictionary 04 25 20 D4 AeA Technical Dictionary 04 25 201 Delete fal nmi Ete Tanhninal Niekanan 14 90 90 a P Log Viewer All Dictionaries 30 Basic Dictionary 1 Technical Dictionaries 25 User Dictionaries 4 Acquire List of Server Dictionaries Automatically Next Time Download late N Working Area Client 4 Change the schedule as necessary and click the OK button Schedule Schedule C Every day Every week H FE i E jz Every month fi lt day Time 00 00 Cance
240. mation message appears asking whether to open the reflected document 5 Click Yes The document in which the translated text is reflected opens The text in which translation is reflected Wature caomsoervation Site ict Y BARS fib SIRES eT Sedo HEIE ARIST ESET E FR PS et eS ee te 1990 Re ae ae HO eT CH Select Display original document from the File menu to view the original source document as it was before it was loaded into the Translation Editor Q Checking the source document Tips X 2 4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8 20 22 24 2 28 30 32 34 3 3 amp W 5 e RELRACbieY SPER MBH SAMUS RATED MORE ARS TST ee BBR VLMa Hh Hh 1999 1 AS oa A eT T Hh Displaying the document that reflects translated text before saving it Select Display reflected document from the File menu The document in which the translated text is reflected opens You can check the reflection results without saving the document 59 60 Basics 2 5 Checking a Translated Word es You can check the translation of any word in the following way 1 Double click a word you wish to check within the Translated text or Original text cell Original text CORA SO ESE HAT Sl lt M De DEI SIL pe OEE ie ODL TALET Translated text o g g p A This invention explains an optical switching device of the multimode that comprises some areas E connected with an inorganic Simes ea Double click either one eo This funct
241. mber A Meaning number A lt English plural form gt A lt English adjective gt English plural form number For English plural form number refer to Plural form number table in Basics on page 148 Meaning number For Meaning number refer to Noun meaning number in Basics on page 147 English plural form Contents of entry lt 2 A English plural form gt Enter an English plural form when 9 is specified as the English plural form number irregular noun 220 Chapter 2 Adding Words English adjective Contents of entry lt EZERA Adjective number A English adjective gt Required when a Japanese noun may be translated as an English adjective The adjective numbers are as follows 1 Before MJ Adjective e g amp Oia5 metallic tool 2 Before Noun gt Adjective e g amp 3t3 metallic element 3 Adjective in both of the above cases Sample gt ij Ai AN AY VEIL space shuttle 0 01 gt Z Z FHOF space chid 9 13 lt space children gt gt 4inl 4in A moon 0 01 lt 8 1 lunar gt Verb Verb Noun Format 4a 7 A Japanese verb A English verb A lt English verb pattern gt A lt Japanese verb form gt A lt Objective particle gt A lt English form gt A lt English Noun gt A lt English plural form gt 7 English verb pattern Contents of entry lt X AEBE gt lt X Ait gt lt KHRABIH gt For the English ve
242. meleie Cut optical interfaces by using light impulses ies gt gates used in electronic Pg Delete in 5 These devices cana ENEI ER ERSEN 1 optical interfaces between photoelectr You can also translate the selected area by clicking the Selected Area Translation button l on the tool bar Selecting a Character String or a Cell E Selecting a character string Select the character string or strings you wish to translate by dragging the mouse by holding down the mouse left button Mo Original text Mae at ae ee ees optical 1 switching device comprising several regions interfacing with inorganic semiconductors 10 Introduction WE Selecting a cell The following explains how to select a text area to edit by cells Original text cell Selects all original text CORBA RO FRE RS Sl ON wee ates oot POE TR lc UY CaneALET Beene SSL Caste stein seat FFI KODO ROLO E ot BR Sentence number button Tran lated teri cal Translated text button Selects all translated text Translated text This invention explains an optical switching device of a multi mode which comprises some areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor DOA LRRD SSIS AL KD Dine TIEI Sat OF TREE lc DLV CSREABLET Each mode generates the positron and photocurrent in some areas corresponding to the control signal concerning wavelength with different light Original text Selects
243. ments eo E Cancel Alignment of Less Than 100 Solid Line E This invention des mm EEA E O E a F multi mode optic Alien Automatically lt Da path amp DET S j The dotted line is replaced by a solid line From the File menu select Store Translation Memory ps Text Alignment Support Tool C Program Filest ATLAS V1I3 Sample Ejsamp txt SEE wie Edit Settings Alignment Help al gt Ok H Ox General gt BE CORBA BROS as ie DOL DO OTR amp DIET O VIL FE FORFUBRRB CLT BORLET BE FIL lt DMO TBI CIO Save As Store Translation Memory S Exit The aligned text is stored as translation memory data in translation memory Select the dictionary in which you want to store the translation memory data Store Translation Memory Dictionary User dictionary0001 T ENG This invention describes a multi mode pire switching device comprising several A a interfacing with inorganic semicond DK ALOT RETO ONDE DIEGO TSE ROS WNEEECOOTi HEALS ENG Each mode generates positrons and a Pe in several regions in response to control signals of different wavelengths of ligh JPNSE FILE DANO PT JD Bia eR R CRSS SHANE SIH LTRREF CHBRAEBECCSTT ENG The photocurrent in each mode independently modulate the transmission of the high frequency control signals JNE RE S BTR CELE RIMES Omn l Skip first line Chose He Click the Add All button Original and translated tex
244. mission of the high frequency control signals Translation begins You can also translate one cell by clicking the Translate Single Sentence button W on the tool bar or by selecting Translate Single Sentence from the right click menu Translation by Comparing Original and Translated Text Translation Editor E Translating selected area Selected Area Translation 1 Select the character strings in the cell or the Sentence Number button you wish to translate You can select multiple cells located in separate places by clicking the Sentence Number button while holding down the lt lt Ctrl gt gt key Each mode generates positrons and a lt _ lt Highlight by dragging 2 photocurrent in several regions in response to Move while pressing the left button control signals of different wavelengths of light uo1 0npo1 u Each mode generates positrons and a photocurrent in several regions in response to control signals of diferent wavelengths of light Click sentence number button while pressing lt lt Ctrl gt gt key The photocurrent in each mode independently modulate the transmission of the high frequency control signals electronic systems Each mode generates positrons and a photocurrent in several regions in response to control ight f Add Word a 9 The photocurrent in Find Delete Word the transmission of the high frequency contr aMultiple sVisige
245. n Word Excel PowerPoint Select from the pull down menu Environment Translation Environment Name in the Environment Settings on the ATLAS tab ATLAS Q i g ALTO a Ei N Output Destination Replace Using Original Sia Environment General Translate Translate Translation Step Add Find Delete ip ATLAS All Selected Editor Translation vy Vetan seturiys Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help For Word 2007 For Word 2003 Excel 2003 and PowerPoint 2003 click the Environment Settings button on the ATLAS toolbar LEEI ESF Urei i EE O T Riase Environment Settings Output Settings Translation Settings Environment Settings Terefe AUTO Translation Direction AUTO Direction Translation General Daorn Environment General i ame Environment ame OK Cancel Help OK Cancel Help For Word 2003 For Excel 2003 Acrobat Select Translation Environment Settings from ATLAS in the menu bar Translation pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional File Edit View Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window ysis C E wW wW ag Layout Translation Selection Translation The h AE n Er 74 0 e Th G 74 9 r l 1 ui Page Translation S es ay ranclakinn Feitar PA Create PDF cih Combine Files t Export v p Lw amp Comment Translation Envir
246. n icon can be set to higher priority than the user dictionary because the priority is the same E Set the same translation style etc Different settings could result in different translation results As needed unify the English to Japanese Japanese to English Translation Memory tab setting in the Detail Settings dialog box It is helpful to import and or export a translation environment For details refer to 6 4 Importing Exporting Translation Environment in Advanced Techniques on page 259 Hints gt Only one Common Folder can be set gt There is no limit on the number of common dictionaries that can be saved in the Common Folder However when there are many common dictionaries in the Common Folder upload and download of common dictionaries take time gt By adding access restrictions to the Common Folder you can restrict access to common dictionaries to certain network users For that reason we recommend that the sharing and security functions be used to control access to the Common Folder e g Set the properties of the common settings for the folder as follows Common dictionary administrator Full Control or Change Common dictionary user Read 159 SVILV Bulsn L solseg Basics 9 2 Setting a Common Folder for the Common Dictionary To make a common dictionary available the administrator of the common dictionary must create a Common Folder that all users in the network can look up In addition use
247. nal text is replaced by the translated text in PowerPoint The translated text cannot be placed on the clipboard or other PowerPoint slides 98 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation ATLAS Tab and ATLAS Toolbar ATLAS Tab for PowerPoint 2007 a All Sentence Translation Translates the entire presentation at once f Find Delete Word Searches for words in a translation dictionary Lets you change the priority of a translation and delete words saved to a user dictionary b Selected Sentence e Add Word Translation Translates the selected text Adds words to a user dictionary g ATLAS Help Displays the help menu for application translation Direction AUTO e Translate Translate Translation E Environment General Detail Settings U amp Add Find Delete ATLAS All Selected Editor Word Word Help a SD d c Translation Editor Translation Direction h Cancel Opens the entire Specifies the input and output language Quits the document or Select from AUTO EJ and JE current selected text in translation Translation Editor Translation Environment Select the translation environment settings best suited for your document Detail Settings Create a new translation environment or change the settings ATLAS Toolbar for PowerPoint 2003 a All Sentence Translation b Selected Sentence Translation c Translation Editor RE my TROE h Quit Translating e Add
248. nary when quitting ATLAS e Solution Display the Common Dictionary dialog box and specify Do not upload when ATLAS quits in the Upload Method box You do not want to display the upload result dialog box e Solution Display the Common Dictionary dialog box and specify Do not show results of processing in the Show results of processing box Uploading of common dictionary fails e Cause There are the following discrepancies between the common dictionaries in the Common Folder and common dictionaries user dictionaries in user s PC There is a dictionary that has the same dictionary name but has different file name There is a dictionary that has the same file name but has different dictionary name There is a dictionary that has different administrator This may happen when you change the Common Folder or use Windows Explorer to copy a common dictionary to the Common Folder With ATLAS users cannot have dictionaries with the same dictionary name file name in their PC or Common Folder e Solution The administrator who failed to upload should take corrective measures as described below 1 Convert the source common dictionary the upload of which has failed to a user dictionary and then convert it to a common dictionary again 2 Upload the common dictionary created by the conversion The uploaded common dictionary can now be used as a new common dictionary lf there is an unnecessary common dictionary in the common
249. nce Translation environment Translates the entire original text Translate Single Sentence or Selected Area Translation Translates the selected area of text You can set up a unique translation environment when using the Translation Editor For details refer to 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Tips Environment on page 47 Opening Multiple Translation Editor Windows Multiple Translation Editor windows can be opened at one time You can display original text in different translation directions simultaneously and you can translate text in multiple Translation Editor windows simultaneously Select the New button D or Open button ge Translating with Translation Memory You can perform translation with the Translation Editor and Translation Memory windows aligned horizontally or vertically For details refer to Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory on page 174 Q Setting the Translation Environment 54 Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor WE Various symbols in translated text When ATLAS translates a text various symbols may be inserted into the translated text The following explains these codes Japanese to English translation Original text Translated text i OROLDA A S describes 4 0 as follows i mabe bh 7 FBS 70 A BEBE Prefectural hospital shelter of 70 complaint a patients Ld 3 ATORRA ADERAT O CHS ERE now HERHER machine translat
250. nce into a simpler one Ex x ARILLA ONTE NMEEDCST This book is the one described about the grammar O ILAT Tihs NTUE This book is described about the grammar Avoiding using duplicate words A sentence containing redundant words or synonyms is translated into awkward English in which redundant words are used repeatedly Action Deleting unnecessary redundant words Ex x mlk ae J F FOR IFI rE RY h BCE DREZEN BENS Equipment such as the copy word processors and the file cabinets are included in the office equipment O SSHAICIC ae J F FO H IP Aer ERYVEREMSEN o The copy the word processor and the file cabinet etc are included in the office equipment Action Deleting unnecessary synonyms Ex x BDAY hILEDEORIARIX REL TS The robot works separately respectively O ARY h Iki EEL TLS The robot works separately 247 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques Avoiding long modifiers In Japanese a modificand is placed after a modifier and long modifying expressions or parallel modifiers make it difficult to identify the modificand In English on the other hand relative pronouns are used to indicate long modifying phrases If original text is difficult to interpret however its translation will also be difficult Action Avoiding consecutive modifiers Dividing a sentence to clarify modification Ex x RAL ZE ER BAL HBOUIEPMBUGAY TTY ACK Titec 6 Mal IT
251. nd click the OK button Ceo gt Users of a common dictionary cannot set the common dictionary to be changeable dictionary The administrator of the common dictionary can set the common dictionary to be changeable dictionary 9 5 Changing the Common Dictionary Administrator D E l When you create a common dictionary the following two items are recorded in the common dictionary file Computer name and computer s user name To change the above two administrator information items the original administrator of the common dictionary clears the administrator information and then the new administrator of the common dictionary obtains the administrator rights This section explains two ways to change Administrator of the common dictionary Clear administrator rights performed by the original administrator Obtain administrator rights performed by a new administrator Ceo gt The user is identified as the administrator when both the user name and computer name coincide Even if the user name coincides the user is not identified as the administrator if using the common dictionary with a different computer name E Clearing administrator rights performed by the original administrator This section explains how the original administrator clears the administrator rights for a common dictionary If circumstances prevent the original administrator from performing the operation another person should clear the administrato
252. nd typos in the original text spell check and to divide sentences into independent clauses with meaning sentence division Functions of ATLAS Translation Environment Settings You can set dictionaries used and translation styles as the translation environment for each type of document to be translated Thesis Letter Mail Contract etc to obtain better translations Reading Option When Microsoft Agent is installed the ATLAS speech function can read text aloud during Web Translation Translation Editor or other ATLAS functions Internet Update Internet Update allows you to download the latest user dictionaries that can be used with ATLAS and product plug ins from the ATLAS Internet Update Web page and integrate them with your existing ATLAS environment to further improve your translation results Collaboration with ATLAS Translation Server If you install the ATLAS Translation Server on a server machine its translation engine can be used for translation This enables dictionaries to be shared resulting in uniform translation quality UOIJONPOUUy Starting ATLAS You can start up ATLAS from the Start menu 1 Click the Start button then select Programs All Programs ATLAS V14 0 and ATLAS fay ATLAS 14 0 fin Server Dictionary Management ames fin Support fim Microsoft Office fm Tool m Startup E Internet Explorer Clipboard Translation we msn bg Mail Translation E Outlook Ex
253. ne break codes it is always delimited regardless of the How to recognize sentence end settings Word wrapped option for English to Japanese translation only If you have set the How to recognize sentence end option to Automatic recognition of sentence end you can use the line break code of each sentence as follows Yes Word doesn t contain the line feed ATLAS assumes that the word before the line feed code is not part of the word after the line feed code and inserts a space between those words No Word contains the line feed ATLAS assumes that the word before the line feed code is part of the word after the line feed code and concatenates those words Ex Original The computer which understood the natural language lt output the voice indicates a line break code Yes Word doesn t contain the line feed The computer which understood the natural language output the voice No Word contains the line feed The computer which understood the natural languageoutput the voice 261 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques WE Setting the translation unit Translation Unit The Translation Unit option translates the original text as a single sentence or translates only the meaningful words of the original text Select Sentence to translate the text as a sentence or select Word to translate meaningful words only Sentence transla
254. ne yo Saree ee eee S 206 SUDICC hence tite esuede a a 214 SUDICCE Y OW ar aa yee hele A 206 Symbols Translated Text 55 T Technical Dictionary 122 TENSE 2 c4 au te cade aT weeks eae 252 255 Text Alignment Support Tool 199 MONE TWO ts arent acd tetas ee eae rah ee dy aie e 58 Translate All Sentence 56 Translate Selected Area 56 Translate Single Sentence 56 Translate Single Sentence 8 Translation Acrobat Adobe Reader 83 Translation PowerPoint File 98 Translation Word 000000 0 88 Translation Direction 0005 57 Translation Editor 0 5 48 Translation Editor List of shortcut keys 266 Translation Editor Window 53 Translation Environment 47 256 Translation Environment Create Edit 257 Translation Environment Delete 258 Translation Environment Display Lists 256 Translation Environment Import Export 259 Translation Environment Options 261 Translation Environment Settings 3 Translation file 00000005 58 Translation Lock n anaana anana na aa 63 Translation Memory 2 29 174 Translation Memory Delete 198 Translation Memory File Output 154 Translation Memory Window Layout Another window 2 185 Tra
255. ng ATLAS You can uninstall ATLAS if it is no longer required D 1 Uninstalling Application Translation You can delete the Application Translation function from ATLAS o ______ Note the following e To uninstall application translation for Acrobat and Adobe Reader you must login as a user with administrator privileges e To uninstall application translation for Word Excel and PowerPoint you must uninstall separately for each user When upgrading Word Excel or PowerPoint first uninstall or upgrade the corresponding Application Translation for example Word Translation for Word before upgrading the application xlpueddy 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and select Setup Application Translation SS ATLAS Main Window w e G amp FS S B amp B B amp B GB Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Setup translation function into the applications Translation Environment Settings gt Operating Environment Settings amp Setup Application Translation 2 Remove the check mark for the corresponding application and click the OK button lt Setup Application Translation Check the application to be used in Application Translation Remove the check mark when Application Translation is not to be used Word 2007 M Excel 2007 PowerPoint 2007 Acrobat 8 M Adobe Reader 8 Please terminate all the checked applications before c
256. ng for our lt N1 management consulting services gt Thank you very much for the other day AB BVUNESCAWET Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 15 RATE 37 We would like to thank you very much for applying for our lt N1 management consulting services gt Thank you very much for the 33rd extension ARs BR LET Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 4 RATE 25 v BACK FOR W We would like to thank you very much for applying for our lt N1 management consulting services gt WCB ON BIHIA GEA Ic FLAA CCC RULOS gt BACK FOR W Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory Switching the Translation Memory Another window Display When you click the Display Switching button in the toolbar the search result display area and machine translation area display are changed amp Translation Memory Edit View Tool Help BEB es ex E Translation Memory Edit View Tool Help BAS v aHa 2 AUTO We would like to thank you very much for applyii E Translation Memory Edit View Tool Help agaa y se J glx 2 AUTO We would like to thank you very much for applvi K We would like to thank you very much for applying for our lt N1 management consulting services gt Thank you very much for the other day FA HVUMCICAWVET C Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 15 RATE 37 C We would like to thank you very much for applying for
257. ng to get this done v G Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 45 RATE 100 Seccccccsed SV1LV Buisp 4L s seg 6 A And were going to get this done CU AAC BI CNS TIER SDV CT C Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 36 RATE 69 When editing the original text and re search translation memory You can edit the original text displayed in the Translation Memory Search box and click the Search button When editing translation memory items and reflecting them in the Translation Editor 1 Select the translation memory you want to edit from the list and click the Edit and send to Editor button 1 Eft View Tool Help And we re going to get this done And we re going to get this done TLT cht SCS DOU CTT 177 Basics 2 Edit the text in the Edit and send to Editor dialog box The portions where searched text corresponds with the translated text of search results are displayed in pale blue Edit and send to Editor Original And we re going to get this done sentence Translated CUT FAR AIL CNET SC SDHY CT sentence Adds color to corresponding areas of the original and translated sentences Replace Add Close Help 3 To replace the cell in the selected Translator Editor click the Replace button To add the text after the translated text in the selected cell click the Add button If you want to add the edited content to a dictionary as transl
258. ns can be added when translating from English to Japanese and Japanese words and their English translations can be added when translating from Japanese to English This section describes the settings and operation required to add words in both EJ and JE translation Hints gt Adding words requires detailed settings such as selection of parts of speech forms and meaning gt For storing Translation Memory refer to Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory on page 174 lt 3I ______ gt After the Add for Both button is clicked for a word it becomes available for both EJ and JE translation Note that incorrect translation may be generated in the opposite direction if a word having a basic word as its translation is added for both directions e Ex 1 EJ translation After buck is added for both as F JL all F JL s will be translated as buck in JE translation e Ex 2 JE translation After E4 is added for both as house all houses will be translated as B35 in EJ translation You can add multiple words to the dictionary in one operation by listing the word which you want to register in the dictionary by using Excel Tips For details refer to 2 4 Adding Multiple Words at Once from Excel in Advanced Techniques on page 229 Q Adding multiple words at once 136 Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary E Adding a word You can add a word that is not included in the Standard or Technical
259. nslation Editor gt WE Starting from the Translation Editor Right click on a cell of the Translation Editor then select the Translation Memory Display Window command from the pop up menu This opens the Translation Memory Another window y ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 Sample Yakurei tra File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Di Real aS lt ele AUTO S Genera zi Halal el No Original text Translated text 1 Dear Mr Suzukil A E We would like to thank you very Add Word HIO lt N1 FES IT ILRYEDGEAO our lt N1 management consulting Find Delete Word EED AA LALAIFET lt N1 The original and one copy o EDERE Pelet C Vo SE enclosed I think the agreement encompas Paste Eval SHOAL VOCLELIE AETAT SL talked about last week Translate Single Sentence et Ay oe rr Attached to this contract is a c Confirmation Translation LEE E ORAL CAE of A N2 9 Minutes of Understandings whic 183 Basics Hints gt Alternately you can activate Translation Memory Another window by clicking Translation Memory Add Remove from the Assistance menu of the Translation Editor WE Starting from Clipboard Translation Mouse Translation Automatic Clipboard Translation Acrobat Translation Adobe Reader Translation During Clipboard Translation Mouse Translation Automatic Clipboard Translation Acrobat Translation and Adobe Reader Translat
260. nslation Memory Window Layout In the window 5s oes winrar Sanh al OS 190 Translation of Capitalized Words 206 Translation Server 000005 275 Translation Style hee eG ewes we ates 204 Translation Style EJ Translation 205 Translation Style JE Translation 213 Translation Uni ceee 4 42 2 dente de cee g wee we 262 U Uninstall Application Translation 273 Uninstall ATLAS oil eos ote oy 274 Unit Unit Ed we esawe raeg 141 227 Unit Unit WE 22 4 2cdncchhevese des 145 224 Unknown word EJ 000000 243 Unknown word JE 0000 eee 253 Unusable word information File Output 154 Upload Common Dictionary 163 Upload Download Common Dictionary 163 Upper to lowercase conversion 66 User DICHONALY 205 eas Oe eee eee es 122 User Dictionary Adding Words 136 219 User Dictionary Backup 236 User Dictionary Delete 131 User Dictionary Download from Translation Server 281 User Dictionary Download 129 User Dictionary Downloading 129 User Dictionary Extract Data 231 User Dictionary Import 129 User Dictionary Merge Data 232 User Dictionary New Making 127 User Dictionary Reindex 234 User Dictionary Rename 132 User Dictionary Restore 238 Using clear
261. nt Settings The Operating Environment Settings dialog box appears 2 Check the Enable Reading function check box and click the OK button gt The Japanese Engine can only be used when you login as Administrator or as a user with Administrator permissions However in Windows Vista logging in as Administrator gives the same permissions as a standard user so the Japanese reading feature is not available 1 Use Internet Explorer to select the text string you want read aloud 2 Right click the selected text string row and choose Speech by ATLAS from the displayed menu Tht atom Lj Std Copy Select All SZOL aaa Print FH AVY ATLAS Translation Editor A character appears in the window and reads the selected sentence aloud At the same time the sentence being read is displayed in a word balloon Hints gt Right clicking the character and selecting Hide from the displayed pop up menu immediately halts reading gt The Speech Function cannot be used simultaneously in multiple screens gt Follow these procedures to change the speech speed 1 Click the Environment button on the Main Window and select Reading Option The Reading Option dialog box appears 2 Click the Option button The Advanced Character Options dialog box appears 3 Click the Output tab and follow the instructions on the screen to change the speech speed 108 gt 6 Translating Mail mail Translation If you
262. ntains many words or translation memory items update of the dictionary takes time Therefore do not set such a dictionary as the changeable dictionary instead set another dictionary as the changeable dictionary gt We recommend that you classify dictionaries by purpose of use and field to minimize the number of dictionaries used 196 Tips Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory Linking sentences in translation files Text Alignment Support Tool The Text Alignment Support tool can automatically link sentences of original text and translated text stored in different file types such as Word or text files The linked data is stored in translation memory For details refer to 10 6 Using the Text Alignment Support Tool on page 199 Storing TMX format files in translation memory You can use the translation memory conversion tool to convert TMX format files to TRA format ATLAS top and bottom translation format tra and then use Store Translation Memory to batch store the data Click the Start button All Programs Programs ALTAS V14 Tool and Translation Memory Conversion Tool Import Refer to Help for additional information on this process Storing proper nouns and date amp time as variables Store Translation Memory with Variables You can store Translation Memory with variables such as dates numeric values and nouns If original text has a different variable segment than stored translation memory items w
263. nterfacing with inorganic moaALET semiconductors LE KIL I lt DOE CTHO E 2 TORRES ohai pu UCB exe meeis o Each mode generates positrons and a photocurrent in several regions in response to control signals of different wavelengths of light The photocurrent in each mode independently modulate the transmission of the high frequency control signals 4E Ftp DM A JERE EDITE wL E o ETRE HASNT Tb OAK CHL AAT DECEIT BROT y PSB Vapi AICBASCLNICSET Multiple hybrid optical devices can be transformed into optical interfaces by using light impulses in a manner similar to the eee ee Ready A 6LINE lt E Aligned Dotted line Non finalized status alignments between original and translated texts are not finalized O Not aligned Solid line Finalized status alignments between original and translated texts are finalized e To change the target segment Right click W and select Cancel from the displayed menu to change W to LI Next drag LJ to the target segment and perform alignment e To create new alignments Drag O to the target segment and perform alignment 200 Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory From the Alignment menu select Finalize All Alignments Double click W to change dotted lines to solid lines to indicate finalized status pS Text Alignment Support Tool C Program Files ATLAS V13 Sample Ejsamp txt__ SEE File Edit Settings Rita Help Cancel All Align
264. o I think the agreement encompasses everything w 7 gt Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 66 RATE 100 I think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last Week Translation memory search results area oo eieenal l aE yA ae caches e Mame User dictionaryOO01 SCORE 3 RATE 25 i think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last week Automatic Al think the agreement encompasses everything we translation view talked about last week area HD fee EAC SapelbelcigLic ONC amp UR Ce TERRE BACK FORW Translation memory search results area Displays the dictionary name A higher value is indicated when Displays the ratio of words where the translation memory there are a series of words that matched to the translation is stored match in translation memory memory OG te dant GORE N E I think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last Original text used as week the search target I think the agreement encompasses everything we _ ___ original text selected ask at the calling side HSA BAL WCLELIL AE ATD SLTH et Used to reflect the content on the calling side such Original text searched from translation as the Translation Editor or click to select the target memory translation memory you want to edit or delete Hints gt You can set the number of translation memory search results When a search is performed the
265. o align each paragraph you can use this function to do so Tips 1 Click the Both Sides button to change to selected status Fa 2 Click the beginning cell of the original text you want to align and then hold down the lt lt Shift gt gt key and click the last cell Q Aligning paragraphs gvk aia RAT SC Ayy FIL FSO Rwy be ARS Lt ieee v b E cteRLI This invention describes a multi mode optical switching 1 Click the gt lt omprising several regions interfacing with Jinorganic semiconductors beginning cell l Each mode generates positrons and a photocurrent in several regions in response to control signals of different wavelengths of light Muttiple hybrid optical devices can be transformed into An interfaces by using light impulses in a manner 2 Click the last cell E o the electronic gates used in electronic while pressing ystems lt lt Shift gt gt key These devices can also perform as optical switches and Joptical interfaces between photoelectric elements IMC LSE BRESSO 3 Click the beginning cell of ie vsa e you wani to on and hold down the lt lt Shift gt gt key and click the last cell 4 Click the Align Automatically button from the toolbar 202 Advanced Techniques Hints for Achieving Better Translation Results This part describes the basic operation of ATLAS 1 Setting the Translation Style Translation Style
266. oblem When a phrase can be divided in several ways it may not be divided into proper words Ex greta e Proper division i 4H e Division by ATLAS AR fil e Solution Correct it during post editing Ex New system New restrictions Unknown word e Problem A sentence with unknown words may not be translated correctly e Solution Add unknown words to a User Dictionary before translation E Problem of structure analysis Modification e Problem When there are two or more possible modificands the one closest to the modifier is selected as the modificand in principle Ex Original IAF A MMII OTA EREE o Translation Store the data registered in the file e Solution 1 Correct it during post editing Ex Store the registered data in the file 2 Use control brackets to specify modification Ex Original AP AIVIX ERT ATA EREE Translation Store the registered data in the file 203 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques Multi sense word e Problem Different translations are required for a word having multiple meanings Ex tA F HAeyYS cut e AYZ RILE turn lt k gt 7YVIAIzWS shuffle e Solution Correct it during post editing Omitted particle e Problem Correct translation is impossible when a particle is omitted Ex Original Att EARR REER Translation A company and a super high speed computer are announced e
267. of the technical and User Dictionaries Changing the translation environment style and the translation method Post editing Review and post edit the translated text This step involves checking and completing the translation Post editing is an effective way to boost translation quality Post editing includes Checking the translated text for legibility Checking the translated text for syntax errors Chapter 1 Basic ATLAS Functions E ATLAS Translation Examples The following gives typical application examples where ATLAS can be used for text translation Read this section as a reference when you use ATLAS Japanese to English rough translation Use the Translation Editor to get a rough idea of the content of Japanese magazine articles etc Read the text using a scanner Translate the Japanese text into Japanese and convert it into text data English using the Translation Editor magazine using OCR software and output or print out both texts in parallel layout You can get a rough idea of the content by reading the translated text If a sentence is unclear you can check its Japanese text shown at the left English to Japanese presentation document translation You can quickly translate and create a Japanese presentation document when you need to make a presentation to Japanese customers Use PowerPoint Translation to translate an English presentation document into Japanese without changing its layout and format
268. ommand cannot be executed gt Even if the dictionaries to be backed up are deleted or the names of such dictionaries are changed the restore operation is executed 239 SliINsoYy uoIe sues JONeg BulAsiUudY JO SjuIL s nbiuyoa peoueApY 4 Hints on Pre Post editing for EJ Translation When ATLAS fails to translate a document the original sentences are output as they are In this case review them by taking the following precautions into account 4 1 Hints for Creating Modifying Original Text E Shortening sentences The longer the sentences are the higher the possibility of translation failure Divide single sentences into 2 or more at the point where a comma or conjunction is used Action Trying to compose sentences of no more than 20 words Dividing single sentences into 2 or more at the point where a comma or conjunction is used Ex x We have chosen a small set of mathematical concepts that we understand to be the most fundamental within this field at this time and in presenting these concepts we have attempted to show how to argue for mathematical hypotheses ALTEBILI DEE MWEE MRI OERA 1b OMRBILED MEO RII DUTHKO ame T ODE tERT OPIS MD COMHORCRE BK THATE amp BRL TUOD EOS NS VR EM RZE BUELL O We have chosen a small set of mathematical concepts that we understand to be the most fundamental within this field at this time And in presenting these concepts we have attempted to show how to argue for mathematical hypo
269. ommon dictionaries Pink icon To delete common dictionaries use Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box 4 The administrator uploads the common dictionaries Green icon Common dictionary upload is executed for all common dictionaries 4 Green icon 5 Download common dictionaries to all PCs that use common dictionaries You want to change the location of the Common Folder e Solution Use one of the following procedures to change the location of the Common Folder E Procedure 1 When there are no unnecessary common dictionaries in the Common Folder 1 Quit ATLAS V14 on all PCs that use common dictionaries 2 Use Windows Explorer to create a new Common Folder and copy all files from the previous Common Folder to the new Common Folder 3 Change the location of the Common Folder in all PCs that use common dictionaries Use the Common Dictionary dialog box to change the location E Procedure 2 When there are unnecessary common dictionaries in the Common Folder 1 Use Windows Explorer to create a new Common Folder At this time do not create or copy files in the Common Folder 2 Change the location of the Common Folder in all PCs that use common dictionaries 3 With all PCs that use common dictionaries delete all downloaded common dictionaries Pink icon To delete common dictionaries use Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box 4 The administrator upload
270. onaries on Translation Server cccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 275 A List of Shortcut Keys This appendix lists shortcut keys available in ATLAS WE Shortcut keys available in the ATLAS Main Window Key Function F1 Activates Help Co Shit F1 S F129 Displays the drop down menu when the Useful Tool button is pressed WE Shortcut keys available in Translation Editor At P Pulls down the Translation menu al A Alt D Pulls down the Dictionary menu alt H Alt F4 CTRL Z DEL D 266 Chapter A List of Shortcut Keys F2 Executes the Selected Area Translation or Translate Single Sentence command Shift F2 Executes the All Sentence Translation command Ctrl F2 Executes the Confirmation Translation command F39 Executes the Find Next command Shit F3 Cri F8 WE Shortcut keys available in Clipboard Translation Word Step Translation Acrobat Translation Mouse Translation Automatic Clipboard Translation F2 or Ctr F2 Executes translation Shift F2 or Confirms translation Word Step Ctrl Shift F2 Translation only eve cFa or cir Fe eC Stores Translation Memory Word Ste CTO Co SE Translation only n i E Other Character key of each command Executes the applicable command when pull down menu is used Tab key dialog box Moves the set item and b
271. onary Management Al Configure Server Connection 2 Set each item and click the OK button ATLAS Configure Server Connection Authentication Information BizLingo Authentication Mode UserID lingo Password F Using Proxy Server po w C Integrated Windows Authentication Mode Translation Server Address http fatlranssv tthtop asp Port eo CD Cancel Help Check with your network administrator for the contents of the respective setting items 2 6 Chapter E Managing Dictionaries on Translation Server E 3 Uploading Dictionaries Ss Upload User Dictionaries from ATLAS V14 client to Translation Server eo To upload User Dictionaries to the server you need the dictionary management privilege Contact your Translation Server administrator for details gt f a dictionary with the same name as the one to be uploaded already exists in the server the one in the server will be overwritten Confirm the name of the User Dictionaries on the server side before proceeding with this operation gt When you upload the common dictionary the common dictionary is converted to the User Dictionary automatically xlpueddy Register a User Dictionary file by uploading it to the Translation Server A dictionary can be used in translation by uploading a dictionary file to the Translation Server converting it to a Master Dictionary and registering it Dictionary Synchronization can be sch
272. onment Settings P Translation Environment S Translation Environment Name cc 50 Chapter 1 Basic ATLAS Functions Adobe Reader Select from the Translation Environment Settings button SIE of the Acrobat Translation dialog box a a ATLAS Acrobat Translation Text Alignment Support Tool Select from the list box on the toolbar in the Text Alignment Support Tool window ps Text Alignment Support Tool File Edit Settings Alignment Help ge General EE 51 SVILV PuisN L s jseg Basics 1 5 Applications that can be used with ATLAS a ATLAS can be used with the following applications Application Word translation Word 2007 Word 2003 Word 2002 Word 2000 Excel translation Excel 2007 Excel 2003 Excel 2002 Excel 2000 PowerPoint translation PowerPoint 2007 PowerPoint 2003 PowerPoint 2002 PowerPoint 2000 Acrobat translation Acrobat 8 Acrobat 7 Acrobat 6 Acrobat 5 Acrobat Reader translation Adobe Reader 8 Adobe Reader 7 Adobe Reader 6 Adobe Acrobat Reader 5 Mail translation Windows Mail 6 Outlook 2007 Outlook 2003 Outlook 2002 Outlook 2000 Outlook Express 6 Outlook Express 5 Lotus Notes R7 0 7 0 2 Lotus Notes R6 5 6 5 5 Lotus Notes R6 0 1 6 0 5 Lotus Notes R5 0 Eudora 7J rev2 0 Eudora 7J rev1 0 Eudora 7J Eudora 6 2J Eudora 6J Eudora 5 1J Eudora Mini Becky Internet Mail Ver 2 Becky Internet Mail Ver 1 Web transla
273. ontrol signal Selecting multiple cells identified by sequential sentence numbers Click the sentence number button of the first cell J Hold down lt lt Shift gt gt key and click the sentence number button of the last cell Hints gt To unselect a cell click any position of the Original text or Translated text cells Selecting multiple cells at separate positions Click sentence number button while pressing lt lt Ctrl gt gt key Translation by Comparing Original and Translated Text Translation Editor Displaying other possible translations and modifying translated text Change Word 1 Double click the translated word you wish to change in the Translated text cell or the original word in the Original text cell Q No Original text Translated text S O This invention describes a multi mode optical _ OD 3604 ta Cet Al CID 5 1 lswitching device comprising several ese VST SVILF EKO SB interfacing with inorganic semiconductogs El I cated Double click either one 2 Right click the selected word in the Translated text cell or the Original text cell and select Change Word from the right click menu Original text Translated text This invention describes a multi mode optical CO SEA TR FS a E E EEAS 1 switching device comprising several Erie Oia DIRT SZ ILFE HOS oes interfacing with inorganic semiconductor MSE N Caa ae _ __ _ A Add Word ss Each mode generates posi
274. op O FL FEROCEICEY FILFSCEMCES It is possible to stop by stepping on the brake 5 2 Refining Translation to Proper English Be You can obtain better translation results by reviewing translated text and modifying it as necessary This section explains hints for obtaining better translation results mM Checking sentence structure Verb Pattern Since ATLAS by default translates a sentence with no subject into passive voice improper English expressions may be generated depending on the style of the original text In this case change the verb pattern of the translated text Ex Original 1 APS Atge APS QO HAIL TUE 37 SHRED HHA E E 1T o Translation 1 APS control function Initialization termination of APS and the writer function is controlled Correction 1 APS control function Initializes and terminates APS and controls the writer function etc 201 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques E Checking words Preposition Correct improper prepositions Ex Original 1 F IDS OMFURCHEL BEL Translation Specify user ID by six characters or less Correction Specify user ID in six characters or less Singular Plural A Japanese noun without a word indicating a plural number is translated into singular form In this case check the translation and correct it to plural form if necessary Ex Original FOS LE IPS BBV IL FVIXFSIFSG Translation The program is divided
275. or Adobe Reader you must remove the check mark in the Certified Plug ins Only check box after installing Application Translation Acrobat 8 Adobe Reader 8 1 Select Preferences from the Edit menu 80 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation 2 Click General from the list on the left of the dialog that appears 3 Uncheck the box for Use Only Certified Plug ins 4 Click OK Preferences Categories Commenting Documents 3D Accessibility Batch Processing Catalog Color Management Convert From PDF Convert To PDF Forms Identity International Internet JavaScript Measuring 2D Measuring 3D Meeting Multimedia Multimedia Trust New Document Online Services Reading Reviewing Search A General Basic Tools C Use single key accelerators to access tools Create links From URLs D Make Hand tonl lt elect text 1 Click v Make Hand tool read articles C Make Hand tool use mouse wheel zooming C Make Select tool select images before text _ Use fixed resolution for Snapshot tool images pixelsfinch Warnings C Do not show edit warnings Reset All Warnings Print Show page thumbnails in Print dialog C Emit passthrough PostScript when printing Application Startup C Show splash screen Cluse only certified plug ins Currently in Certified Mode No at 2 Remove the check
276. ord to be added ATLAS displays a likely negative form based on the form entered in the Japanese Verb entry box If ATLAS has failed to select the correct negative form several options are displayed from which you can select the appropriate one If you enter A 4 in the Japanese Verb entry box for example two negative forms 2 Z7 and A A 57ZL are displayed Select the one you prefer In this case A A D 73 lo is displayed in the Japanese Negative Form entry box by default To specify another option select it from the list box If the displayed Japanese Negative Form is wrong check that the Japanese Verb box has been entered correctly 148 Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary 8 7 Finding Words Registered in Dictionaries This section shows how to find a particular word in the Dictionaries Used in Translation Unavailable parts of speech e g pronouns cannot be searched for Depending on the translation direction the results using the Find Delete Word dialog box may differ Even if you try to find the same English word for example the result may be different between when the Find Delete Word dialog box is opened for EJ translation and when it is opened for JE Before searching for a word check the translation direction SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg WE Searching with complete match Finds a word completely matching the specified string and displays the results with the highest pri
277. orer Web Translation 22 Translating Mail Mail Translation 0 0 0 00 ccc 24 Adding Words Dictionary Tool 0 0 ees 26 Utilizing Translation Memory Translation Memory 29 Typical Use of Translation Memory 0 0 00 c eee eee 31 Finding Detailed Information Help Internet Update 35 Basics Try Using ATLAS Chapter 1 Basic ATLAS Functions s sani 26d ta ok deere Shee eee 40 1 1 Flow of Automatic Translation 0 0 0 0 cc eee 40 1 2 Flow of Translation Using Translation Memory 0000 eae 42 1 3 Suitability of Translation of Various Types of Documents 46 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment 47 1 5 Applications that can be used with ATLAS 0 00 00 52 Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor 5 53 2 1 Translation Editor Window 0 0 00 ees 53 2 2 NGAASTAMOMN iaiia tae RS ha en ota e a a ele sa eh de jet ox aah ended tort 56 2 3 Switching between EJ and JE Translation Directions Translation Direction 57 2 4 Saving the Translation Results 0 0 00 cee eee eee 57 2 5 Checking a Translated Word 0 cc eee 60 2 6 Checking the Translation Results Confirmation Translation 61 2 Merging Dividing the Original Text 0 0 00 ce es 61 2 8 Disabling Translation and Editing Translation Lock
278. ority first In this section searching for the word 4 X7 is used as an example to explain operation 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and then select J E Find Delete Word SS ATLAS Main Window TF e Q9 amp amp e ES F H a g Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Find Delete the word EA EJ Add Word amp EJ Find Delete Word L EJ Extract All T EJ Add All V4 JE Add Word JE Find Delete Word JE Extract All 2 Select the Japanese and then type a word to be searched in the entry box Ex EAE 1 Check Find Delete Wor Japanese gt English Envi rr 2 Enter the word Environment Ge ral Y mm Changeable Dictir etionary0001 ers to be searched Searched Word Ce senses English AE Search 149 Basics 3 Click the Search button Find Delete Word Japanese gt English Environment General x Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0001 Words Searched Word Japanese English RAH The search results are displayed as shown below Search Find Delete Word Japanese gt English Environment General Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0001 4 Words Searched Word Japanese C English 8 AE Dee te priority and the dictionary 002 ZA greatly i 002 jak pr in which the searched word is 004 ar and stored are displayed x symbol appears beside a stopped
279. ormats Japanese English Output in the order of combination of parts of speech English Japanese words are listed in the order of the Japanese codes English Japanese Output in the order of combination of parts of speech gt Japanese English words are listed in the order of the English codes Add all Output in the add all file format words are listed in the order of the Japanese codes Unusable word The list of unusable words is output words are listed in the order of the information Japanese codes Translation Memory The list of translation memory is output as a vertical text file tra This function can be selected only when a User Dictionary has been set in Dictionaries Used in Translation i e Changeable Dictionary is available A Japanese verb or adjective is output with an ending interpreted by ATLAS If the wrong ending is output correct the notation of the registered word No ending is attached to a verb in cases like the following e A verb that was added with 4 attached and that is sometimes used as a noun Ex BA369 4 develop English verb development English noun When the above is output to a file AZ is output as the Japanese notation When more than 10 000 translation memory items are registered the Translation Editor cannot read all of them Use a text editor or other program to divide an output file into an appropriate length Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary
280. orresponding English noun in the English Noun entry box and select the plural form from Noun Plural Form For an irregular noun enter the plural form in Irregular Noun The word entered here is called a derived word Hints gt When adding an English idiom use as follows to place an object between a verb and a preposition or an adverbial phrase Ex FHTEBERSIAtHS drag out lt Objective particle l gt DERA E S read like abook lt Objective particle 1O gt x is not used however when an object is placed after a preposition or adverbial phrase in an idiom Ex 3 L lt 77 make friends with lt Objective particle amp gt Lik lt 2 4 getready for lt Objective particle M1 gt When an idiom using is specified the Add for both function is not available 143 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics Verb Adjective JE Japanese Verb Negative Form Lrg English Adjective Sometimes Translated as Noun Yes English Noun fex BS gt differnt Biz gt difference Negative Form According to the Japanese in the Japanese Verb entry box the negative form for the Japanese is automatically displayed When there are several possible negative forms select one of them from the list box Sometimes Translated as Noun Set whether a verb can be used as a noun If so check the Yes checkbox enter the corresponding English noun in the English Noun entr
281. ortcut key list and troubleshooting Methods for translating using the separately sold Translation Server are also described Notations Notes on using ATLAS Be sure to read these before operation f Hints for operation Hints Be sure to read these before operation Q Explains useful functions Tips Names of windows dialog boxes menus commands and buttons appearing in dialog boxes are enclosed in square Translation Editor brackets Letters that appear in parentheses following menu names or indicating that a dialog box will be displayed are omitted in this document lt lt Ctrl gt gt key Double angle brackets indicate names of keys on the keyboard Indicates that you should press the key on the right while lt lt Ctrl gt gt lt lt F4 gt gt key pressing down the key on the left Notes on screen illustration translation sample This manual uses Windows XP screens in the examples Screens illustrations and translation samples used in this manual are for reference only They may differ slightly depending on your PC or ATLAS settings This manual explains basic use of ATLAS and information helpful for translation For detailed explanation of ATLAS refer to Help Abbreviations In this manual product names are abbreviated as follows OOfficialnames names Abbreviatednames names D a Vista Ultimate Windows Vista Windows Vista Enterprise aa Vista Business Windows
282. ou can import a translation environment matched to the type of document translation you are doing or export an environment for use at a later date E Import Translation Environment 1 Perform the procedures described in 6 1 Displaying Lists of Translation Environments on page 256 2 Click the Import button Translation Environment Settings Translation Environment List Thesis Edit Manual Letter Mail Business Fatent Delete Contract Newspaper Magazine Entertainment Import Export Close Help 3 Select the Translation Environment Name Files extension ten of the translation environment you wish to import and click the Open button Select Translation Environment Mame tile Look ir B My Documents B Mp Music dal RA Mi eks nm a lsssssss S jlliLl8SeleEc Translation Environment File name lt 2 Click Files of type Translation Environment Name Files gt TEN Cancel The translation environment name is imported If there is already a translation environment with the same name an overwrite confirmation message appears Click the Yes button to overwrite 4 Click the Close button Hints gt You can also import translation environment name files extension ten exported from other PCs gt Up to 20 translation environments can be imported in addition to the present environments More than 20 files cannot be imported 209 SliINsoYy
283. ox appears for specifying the destination specify the folder to which the dictionaries should be downloaded When downloading is completed the selected dictionaries are added to the List of Client E 5 Deleting a User Dictionary from the Translation Server Use this function to delete dictionaries from the Translation Server E Delete Immediately 1 Click the Server button in the Main Window and select Dictionary Management ATLAS Main Window w eE G9 Ee F amp F A E Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help F Dictionary Management Al Gonfigure Server Connection Manipulate dictionary on server or client 2 Click the Acquire List button in the ATLAS Dictionary Management dialog box 282 Chapter E Managing Dictionaries on Translation Server 3 Select the dictionary to be deleted from the List of Server and click the Delete button in Server Multiple dictionaries can be selected 2 ATLAS Dictionary Management B o E Sener List of Server Dictionary Type Modified Acquire List Po ERA Technical Dictionar 44754201 a l 1 Select a dictionary Basic Sample 467 User Dictionary 03 11 20 el FAME User Dictionary 05 24 201 Set Schedule to be deleted FAE 0002 User Dictionary 12 31 19 Z i User dictionay0001 User Dictionary 06 05 200 a _ 2 Click lt i gt Log Viewer All Dic
284. panese Japanese to English Translation Memory List of Available Dictionaries Dictionaries Used in Translation Common0001 zA User dictionary0001 m User dictionary0002 Hee gt gt E Standard Dictionary 60 Business Packet lt lt Don t Use al 61 Manual Packet 62 Mail Packet Bariy 63 Entertainment Packet New 64 Chat Packet 65 Patent Packet Property fal AA Racin Gamnla 3 Set each item and then click the Create button Dictionary Property EJ Enter dictionary name User Dictionary Dictionary Mame User dictionary 0004 Japanese Dictionary su ATLAS JUWO004 DIC Enter file name and location of n ictionary file English Dictionary kut ATL ASX E UWOD DIC Browse Japa ese dictiona ye A o Enter file name and location of English dictionary file oeei te Check the message before clicking the Yes button Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button eo 128 To be able to utilize the User Dictionary created it should be set as Dictionaries Used in Translation after this step For details refer to 8 2 Setting Dictionaries to be Used
285. panese output format the words added in the direction different from that specified in Output Format are handled as comments For the Add all output format the words that were added using Change Word or Priority and that have a combination of parts of soeech not available for the add all function are handled as comments 156 9 Using the Common Dictionary Group members can use common dictionaries in the common folder on the network for translation This section explains how to use common dictionaries 9 1 About the Common Dictionaries SSS Common dictionaries are user dictionaries that can be shared by multiple users in a group The common dictionary function has a number of advantages Multiple translators can use the same dictionary for translation work helping ensure consistent translation quality One administrator is set for each common dictionary and only the administrator can update the common dictionary Add Word Store Translation Memory etc ensuring dictionary integrity Common dictionaries are automatically downloaded when ATLAS boots and are automatically uploaded when it quits This enables a user to use the latest translation data without worrying about whether the dictionary is updated The requirements to use the common dictionary function are as follows Network users must be uniquely identified by User Name and Computer Name There must be a Common Folder that can be accessed by users
286. path Folder D backup eme N 1 Select target folder Gp 2 Click 236 Chapter 3 Managing Data of User Dictionaries 4 Click the Run button Backup the user dictionary Select dictionaries Most recent backup J dictionary file for backup Run Common0001 C Documents and Settings User dictionary0003 C Documents and Settings Delete Common0002 C Documents and Settings User dictionary0001 C Documents and Settings A User dictionary0002 C Documents and Settings bests Dl lt gt Backup is performed and the progress status and processing content are shown in Processing status 5 When the number of dictionaries for which back up is completed is indicated in the Processing status window click the Close button Ceo In the following cases dictionary files cannot be backed up to the specified backup folder e When the backup folder contains a dictionary with a different name but the same dictionary file name e When there is a backup file with the same dictionary name and dictionary file name and the update date of the file in the backup folder is more recent than that of the dictionary file The available space in the backup folder must be larger than the file size of the same dictionary when overwriting a dictionary Hints gt When the dictionary is backed up to a removable drive such as a magneto optical disk the backup information does not show up if the backup disk
287. ple Present Participle and Present after He If the displayed form is inappropriate click each entry box and enter the appropriate form Objective Particle Select an objective particle for the Japanese verb after selecting Transitive or Both for Verb Pattern Adjective Noun EJ When before Noun ex local paper with J ex WARD C without O tex ASAD When before Noun ex local paper Select whether to add O or not when the English adjective to be added is placed before a noun Adjective Verb EJ Negative Form ILT Leal Negative Form According to the contents of the Japanese Verb entry box the negative form for the translation Japanese is automatically displayed When there are several possible negative forms select one of them from the list box Unit Unit EJ Position After Number ex 1 dollar Before Number ex 1 Noun Plural Form Regular Noun Singular and Plural Uncountable Plural Position Select whether to show an English unit before or after a number Noun Plural Form If After Number is selected for Position select the type of English plural form 141 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics WE Settings for each part of speech in JE translation This section describes the detailed settings for each part of soeech when adding a Japanese word and its English translation For details please refer to Hi Reference for Adding Words
288. press Quick ATLAS a Windows Messenger UE Translation Editor SUTTER Gi Windows Movie Maker P Log OFF fo Turn OFF Computer ATLAS starts up and the Main Window appears Editor Tool Activates Translation Editor Activates the Dictionary tool functions Entered sentences can be translated You can add words to User Dictionaries Server Environment Used to work with dictionaries You can customize the i in the ATLAS Translation Server j j Clipboard l translation environment and configure server settings according to the type of Activates Clipboard Translation document to be translated Translates text copied to the clipboard P f G S A B GB Editor Clipboard Mail Quick TLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Glick on an icon to start n Mail Web Useful Tool Activates Mail Translation Activates Web Translation Click the Useful Tool button Translates E mail Translates Web pages on select Text Alignment Support Internet Explorer Tool to start this tool and Quick ATLAS create translation memory Activates Quick ATLAS Help The Quick ATLAS icon Starts up Help or appears on the task tray Internet Update Translation by Comparing Original and Translated Text Translation Editor Use the Translation Editor to translate by comparing original and translated text The Translation Editor enables you to edit loaded documents before translation and
289. pter 8 Using the Dictionary 0 0 0 0 ee ee 122 8 1 About Dictionaries Sassen sack oles daple adh ents duwdeire de bocce do Bish es 122 8 2 Setting Dictionaries to be Used for Translation Dictionaries Used in Translation 0 0 00 cece eee 126 8 3 Working With User Dictionaries 0 000 ees 127 8 4 Setting Changeable Dictionary 0 eee 133 8 5 Displaying Contents of Changeable Dictionary Display All Changeable Dictionary 0000 cee eee eee 135 8 6 AGAIN WOOS orasi neia reaa me Seiad BRT Seiad ab Bok ase ed ae de Bad wa alee 136 8 7 Finding Words Registered in Dictionaries 0 000 cee eee 149 8 8 Changing Word Settings 0 0 eee 151 8 9 Deleting Words Delete 0 0 cc eee 153 yi 8 10 Listing All Words and Translation Memory Word and Translation Memory File Output 154 Chapter 9 Using the Common Dictionary 000 eee ees 157 9 1 About the Common Dictionaries 0 0 0 0 eee 157 9 2 Setting a Common Folder for the Common Dictionary 160 9 3 Creating a Common Dictionary 0 0000 cee 161 9 4 Uploading Downloading Common Dictionaries 485 163 9 5 Changing the Common Dictionary Administrator 005 165 9 6 Deleting a Common Dictionary 0 00 cc es 168 9 7 Common Folder Management Tool 0 00 cee eee ees 169 9 8 Problems amp
290. puter Sh 314 Floppy A See Local Disk C H Documents and Settings Program Files 3 ATLAS E Sample1 m eia Ome lt 1 Select folder 5 Click the Run button ATLAS Reindex User Dictionary Specifies the target user dictionary Common0001 Common0002 Run User dictionary0001 User dictionary0002 User dictionary0003 Specifies the work folder D ATLAS User Dictionary work folder Browse a Rebuilding of the dictionary starts and the result is shown in Result reports 6 Click the Close button Hints gt You can also right click the dictionary in the List of Available Dictionaries in the Detail Settings dialog box and then select Reindex Dictionary from the displayed menu to rebuild the dictionary gt When replacement of the dictionary is completed the update date of the user dictionary is changed to the rebuilt date gt If there are errors in words added to the rebuilt user dictionary a message appears asking whether to replace the file In addition those words are saved in an error file in the work folder The extension is ebk or ert 239 SliINsoYy uoIe sues JONeg BulAsiUudY JO SjuIL s nbiuyoa peoueApY Advanced Techniques 3 4 Backing Up User Dictionaries Backup Dictionary ee You can back up user dictionaries common dictionaries in case you accidentally delete or lose them or for some other reason need to restore the data eo Only an Administrator
291. r rights using the Common Folder Management Tool refer to page 169 165 SVI1LV Puis 4L solseg Basics 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window to select Translation Environment Settings and click your desired translation environment name in the displayed list The Detail Settings dialog box appears 2 Inthe Dictionary Settings tab select the common dictionary indicated with the green icon for which you want to change the administrator lt 3 __ You cannot change the administrator of the common dictionary which is set in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box If the common dictionary you want to change is set in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box click the lt lt Don t Use button to move the common dictionary to the List of Available Dictionaries box 3 Click the Property button 4 Click the Change Admin button Dictionary Property Common Dictionary Dictionary Name Japanese Dictionary JCWOOOI DIG English Dictionary ECW000110 Administrator YFUYAMA Computer Name IFUYAMA Change Admin Convert User Dict Modify Gancel Help Click 5 Confirm the message and click the Yes button 6 Click the Modify button When the common dictionary upload processing confirmation dialog box appears always click the Yes button The current administrator of the common dictionary is cleared and the screen returns to
292. r to import UserDictionar ran log lt lt 1 Select dictionary O Cache yk Sample_folder work folder backup H cvs H O FM_BACKUP H kkitazawa v 200 6 Select the User Dictionary to be imported and then click the OK button Importing Folder D ATLAS UserDictionary dic Browse List of Importable Dictionary User dictionary PGA o lt 1 Select dictionary Detail eee Check the message before clicking the Yes button Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary lt 23 ___HW In order to utilize the imported User Dictionary it must be set as Dictionaries Used in Translation after this step For details please refer to 8 2 Setting Dictionaries to be Used for Translation Dictionaries Used in Translation on page 126 When you import a User Dictionary in the shared folder of another PC be sure to select Full Control for the Share Permissions option mM Deleting a User Dictionary Delete You can delete User Dictionaries you no longer need This section describes the steps to delete User
293. racting and combining of accumulated memory during the translation process By developing dictionaries in shared folders over a network used by multiple users translation style can be standardized For more about common dictionaries see Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory on page 174 Administrator O e o Upload Download Download Common Folder Common Dictionary A a O o O o gt L SRSA U User H Common Dictionary B Download Download m B O O User User Network Environment Match Value and Translation Style of translation memory and dictionaries used can be set for each translation environment It is useful to prepare a detailed environment such as the type of manual match value edition section chapter unit etc 45 SVILV Bulsn L solseg Basics 1 3 Suitability of Translation of Various Types of Documents i j Use of ATLAS for various documents and suitability of ATLAS translation is summarized in the following table Use this table when planning translation projects Degree of suitability Classification Usage Suitability of Translation Auto Translation translation memory Parts list Highly useful because of term level replacement Operation Highly useful because sentences explain manual procedure and they are relatively short Function Highly useful beca
294. ranslating a selected Excel sheet Sheet Translation Translate the worksheet displayed with Excel or the selected sheet and replace the text content with the translation results 1 Display the worksheet to be translated Multiple sheets can be selected if sheet names are clicked while the lt lt Shift gt gt key or lt lt Ctrl gt gt key is held down E C D E F G H I TF 1 2 3 Ks cE ier tas izi sett ES 4 foe R 111 111 111 1 SBE Rmstt BSED 5 e6 Bz 222 292 922 2 ARE Rmoctt CEZ S 6 A EN 333 333 333 3 tt RARA t tE 8 M4 fi Sheeti Sheet2 Sl et3 2 Ready Hold down the lt lt Shift gt gt key or lt lt Ctrl gt gt key and then click 2 Click the Translate Sheet button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar ATLAS zE Ra Direction AUTO 7 Ei K Word Registration Template Sa w Environment General X as Add All Words Transtai Translate franslate Translation Add Find Delete 5 ATLAS All Sheet Selected Editor m Detail Settings Word Word Add To Translation Memory Help lt Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Batch Add Help The translation results are displayed when translation is complete WE Translating selected sentences of an Excel sheet Selected Sentence Translation You can translate selected sentences of an Excel worksheet and replace the text contents with the translated results Open the Excel worksheet and proceed to the following steps 1 Select t
295. rb pattern refer to Reference for English verb pattern in Basics on page 147 Japanese verb form Contents of entry lt A A E gt Entered only when the Japanese verb form is F3 For Japanese verb form refer to Reference for Japanese verb form in Basics on page 148 Objective particle Contents of entry lt Byaal A Particle for object gt Required for an English transitive or intransitive transitive verb For the available types of particles refer to Objective particle in Basics on page 147 English form Contents of entry lt 4k A Past Past particle Present particle Present after He gt Enter the English form If nothing is entered the form is automatically judged by ATLAS English Noun Contents of entry lt 4 ial A English Noun A English plural form number gt If a Japanese verb can be translated as a noun specify a corresponding English noun Ex 3 treat kl treatment MSS add E0 addition For the English plural form number refer to Plural form number table in Basics on page 148 221 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques English plural form Contents of entry lt 22 A English plural form gt Enter an English plural form when 9 is specified as the English plural form number irregular noun Sample gt H Si J land lt M E gt gt H Sil Ee
296. reasing translation efficiency 2 Fuzzy match translation memory When data partially match the translation memory item that meets or exceeds the specified match value is output indicated in orange Usually only simple corrections are required Automatic translation Automatic translation No matches in translation memory the result of automatic translation is displayed indicated in black Example of 80 or better translation memory match value What do you think of this plan When do you plan to leave for Tokyo i Wat CO YOUENN GEMY pian Automatic translation a 3 Automatic translation Translation memory Bisiclt RR es LALIT 7EU Datla amp 9 E What do you think of this plan a a No matches in translation l memory the result of nee eee automatic translation is displayed Translation memory 100 match translation memory 2 Fuzzy match translation memory 87 COHMECSBUETD COHMECS BET YD Does not need correction because this is Translator may need to replace a 100 match IO with 44 30 Typical Use of Translation Memory This section explains how to use the Translation Editor using sample translation memory For details of how to store new translation memory items refer to Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory in Basics on page 174 For explanatory purposes lower the default setting of the Match Value of Used Translation Memory setting
297. rection AUTO dlll E i K Output Destination Output imme oF Environment General 1 Vertical Ep Horizont Save as s Pair Add Find Delete ATLAS Translate Translate Translation tep All Selected Editor TA EA v3 Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Transco Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help Translating selected sentences and displaying them on the preview screen You can display the translation result the translated text in another window without displaying it in Word 1 Select the ATLAS tab and select Output Destination Preview Dialog Box Q R g Direction AUTO v Ei K ER r 3 z Environment General z a aL ercurnar pay Save os rar Translate Translate Translation Add _ Find Delete ATLAS All Selected Editor fraratation T Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help For versions prior to and including Word 2003 1 Click the Environment Settings button on the ATLAS toolbar 2 In the Environment Settings dialog box select the Output Settings tab then Text Output Destination Select Preview Dialog Box and click the OK button 2 Locate the cursor on the original text you wish to translate Keynes docx Microsoft Word Home Insert Page Layout References Mailings Review View ATLAS m 41 K 81 1101 1121 1141 1161 1181 1201 1221 1241 1
298. renthetic phrase is inserted in a sentence with commas before and after it it is difficult for ATLAS to understand its parallel phrase resulting in an incorrect analysis Action Rewriting an inverted structure Ex x Great was her anger when she heard it MABE Ne HMUYEES KRESRKAZORY CLE Her anger was great when she heard it WAMCHAMOYEES RADKYILMLADETT WE Sentences Including Multi part of speech Words 242 ATLAS may make an incorrect analysis when a sentence includes words with multiple parts of speech When a word that may act as a verb is placed at the beginning of a sentence ATLAS attempts to the analyze it as an imperative sentence Action Identifying parts of speech implicitly ATLAS may make an incorrect analysis when a sentence includes words with multiple parts of speech In this case insert an article or comma as a symbol to identify the part of speech Ex have worn jacket AIS rT h EAEL E have a worn jacket HAIFY Wo THD Sr TYb eHOTWET Hints gt When a word that can be interpreted as a verb is placed at the beginning of a sentence ATLAS interprets it as an imperative sentence In addition it interprets a phrase as a title when no period is placed at the end To enable ATLAS to interpret it as an imperative sentence put a period at the end Ex Drink with friends RAA L S RAW Drink with friends RAE HIXBRA CK FES LY Action Identifying parts of speech explicitly A part of speech
299. rly since they are not usually clarified in Japanese Ex Original Al RIAS EL TLS Translation The Al technology has advanced e Solution Correct it during post editing Ex The Al technology advances Article e Problem Article information relating to English nouns is included in ATLAS dictionaries based on which ATLAS determines articles to be attached to nouns Improper articles however may be selected during translation Ex Original lt WILRBRT Ah CHAS NEAAEBE Translation This is a device used for the final test e Solution Correct it during post editing Ex This is the device used for the final test 200 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY 6 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment Settings The following explains how to set the translation environment from the Translation Environment Settings dialog box For details on how to select the translation environment refer to 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment in Basics on page 47 6 1 Displaying Lists of Translation Environments 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and select Translation Environment List in Translation Environment Settings S ATLAS Main Window rT e 8 FS B amp B A E Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Display a list of translation er Translation Environment List
300. rms Tools Advanced Window ATLAS Help Os JOLE as Fine i Ti RD g ep F 100 e g Create FPDF Es comtine Files Go Exot a ie lz 1 BIRT SNeEAaTS ATLAS OPRAH BP F ESHeERSTT When the translation is completed the results are displayed in the Acrobat Translation dialog box E Translating selected sentences You can translate a selected range of text in an PDF document Start the procedure after you open a PDF file 1 Click the Select Tool button to select the range of the translation J_UsersGuide pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional SEE TE J e amp ma O amp s Ge mp 11 316 ee Create PDF d Combine Files 6 Export X ia Secure 7 A Sign 7 Forms F Review amp Comment Y 1 BRIOXeARTS ATLAS DHHS MFF Ak h MYIVEETAALT EDM LD SAF et CRHAART F TFTICAMSNTS FARTS OCRY I KOMFF FICERIS FIAbERBTS 7 17 x 10 13in 85 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 2 Click the Selection Translation button amp on the ATLAS toolbar J_UsersGuide pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional o a e e y te MEJA k a m 1 316 1 ATLAS OPIS MVIVMEHTAALT FREED SAF et CRAAART F TFACAHSENTUS ERTS ZOCRYT KOXSF FICERIS FHA ZARI Tani adesa lu pa e When the translation is completed the results are displayed in the Acrobat Translation dialog box Hints gt PDF documents contain special fonts that can
301. rnet Explorer 7 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 Accela BizLingo V3 0 ATLAS Double Pack V9 0 V13 0 ATLAS Translation Standard V14 0 Abbreviated names Adobe Reader 8 Adobe Reader 7 Adobe Reader Adobe Reader 6 Adobe Acrobat Reader 5 Lotus Notes Mail Internet Explorer Translation Server ATLAS or ATLAS V9 V13 ATLAS or ATLAS V14 Table of Contents Introduction Welcome to ATLAS FURCIONS OP AMA S setast ieee bt eae bie oe ee dence eae eh Gees 2 Saning ATLAS ves 5 38 Jacetee yt ete ah 47 te Boh eda edd Arona ee ee Ge ae ae Re 4 Translation by Comparing Original and Translated Text Translation Editor 5 Loading a document in lt Translation Editor gt 0 0 cee eee ee 5 Translation using lt Translation Editor gt 2 0 0 0 ee 7 Selecting a Character String ora Cell 0 nanana aaaea 9 Displaying other possible translations and modifying translated text Change Word 222264 eedceetee Resse hes edei ees wee mies 11 Saving the translation resultS 2 0 0 6 eee ees 12 Selecting a Text String as a Translation Unit Insert Control Brackets 12 Selecting a Non Translation Text String Insert Non Translation Brackets 14 Translating Word Files Word Translation 2 000008 15 Translating in Acrobat Application Translation 005 17 Translating Contents of the Clipboard Clipboard Translation 20 Translating Web Pages with Internet Expl
302. rs need to set the location of the Common Folder created by the administrator 1 Specify a Common Folder If you are the administrator of a common dictionary On the network create a Common Folder that all users can look up If you are a user of a common dictionary Obtain the location of the Common Folder from the administrator Hints gt When you restrict user access to the Common Folder it is recommended that you create a Common Folder gt To restrict access to a common dictionary set access control for the Common Folder The access control procedure is explained below Example Windows 2000 1 Use Explorer to create a Common Folder that all users can look up 2 Right click the created folder and select Sharing from the displayed popup menu The property dialog box appears 3 Select Share this folder in the Sharing tab and click the Permissions button to add and permit user access Even though you set the read only property for the common dictionary file that property is canceled when the dictionary is uploaded gt When restricting access to a Common Folder it is recommended that the full control or change property be assigned to the administrator of the common dictionary and the read only property be assigned to users 2 Click the Environment button in the Main Window to select Translation Environment Settings and click your desired translation environment name in the displayed list The
303. ry as needed Select Adding Direction Message Select Japanese to English Displays the information of added English to Japanese or both words and logging results Also directions displays the cause of any errors that occur The contents are saved in the status file lt 2 __ Even when Both directions is selected from Select Adding Direction the following pairs of parts of soeech cannot be added for both directions e Verb Adjective e Adjective Verb e Noun Adjective e Particle Preposition For EJ addition English words cannot be added with their derived words 2 4 Adding Multiple Words at Once from Excel es You can add multiple words from Excel to the dictionary at once Open the Excel worksheet and proceed to the following steps 1 Click the Word Registration Template button on the ATLAS Toolbar ATLAS Q ee Direction AUTO Ei K Word Registration Template S Environment General v 73 400 AN words Translate Translate Translate Translation a y Add Find Delete ATLAS All Sheet Selected Editor Detail Settings Word Word ig Add To Translation Memory Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Batch Add Help 2 Click the Word Entry Support button on the toolbar You can also click Word Entry Support from the menu that is displayed by right clicking a cell on the sheet 229 SliINsoYy uoIe sues JONeg BulAsiUudY JO SjuIL s nbiuyoa peoueApY Advanced
304. ry uploading Dictionary Synchronization starts at the scheduled time For confirming that dictionary registration is completed refer to Hi Confirming Dictionary Synchronization Results Log Viewer on page 288 280 Chapter E Managing Dictionaries on Translation Server lt 2 ____ gt Ifthe Translation Server is translating at the set time Dictionary Synchronization starts when translation is completed Translation cannot be performed from the time synchronization Starts until it completes Uploaded dictionaries become available when they have been registered and synchronized at the set time E 4 Downloading Dictionaries from the Server E Download User Dictionaries Technical Dictionaries and or Standard Dictionary from the Translation Server to ATLAS client lt 2 __ A dialog box appears for confirmation for overwriting if a User Dictionary with the same name already exists on the client side as one on the server side If you have already installed optional dictionaries of specialized terms on your PC you cannot download the same types of Technical Dictionaries When downloading the Standard Dictionary and Technical Dictionaries from the Translation Server login as the administrator with the user ID having the administrator status 1 Click the Server button in the Main Window and select Dictionary Management ATLAS Main Window w e Q9 e
305. s gt ATLAS interprets a portion enclosed in control brackets e g as one group and translates it accordingly Portions enclosed in control brackets are interpreted before others For details refer to Selecting a Text String as a Translation Unit Insert Control Brackets in Introduction on page 12 E Complementing omitted words When verbs are omitted in parallel phrases for example it is very difficult for ATLAS to analyze the sentence correctly Action Complementing an omitted verb Ex x Ihave A file for the output A and B file for the output B AMIE HA BOEKODKHAAE B IFTNWOKODA DFANMBVIET Ihave A file for the output A and have B file for the output B AK HN ADEOD ADP AILVeHPDTWT HABOEKHDB IPAILe FEO TWEET Action Complementing an omitted subject Ex x The shop owner failed to attract young customers and recently rented part of its ground floor to the chic Italian boutique OMAAIL 1 OAL BE ERARE SNERRE YIRA SFO T41 VAISleEHITEGACLE O The shop owner failed to attract young customers and the shop owner recently rented part of its ground floor to the chic Italian boutique SOMAAILAl MBE SISHITECGACLE LT GBOMAAIL Ril YIYDEAAYVFOITF 4 Y 1O MAeBLELE 241 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY Advanced Techniques E Rewriting Special Structures Since inverted or emphasizing structures may not be translated properly make them as simple as possible Also when a pa
306. s Searched Word C Japanese English ftactic Baschi tactic see yj Priority tactic airplane HEATA tactic block RAFA Add Word Sorted by code tactic block polymer Fy WIESE tactic decision Stay Delete tactic nuclear weapon ati aT tactic of deliberately fillin AERE Not Usable an an Standard Dictionary rA tit Changeable Dictionary Meaning Hi4 FES Plural form Regular Close Help x symbol appears beside a stopped word For details on the dictionary icon refer to W About the dictionary icon in the dialog box on page 125 8 8 Changing Word Settings E Changing Priority of Translation Priority assigned to each translation is displayed in the Find Delete Word dialog box This priority can be changed lt 2 _ The priority cannot be set in the following cases e No User Dictionary is set in Dictionaries Used in Translation no Changeable Dictionary available e Search is conducted for the translation side Japanese for EJ translation or English for JE translation Before opening the Find Delete Word dialog box check the availability of a User Dictionary and the translation direction e Words are displayed with the Display All Changeable Dictionary button The priority cannot be set for the following words e English idiomatic verbs e English irregular verbs registered in a User Dictionary e Identical words with different notation for JE translation
307. s entered However existing symbols are not changed and the original brackets become invalid when re translated 14 Translating Word Files Word Translation You can translate a Word file with Word Translation This section describes how to translate Word files using ATLAS You can use ATLAS not only in Word but also in Excel PowerPoint Acrobat and Adobe Reader by setting up Application Translation For details refer to 3 1 Preparation Setup of Application Translation in Basics on page 79 1 Check whether Application Translation is installed 2 Click the Environment Settings button in the main window and select Setup Application Translation S ATLAS Main Window yr e 8 fF e Ee S S amp S EB Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Setup translation function into the applications Translation Environment Settings P Operating Environment Settings amp Setup Application Translation Check the application to be coordinated and click the OK button When ATLAS is installed a checkmark is automatically placed for the already installed application Close the checked running applications and click the OK button Setup Application Translation Check the application to be used in Application Translation Remove the check mark when Application Translation is not to be used Iv Word 2007 lv Excel 2007 WV PowerPoint 2007 WV Adobe Reader 8
308. s the common dictionaries Green icon Common dictionary upload is executed for all common dictionaries Green icon 5 Download the common dictionaries to all PCs that use common dictionaries 172 Chapter 9 Using the Common Dictionary Other issues You cannot create a common dictionary the Common Dictionary tab does not appear e Cause If the Common Folder has not been set you cannot create common dictionaries If the Common Folder has been created on another PC or for some other reason you cannot access the Common Folder you cannot create common dictionaries If you click the Create button under the Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box the Common Dictionary tab does not appear e Solution To determine if there is a problem with the network attempt to use Windows Explorer to access the Common Folder With the common dictionary function installed starting quitting ATLAS takes time e Cause When you install the common dictionary function starting quitting ATLAS takes time because checks for and downloading of common dictionaries on the Common Folder takes place In addition if you have created the Common Folder on other PC or there is a problem with the network it may also take time e Solution To determine if there is a problem with the network attempt to use Windows Explorer to access the Common Folder lf there are many common dictionaries or the common dictionary file siz
309. s with Internet Explorer Web Translation 22 Translating Mail Mail Translation ccccsseeecseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeesaeeeesees 24 Adding Words Dictionary TOON taciceaccaiowetec ried a 26 Utilizing Translation Memory Translation Memory seceeseeeeeeeeeeeees 29 Typical Use of Translation Memory ccccccccccseeeecseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaaeees 31 Finding Detailed Information Help Internet Update cceeeeeseeeeeees 35 Functions of ATLAS Explains ATLAS translation functions and their supplementary functions E ATLAS translation functions ATLAS is equipped with various translation functions Translation Editor Translates by comparing original and translated text You can load documents such as word files directly edit loaded documents and translation results and reflect translation results without changing layout of the original document In this way Translation Editor increases efficiency of the translation process From Translation Editor you can start Translation Memory which allows you to compare text to data stored in the translation memory Application Translation ATLAS can translate a document that has been opened by another application such as Microsoft Word or Excel in collaboration with those applications Web Translation Translates a Web page on Internet Explorer Mail Translation Translates E mail Clipboard Translation Translates the
310. select Help Contents S ATLAS Main Window w e HS S A mB Q Editor Clipboard Mail Quick TLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Search help item from index Help Contents F1 Help Index The Help window is displayed E ATLAS V14 Help He Hide Print Options Contents index Search About ATLAS on L z ig J d Notation of Help f Overview of ATLAS ATLAS is used to translate various types of 1D Translate with ATLAS documents between Japanese and English 1 Functions that assist translation including text files and Web pages Software Using the Dictionary i Setting the Environment for ATLAS functions include Notice for installing Translation Server Appendix ATLAS Most ATLAS functions can Main easily be started up in this Window window Also used to maintain translation dictionaries and to set up the translation environment Translation Translates the source text into Editor the target language and displays both the source text and the translated text The original text is either input directly or imported from text files or files created by other applications 2 Double click the item you wish to check You can also double click the Index tab in Help to search by keyword The Help button or Help menu in each function window allows you to access Help for each function Q Displaying Help for each function Tips 35 UOIJONPOUUy
311. sens as soon as entering a country because of being said that the public peace of Sweden is better than that of other European nations Original text AD T JES ZECA FINTA ZIr FYyDRZheoa 0 vyt Eko bR Ut SHIN WSGEH KALUE ETAICADEEADSWKES CT Translated text Kingdom of SwedenAdvice of safety and public peace here seem to be a lot of people to whom the nature loosens as soon as entering a country because of being said that the public peace of Sweden is better than that of other European nations 1 SVI1LV Buisp 4L solseg 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation ATLAS can translate Word Excel and PowerPoint files when the Translation button is clicked on each application screen ATLAS supports application translation together with the following application software Word 2007 Word 2003 Word 2002 Word 2000 Excel 2007 Excel 2003 Excel 2002 Excel 2000 PowerPoint 2007 PowerPoint 2003 PowerPoint 2002 PowerPoint 2000 Acrobat 8 Acrobat 7 Acrobat 6 Acrobat 5 Adobe Reader Adobe Reader 8 Adobe Reader 7 Adobe Reader 6 Adobe Acrobat Reader 5 When upgrading Word Excel or PowerPoint first uninstall or upgrade the corresponding Application Translation for example Word Translation for Word before upgrading the application If the security level of Office products Word Excel or PowerPoint is set to High or Medium a security warning dialog box may appear after installing Applic
312. slation dialog box the Translation Editor dialog box or the Acrobat Translation dialog box e Acrobat Reader Translation Open the Acrobat Translation dialog box gt For Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Translation see Translating Mail Mail Translation in Introduction on page 24 You can set up a translation environment including dictionaries and translation style for Word Excel PowerPoint Adobe Reader or Acrobat Translation respectively Tips see page 50 Q Setting the Translation Environment 3 1 Preparation Setup of Application Translation S M You must install Application Translation to translate in applications such as Microsoft Word or Adobe Acrobat There are two installation methods Perform the setup at the time of ATLAS installation Perform the setup from the Setup Application Translation dialog box The following explains how to install the Application Translation that you did not select during ATLAS installation lt 23 __ _ Be careful to e Login as Administrator before installing or uninstalling Application Translation for Acrobat or Adobe Reader e Install and uninstall Application Translation for Word Excel and PowerPoint separately for each user 79 SVI1LV Puis 4L solseg Basics 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and select Setup Application Translation S ATLAS Main Window rT e Q we GF a g Editor
313. sp 4L s seg 6 Translation eS TOEN Business Manual Standard Dictionaries in use Dictionaries in use Dictionaries in use 7 Technical dictionary Technical dictionary User dictionary C Business Data processing User dictionary E priority Technical dictionary Technical dictionary Technical dictionary m Personal names and Electricity and Personal names and place names Electronics place names Business Manual Letters and Mail Standard dictionary Standard dictionary Standard dictionary WE Available Dictionaries Dictionaries in Use and Changeable Dictionary Dictionaries that can be used for translation are of the following three kinds Available Dictionaries Technical dictionaries provided as standard user dictionaries downloaded using Internet Update and installed technical dictionaries are available dictionaries However an available dictionary cannot be used until it is set up as a Dictionary in Use Dictionary in Use Dictionaries that are actually used in a translation are labeled Dictionaries in Use A total of 32 dictionaries this includes technical dictionaries and user dictionaries can be integrated in a translation environment The Standard Dictionary is always a Dictionary in Use For details on dictionary setup refer to 8 2 Setting Dictionaries to be Used for Translation Dictionaries Used in Translation on page 126 123 Basics 124 Changeable Dictionary Of the user dictionaries set in Di
314. ssage will appear saying it cannot be uninstalled Follow these steps to uninstall the Application Translation function 1 Close the application to which the Application Translation function is applied required 2 Click the Retry button To abort uninstallation click the Abort button Clicking the Abort button will end the uninstallation of the Application Translation function as well as the uninstallation of the program itself If the application cannot be exited due to application problems the Application Translation function can be uninstalled by clicking the Ignore button Original text error Meaning The original text file cannot be found or the file contains abnormal data Action Check to see if the original text file exists and if the contents of the original text file are correct File I O error Meaning An error has occurred in inputting or outputting of the original text file or the translated text file Action Check to see if the original text file can be read and if the translated text file can be written 268 Chapter B Error Messages Not enough disk space Meaning There is not enough disk space to save the translation results Action Ensure required disk space by deleting files no longer used Not enough memory Meaning There is not enough free space in memory to accommodate translation Action Please terminate any other applications Translation error Meaning Failed to translate Act
315. stall 3 42205 22 5 seh o0k Gere 274 ATLAS Main Window 47 Index ATLAS Main Window Edit 263 ATLAS Main Window List of shortcut keys 266 ATLAS supports application software 52 78 ATLAS translation functions 2 Automatic Clipboard Translation 117 Automatic Clipboard Translation Layout and Type of Dialog Box 119 Automatic Translation 30 Automatically Starting Mail Translation 111 Automatically Starting Quick ATLAS 121 Available Dictionary 123 Avoiding ambiguous expressions JE 249 Avoiding long modifiers JE 248 Avoiding using duplicate words JE 247 Avoiding verbose expressions JE 247 B Backup User Dictionary 236 Backup Dictionary 236 Beginning text strings match Search 150 Brackets EJ 0200 c eee eee 212 Brackets JE nannaa 0 0000 e eee 218 C CAN gata rk ate sewage E ae 209 GAN BE surrinata oe ys rE ETERN 209 Capitalization 0 0 66 Change Word 0 0c eee eae 11 Changeable Dictionary 124 Changing Characters Convert 66 Character Convertion 66 Clarifying logical relations between clauses JE nananana os Fie See hoes 251 Clarifying modification JE 250 Clarifying the modification of complicated sentences EJ 000
316. ste Ctri C Delete Del a gt Q m gt 09 Insert Part of Speech Code gt Capital gt Lower Case Lower gt Capital Case Find a Capitalize 2 byte code gt 1 byte code 1 byte code gt 2 byte code 2 12 Formatting Translated Text Translated Sentence Format You can unify double single byte text and number forms when formatting translated text Beforehand you must click Translated Sentence Format in the Assistance menu to display the Translated Sentence Format Settings dialog box and then set the format eo When only delimiter is selected the translated text cannot be formatted In such a case select the sentence number for the translated text 1 From the Translated Text cell select the sentence number of the translated text you want to format uals text Translated text semiconductor TEE Fiche A CAERS Photocurrent by each mode originally adjusts CED e DE the tra nsmission of the high frequency control 67 Basics 2 Select Translated Sentence Format from the Assistance menu File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Sentence Division Spelling Check Export Undefined Word Delete Mark gt Translated Sentence Format settings Translated Sentence Format Dictionary of Origin Marks gt Translation Memory gt The translated text is formatted according to the settings 2 13 Marking a Translated Word from a Di
317. t prevent from ing The system is prevented from interrupting 3 T F K ITEE Specifies how a roundabout imperative sentence should be translated Original text Bama ARYATKDICLESL Setting Translated text Be sure to detach parts 4 LRWEDICHE Specifies how a roundabout forbidding sentence should be translated Original text RAARUNHAHLESICLHALY Setting Translated text Be careful not to Be careful not to detach parts Do not detach parts 5 Te lE FSCE Specifies how an imperative sentence with a subject should be translated Original text F BIS7AKMRERETSCE Setting Translated text The worker must preserve the test result The worker shall preserve the test result E Clause 1 TOT Specifies how a clause providing a reason 0 T clause should be translated Original text F aAWEYJBZUONT MEERY A Setting Translated text Because data is insufficient processing is interrupted Since data is insufficient processing is interrupted 216 2 3 4 5 6 Chapter 1 Setting the Translation Style Translation Style PLCs oi Specifies how a clause providing a reason L T clause should be translated Original text me ARlCLYVVERMYVIEFLESL Setting Translated text Check parts and detach the engine Detach the engine checking parts h Specifies how clauses set in the F 5 7 4 pattern should be translated Original text RIR Z E
318. t key of your choice to set shortcut key This setting will be available the next time Quick ATLAS is started The shortcut key you input You cannot directly input Cancel characters Hints gt You cannot directly enter the shortcut key name in Shortcut Key Settings for Starting Key Type Translation gt The key of your choice can be any function key F1 etc or alphanumeric key However note that the number pad keys cannot be set to shortcut keys as the key of your choice 116 Chapter 7 Quick ATLAS Basics 3 Click the OK button 4 Right click the Quick ATLAS icon and select Shut Down Quick ATLAS to quit Quick ATLAS The shortcut key setting becomes effective the next time Quick ATLAS is activated 7 4 Automatically Translating Text on the Clipboard Automatic Clipboard Translation You can automatically translate text and display results by copying a sentence to the clipboard This function is useful when you want to specify a range and translate only that section 1 Right click the Quick ATLAS icon on the task tray and select Automatic Clipboard Translation v Mouse Translation v Automatic Clipboard Translation Key Type Translation ATLAS Menu b Options Help Startup Guide Version Information Shut Down Quick ATLAS E157 2 Select the sentence you want to translate and then choose Edit Copy to copy the sentence to the clipboard The copied sentenc
319. t 22 A English plural form gt Enter an English plural form when 9 is specified as the English plural form number irregular noun Sample gt a ESiR ASD fate gt PEAR kug independent lt 27 independence 7 gt gt a ESRA BAG enthusiastic lt 27 enthusiasm 7 gt 222 Chapter 2 Adding Words Adjective Adjective Adverb Format EZR EAR KAA Japanese adjective A English adjective A lt English adverb gt English adverb Contents of entry lt lla A English adverb gt If a Japanese adjective can be translated as an adverb specify a corresponding English adverb Ex l slow lt slowly FANM quiet AIX quietly Sample gt Hae FZAGR FLL spherical 4825 HAi GSK automatic lt l automatically gt 4 Adjective Verb Adverb Format Zi SA Japanese adjective A English verb A lt English form gt A lt English adverb gt d English form Contents of entry lt 4k A Past Past particle Present particle Present after He gt Enter the English form If nothing is entered the form is automatically judged by ATLAS English adverb Contents of entry lt Bllza A English adverb gt Ifa Japanese adjective can be translated as an adverb specify a corresponding English adverb Ex lo pretty h prettily Sample Ziq Si fE likea gt Egi Si FLLLY feellonely lt 4k feltlonely felt lonely feeling lonely feels lone
320. t not specified local paper gt ithAO iHl Sample gt 2a gRA thA local lt O L gt O Verb Adjective Format 5 EAA Japanese verb A English adjective A lt Japanese verb form gt Japanese verb form Contents of entry lt A Ex gt Entered only when the Japanese verb form is F For Japanese verb form refer to Reference for Japanese verb form in Basics on page 148 Sample gt Bil HAi BITS cautious 4 gt i KERA Acb controllable lt A R gt d Adverb Adverb Format Bll 3a alla A Japanese adverb A English adverb Sample gt El al Spod lightly A Unit Unit Format 4 47 Bi fiz A Japanese unit A English unit A English plural form number A lt Position of unit Se English plural form number For English plural form number refer to Plural form number table in Basics on page 148 Position of unit Contents of entry lt M EA gt lt BAR gt Specify whether to put the English unit before or after the number Sample gt Bi Hi FIL 6 lt te gt A gt Hiy Hiz FJL dolar 0 lt us gt 22 SliNsoYy uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY JO SyuiH s nbiuyo a peoueApY 2 3 Advanced Techniques Particle Preposition Format B za AE za A Japanese particle A English preposition Japanese particle Enter a Japanese word corresponding to the
321. t file txt The following method is used to create files that can be registered e Vertical translation format file TRA Use the Translation Editor see page 57 or Text Alignment Support Tool see page 199 e Plain text file txt Use the following format to create data in Excel and under Save as type select Text tab delimited txt You can either use Japanese or English as the original text However when entering the original text only use Japanese or English If the text contains both type of characters they cannot be registered correctly Ex SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg 2 Click the Tool button in the ATLAS Main Window and choose Add All Translation Memory ATLAS Main Window w E G9 B amp F Hw B GB Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help EJ Add Word EJ Find Delete Word EJ Extract All EJ Add All JE Add Word JE Find Delete Word JE Extract All JE Add All Add All Translation memory 193 Basics 3 Click the Browse button and then select the translation memory data file tra or txt Store Translation Memory Add All File o Bone Dictionary User dictionary0001 v Input Add All File M Skip first line 4 Select the dictionary in which you want to store the translation memory data Store Translation Memory Add All File C Program Files ATLAS V135 ample Yakurei tra Browse Dic
322. t pairs are registered as translation memory items in the translation memory Check this information and click the Close button if the data is OK Aligned sentences are converted to a format that can be edited and saved by the lt Translation Editor gt Select Save As from the File menu PS Text Alignment Support Tool C Program Filest ATLAS V13 Sample Ejsamp txt SEE ies Edit Settings Alignment Help Ok H Ox General E en ee O lt ODDER ELIET S IL tte FE OX ee Store Translation Memory s sun Leo 201 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 11 Enter the filename and set Save as type to Vertical translation files tra and then click the Save button Save As Save in Sample B Coop JIchitaro Natupro tra Yakurei tra 1 Enter the filename 2 Choose a file type Save as type Vertical translation files tra Cancel Hints gt The data saved depends on save format Select one of the following formats depending on the operation to be performed e Saving to enable further processing at a later time lt amp 3 Click TRG Saves all data including aligned data dotted or solid line and not aligned data e Saving to export data to Translation Editor TRA Saves aligned sentence data only No dotted lines or solid lines are saved When only a part of paragraph of the original text file and translated text file are aligned or you want t
323. tail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Trams Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help When the translation is completed the results are displayed r On iW v Keynes docx Microsoft Word x Home Insert Page Layout References Mailings Review View ATLAS 1181 Introduction Chapter 1 The General Theory Chapter 2 The Postulates of the Classical Economics Chapter 3 AWmEO mH Words 476 lt Japanese Insert 91 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics HM Various Translation Methods The method to set how translation results translated text are displayed is here as an example Replacing the original text with the translated one and saving it 1 Select the ATLAS tab and select Output Destination Replace Using Original Q ie g Direction AUTO v Ei K Output Destination Replace Using Original Nia Environment General v u be de ean a eee E w Translate Translate Translation Step Fa j Add Find Delete Sif ATLAS All Selected Editor Translation m3 Detail Settings Word Word Output Original and Translation Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Output Settings Help For versions prior to and including Word 2003 1 Click the Environment Settings button on the ATLAS toolbar 2 Select the Output Settings tab and select Text Output Destination Replace Using Original and click the OK button 2 Cl
324. te carte ee CNet 213 Delete Common Dictionary 168 Delete Translation Environment 258 Delete Translation Memory Items 198 Delete User Dictionary 131 Delete Words 0 00 cee eee 153 Dictionary 05 2 26 122 231 Dictionary Download 129 Dictionary Upload 277 Dictionary in Use 000 0 ee 123 Dictionary of Origin Marks 68 Dictionary TOO s c 2 en out cox kere Soe aes 26 Display All Changeable Dictionary 135 Display Method Unregistered Word 262 Displaying the Original Text 106 Divide Translation Editor 61 Divide Sentence Automatically EJ 206 Divide Sentence Automatically JE 214 Dividing the Original Text 61 Double to single byte conversion 66 Download Common Dictionary 163 Download User Dictionary from ATLAS Internet Update Web page 129 Download User Dictionary from Translation DOIVEN ee 2b ee Gee eto TEA Sand cas aes 281 290 E English Japanese File Output 154 Error Messages 2000e ee eee 268 Excel File Translation 95 Excel Translation 000005 95 Export Translation Environment 260 EXIGNSIONin cac e deed ctiargas 57 EXiracbAIl curs oth eee a ee ee oo 155 Extract Dictionary Data 23
325. te from Translation Memory button X Et View Tool Help UTO 4nd we re going to get this done pocccocecoe G Name User dictionary0001 SCORE 45 RATE 100 And were going to get this done TLT BI CNS TIC SDV CT 2 Click the OK button for the delete confirmation message WE Inthe Translation Memory In the window 1 Select a translation memory item from the list and click the Delete button T Memory amp Replace AAdd Property Delete i I think they shoul FARSE User dictionary00 I think they ought IDS hE User dictionary00 I think they ought ICSD User dictionaryO0 I think the agreem SHB imi User dictionary00 4 translation memory was found 2 Check the message and then click the OK button 198 Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory 10 6 Using the Text Alignment Support Tool The Text Alignment Support Tool can be used to store into translation memory the source and translation files created in Word or in a text editor This tool allows you to display the contents of the source and translation files and automatically align each original segment with its translated segment The aligned results can be registered in ATLAS dictionaries as translation memory items as is Also data you are editing can be saved in vertical format TRA or as a Text Align File TRG The following describes how to use this tool with Word or text fil
326. te in country and region Si Home gt Corporate mformation gt Research and development and literary property Research and development and literary property gt gt Corporate informa Research and Research and development development and _ property j introduce the mission of the research and development of Fujitsu and topics of research and the result of various high technologies Research and gh og development 22 Translating Web Pages with Internet Explorer Web Translation eoo gt For details on how to use the ATLAS Tool Bar refer to 5 1 About the ATLAS Tool Bar in Basics on page 104 gt f you wish to upgrade Internet Explorer uninstall ATLAS lt Web Translation Internet Explorer gt Then install the latest version of Internet Explorer before re installing lt Web Translation Internet Explorer gt For details refer to Hints in 5 1 About the ATLAS Tool Bar in Basics on page 104 You can also translate a selected text area of a Web page by selecting Translate by ATLAS from the right click menu Tips Read aloud by specifying a range When you select a character string in Internet Explorer to have the selected character string read aloud right click the string and then choose Speech by ATLAS from the displayed menu Select the translation environment You can specify the translation environment used with Web Translation For details refer to 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Transl
327. tely you can activate Quick ATLAS by clicking the Windows Start button and selecting Programs All Programs ATLAS V14 0 Quick ATLAS 112 SVI1LV Puis 4L solseg Chapter 7 Quick ATLAS Basics HM Quickly starting Mouse Translation Double clicking the Quick ATLAS icon starts Mouse Translation E Easily operating ATLAS Right clicking the Quick ATLAS icon brings up a menu that you can use to display Help or a Startup Guide In addition you can use the ATLAS Menu command on this menu to quickly launch the Main Window Translation Editor and Web Translation To quit Quick ATLAS click Shut Down Quick ATLAS v Mouse Translation Automatic Clipboard Translation Key Type Translation ATLAS Main Windows ATLAS Menu Translation Editor Web Translation pone Help Startup Guide Version Information Shut Down Quick ATLAS E Configuring the Quick ATLAS environment Options SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg e Changing the type of dialog box You can select the type of dialog box that is displayed when you use Mouse Translation Key Type Translation and Automatic Clipboard Translation For details refer to Hi Changing the type of dialog box on page 120 e Setting the start key for Key Type Translation In certain PC environments you may want to set a start key for Key Type Translation For details refer to W Setting the start key for Key Type Translation on page 116 e Automatical
328. text in the Edit and send to Editor dialog box The portions where searched text corresponds with the translated text of search results are displayed in pale blue Edit and send to Editor Original would like to accept your proposal sentence Translated JO A OB AU VERDETE Oth sentence Adds color to corresponding areas of the original and translated sentences SV1LV Buisp 4L s seg Store Translation Memory OK Close Help To add the edited content to a dictionary as translation memory data click the Store Translation Memory button 3 Click the OK button The translated text is added to the mail message 6 Repeat the steps after Step 3 to create mail Hints gt You can use mail software to create sentences beforehand then search translation memory and reflect the translated text 1 Choose a sentence in the mail window and click the Search for similar sentences in Translation Memory button Am The translation memory is searched using the selected sentence 2 When you perform the following operation the sentence selected in the mail is replaced with the translated text selected in the translation memory e Select the translation memory item and click the Send to Editor button 3 e Select the translation memory item click the Edit and send to Editor button 4 and then click OK button e From the machine translation area click the Send to Editor button 3
329. the same permissions as a standard user so the Japanese reading feature is not available 74 Chapter 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor 1 Select the cell that contains a sentence you want to hear W ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 SampleWesamp txt File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help O a ja n x AUTO ge General z FHF text Translated text 2 Select Reading from the Assistance menu A character appears on the screen and begins reading the sentences in the selected cell The sentences are shown in the speech balloon while being read When you select the original text and the associated translation as a pair they are read aloud alternately If Microsoft Agent is not installed on your PC the Reading item is not available on the Assistance menu 5 ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 SampleVesamp txt File Edit Translation ESSE Dictionary Option Help D z Sentence Division General m i 3 Spelling Check alal 2 Export Undefined Word Translated text b Delete Mark Translated Sentence Format settings Translated Sentence Format Dictionary of Origin Marks Translation Memory Reading WE ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 SampleVesamp txt Original text Translated text WEAR Andy i ATS L F In the Internet an international hacker group ae Ww FILL WAFS that aimed to trespass on the comp
330. the type of dialog box 120 The following two types of dialog box are available for Mouse Translation Key Type Translation and Automatic Clipboard Translation You can select which type of dialog box is displayed For Mouse Translation and Automatic Clipboard Translation Normal mode Pop up mode ATLAS Mouse Translation Gf SOEUR nF aug AALE XEZER TO hput sentences are translated Input sentences are translated QUICK ATLAS For READING For Key Type Translation Normal mode Pop up mode A ATLAS Key Type Translation fe AUTO H Ejsamp txt Notepad ADLE LAEM D Use the following procedure to switch the type of dialog box 1 Right click the Quick ATLAS icon on the task tray and select Options Chapter 7 Quick ATLAS Basics 2 Check the Use pop up dialog when using Mouse Translation or Key Type Translation check box Quick ATLAS Options Start Quick ATLAS when startine Windows l Use pop up dialog when using Mouse Translation or Key Type Translation Shortcut Key Settings for Starting Key Type Translation Press Crtl Shift key of your choice to set shortcut key This setting will be available the next time Quick ATLAS is started Ctr Shift T i Cancel When you check Use pop up dialog when using Mouse Translation or Key Type Translation the dialog box displays in pop up dialog mode To go back to the normal mode uncheck the check box to turn the feature OFF Hints gt
331. ther procedures To use Web Translation in ATLAS V14 in this environment perform procedures 1 and 2 1 Uninstalling ATLAS V8 1 Click the Start button and select Control Panel from the Settings menu or select Control Panel 2 Double click the Add Remove Programs or Add or Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel window For Windows Vista Click the link for Uninstall or Change a Program default setting Double click the Programs and Features icon in classic view 3 Select ATLAS V8 from the list box then click Change Remove or Remove button 4 Follow the instructions in the dialog to uninstall ATLAS V8 2 1 xlpueddy Appendix 2 2 2 Installing lt Web Translation gt in ATLAS V14 1 Click the Start button and select Control Panel from the Settings menu or select Control Panel Double click the Add Remove Programs or Add or Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel window For Windows Vista Click the link for Uninstall or Change a Program default setting Double click the Programs and Features icon in classic view Select ATLAS Translation Standard V14 0 from the list box then click Change Remove or Remove button Click the Next button in the screen that appears Check the radio button for Modify in the Program Maintenance window and click Next button In the Custom Setup screen click lt Web Translation gt select Install t
332. ther window Th the window 4 Execute Clipboard Translation When Clipboard Translation is run the next time and thereafter the Clipboard Translation dialog box will not be displayed For the basics on how to use Clipboard Translation refer to Translating Contents of the Clipboard Clipboard Translation in Introduction on page 20 Hints gt To restore the setting to display the result of Clipboard Translation following the above steps in Step 3 clear the Only translate without the window when called from the main window check box r Only translate without the window when called from the main window lransiation memory window C Another window Th the window Number of Translation Memory search results 10 i gt The translation direction is automatically determined based on the original text 102 Chapter 4 Basic Operation of Clipboard Translation 4 3 Changing the ATLAS Clipboard Translation Dialog Box Display You can customize the layout of the Clipboard Translation dialog box such as by switching how the source and translation boxes are aligned horizontally or vertically and changing the display font size Changing Display Tiling 1 Click the Display Horizontally button T or Display Vertically button H amp ATLAS Clipboard Translation amp ATLAS Clipboard Translation fa Sev ne Aue fa SEV mA Aue This invention describes a multi TO ROA St BAD SAR FIC This inv
333. theses FEbIk CODES AMEE COMHPOHCRtE SAN CHS LEER LTWHEWID PSWRMFEOMBeE BUELL CLT Inb ORE mG ORO MEBI ENKI I MFORRIX OU CBO wine T ODE MI DNeBHAELKE E Clarifying the modification of complicated sentences Complicated sentences refer to those in which it is difficult to analyze the modifications They include sentences in which a prepositional phrase is placed away from its qualifying clause or words and sentences in which parallel phrases are nested Such sentences may not be interpreted correctly Action Clarifying the modification of a qualifying phrase using a comma Ex x To establish the theory verifying the details of the experiment is the aim of this job ERO FHI OL C HED S Hime HILT OOlL COHLSBORHMTT O To establish the theory verifying the details of the experiment is the aim of this job FEIRA SEARS STM SE OHRMICOU CHD OSAOlZ COHBORNTT 240 SliNsoY uoejsuei 1949g BulAsiUudY 104 SyuIH s nbiuyoa peoueApY Chapter 4 Hints on Pre Post editing for EJ Translation Action Clarifying the range of parallel phrases using control brackets Ex x A problem solution must be formulated as an algorithm and this algorithm must be expressed in the operations ERIE CT IMLAY ALE COP WAY ALE RHEL BITS ZWD I H PARRA E RIEL ITMILAY EKA A problem solution must be formulated as an algorithm and this algorithm must be expressed in the operations FIZY RAEL THERE EREL RIFIZ ECA ELT HUET COP WAY ALERRL BITNI EEA Hint
334. ting becomes effective the next time you boot Windows 8 27x11 69in lt lt 1 Specify translation range O Curent page Specification Beginning End Translation Direction auTo OE O JE ee 18 Translating in Acrobat Application Translation 5 Enter the save location and file name of the translation result and then click the Save button Set save file name Save in Q data Translation pdf File name Translation_t paf Save as type PDF Files PDF Translation_t pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional File Edit view Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window Help O Ea yal z i EA lt 3 3 PA Create PDF d Combine Files Export 7 d Start Meeting i Secure 7 A Sign 7 5 Forms 7 og Review amp Comment v WLIRTATLASOMMAVYFEBAET HUIS AiRTATLAS Windows MHSLSITIL AMM MITSLIICRECSET FF tETURTATLASO POTS LILSAIKL CHELTUETF iR fF 1 FADRL O LIZGIBRATLASOP AIVERDYYILEF ELT RIE RAREN A A MSEATVYAVERBRLET TheiRGATLASOA Izay FAP OT HRYIAMNET 2 Windows HO SESIISMRGATLASEMHOET RA FIVIMIYIA OKOMGY EDM yILET 3 BEILHEHEAWindowskI bF SROKRILAMILBVET The translation is executed whereby the layout of the original document is maintained and the translated document is saved as a separate file It is also possible to translate only the portion selected in Acrobat For details refer to E Translating sel
335. tion Internet Explorer 6 7 52 2 Basic Operation of Translation Editor The Translation Editor translates source text into the target language and displays both the source text and the translated text in parallel layout You can input text directly or read text files or other application files 2 1 Translation Editor Window E nnll Hl The Translation Editor window is displayed by clicking the Editor button in the Main Window The Translation Editor window contains the following menus and buttons E The Translation Editor window RNS ach menu displays a Original text button Translated text button pull down menu with lower Selects all original text Selects all translated text subcommands pe Edit Translation As istance Dictionary Option Help Toolbar Caf aA 3 e AUTO ELS feneri gt fal JAA AD Some commands are 0 Ungnatext o o o l ransated text displayed as buttons No button Selects all original and translated text cells nha Sentence Number Button 9 Selects original and weit translated text cells of that number Status bar Original text cell Translated text cell Displays the command Displays the original text to Displays the translated ipti bet lated text descriptions and status of Pe translate Borderline ex Translation Editor Hints gt When you right click an Original text cell Translated text cell or Sentence Number button
336. tion example Ex Original The document as follows is suitable for the translation of ATLAS Translation bIFOK 4a AY Ik ATLAS LAJARTE THEFT Word translation example Ex Original EROARE BEI HARB 1 DEL CHAT PRADO E FURICLESIOLRAS BRMICSET SRSA TS Translation 48 information O EJRME internationalization amp 12 against the background of ER thia global market amp 1 D L THA think T WABA research and development Wb 4 production juM circulation L2470 22 process 4 HIRSH international manage 4 3 enterprise ANEA increase TLS WE Selecting an output format Output Format You can output either the translated text only or output both the original and translated text in parallel layout To output the translated text only just select Translation Only To output both the original and translated text select Translation Format The Translation Format can output the original text at top and the translated text at bottom Ex Original FELRE aL TOET Translation This book describes the grammar Only Translation 4 L TOET Format This book describes the grammar E Method for displaying Unregistered Word 262 This function determines how to display unregistered items In Alphabetic Characters with kanji characters whose reading is unknown are displayed as EAN Ex Original HAS Ak AREVUUOTOE F In Japanese i AEB has caught a cold ao Palace Haganetarou has caught a
337. tion of the English and Japanese word In English notation a capitalized letter A to Z is counted as 2 characters For an idiom or irregular verb noun the maximum number of characters may decrease from 123 characters depending on the number of characters of that form 137 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 138 3 Set the details of the part of speech to add The English and Japanese words enter in the Part of Speech dialog box Noun Plural Form Regular Noun Singular and Plural Uncountable Plural M e The setting for each part of speech Meaning C Human Animal Organization Place Time Sometimes Translated as Adjective M 4 Before IO gt Adjective fex 2603188 metallic tool 2 Before Noun gt Adjective ex B7 metallic element English Adjective Add JE Add for Both Close Help For details on the setting for each part of speech refer to the following pages e EJ page 140 e JE page 142 Since the following dialog boxes do not contain any detailed settings for parts of soeech they simply display the words you will add e EJ Translation Adjective Adjective Adverb Adverb Preposition Particle e JE Translation Particle Preposition Click the Add JE or Add EJ button to use the added word for JE translation or EJ translation only or click the Add for Both button to use it for both JE and EJ translation English Adject
338. tionaries 30 Basic Dictionar 1 Technical Dictionaries 25 User Dictionaries 4 Acquire List of Server Dictionaries Automatically Next Time Download Working Area 4 Click the Delete Now button Dictionary Management Cancel Dictionary deletion starts E Delete by Schedule 1 Click the Server button in the Main Window and select Dictionary Management SS ATLAS Main Window er e Q ws 9S Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Manipulate dictionary on server or client A Al Configure Server Connection 2 Click the Acquire List button in the ATLAS Dictionary Management dialog box 283 xlpueddy Appendix 284 3 Select the dictionary to be deleted from the List of Server and click the Delete button in Server Multiple dictionaries can be selected 2 ATLAS Dictionary Management Server List of Server Modified Acquire List 25 Fe Technical Nictinnan NARNII i Basic Sample gt 75 User Dictionary 03 11 201 EEA be deleted FALERATSl User Dictionary 05 24 20 Set Schedule FRERE 0M2 User Dictionary 12 31719 5 User dictionary0001 User Dictionary 06 05 20 e lt 2 Click lt gt Log Viewer All Dictionaries 30 Basic Dictionary 1 Technical Dictionaries 25 User Dictionaries 4 Acquire List of Server Dictionaries Automatically Next Time Download
339. tionary User dictionary0001 ENG We would like to thank you very much for applying for our lt N1 management consulting service 5 gt JPNALESO lt N1 SITUA EATR LAD C RLE EA gt ENG lt N1 The original and one copy of an agreement gt are enclosed JPN lt N1 REDA Y TILED TSB SAS THES ENG think the agreement encompasses everything we talked about last week JPN SSRI AA HAA LELES EATI ALTEN Skip first line Add All Close Help 5 Click the Add All button After the data is stored the resulting information appears on the display 6 Check this information and click the Close button if the data is OK E Using Excel to Store Translation Memory Data You can store in the translation memory source and translated text pairs compiled in Excel You can also select in which user dictionary the data is stored when two or more user dictionaries are available The following procedure describes how to store translation memory data contained in selected cells The description assumes an Excel spreadsheet is already open and that it contains memory data pairs eo To register translation memory data from Excel you must install Application Translation For details on how to install see 3 1 Preparation Setup of Application Translation on page 79 Sentences entered as the original text row A in the step 1 screen must be either Japanese or English If the text contains both types of characters it cannot be reg
340. tionary ees This section describes the following two methods the way to create a new common dictionary and the way to convert a user dictionary to a common dictionary lt 2 gt If the Common Folder has not been set up you cannot use the common dictionary function Before creating a common dictionary confirm that the Common Folder is set up E Creating anew common dictionary 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window to select Translation Environment Settings and click your desired translation environment name in the displayed list The Detail Settings dialog box appears 161 Basics 2 Click the New button on the Dictionary Settings tab Detail Settings General Dictionary Settings English to Japanese Japanese to English Translation Memory List of Available Dictionaries Dictionaries Used in Translation A Common0001 EES D User dictionaryO002 s z3 User dictionary0001 Standard Dictionary 60 Business Packet lt lt Don t Use 4 61 Manual Packet 62 Mail Packet Priority 63 Entertainment Packet 64 Chat Packet 65 Patent Packet Property M nla Eml AA Racie Qam 3 Click the Common Dictionary tab set the items and then click the Create button Dictionary Property User Dietiona _ Common Ditnary lt lt _ 1 Click the Common Dictionary tab Dictionary Name Common0003 Japanese Dictionar
341. to Step 6 in 6 2 Creating Editing Translation Environments in Advanced Techniques on page 257 8 3 Working With User Dictionaries E User Dictionaries can be used to store words and translation memory and are created by the user This section describes how to operate user dictionaries Creating a User Dictionary New P 127 Downloading User Dictionaries P 129 Importing a User Dictionary from Another PC Import P 129 Deleting a User Dictionary Delete P 131 Renaming a User Dictionary P 132 Hints gt To add words to a User Dictionary you must set it as Dictionaries Used in Translation after creating it and then set it as the Changeable Dictionary the top priority dictionary in the Dictionaries Used in Translation For details refer to 8 4 Setting Changeable Dictionary on page 133 WE Creating a User Dictionary New Follow the steps below to create a User Dictionary Once you have created it it is automatically set in the List of Available Dictionaries This section describes the steps to create User dictionaryO002 with the translation environment set for General Hints gt Up to 1000 User Dictionaries can be created 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window and then select General from Translation Environment Settings 127 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 2 Click the New button Detail Settings General Dictionary Settings English to Ja
342. to set an uncountable such as news information and coffee e Plural Select to set a noun such as people or police gt For irregular nouns add singular and plural forms separately Ex book of account 3 Uncountable books of account 3 Plural Verb Verb EJ Negative Form Ligh Verb Pattern C htransitive C Transitive Both Form Past Past Participle Present Participle Present after He Objective Particle x Negative Form The negative form for the translation Japanese is displayed When there are several possible negative forms you can select one of them from the list box Verb Pattern Select the English verb pattern Form The form of the verb in the English box is displayed in each entry box for Past Past Participle Present Participle and Present after He If the displayed form is inappropriate click each entry box and enter the appropriate form 140 Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary Objective Particle Select an objective particle for the Japanese verb after selecting Transitive or Both for Verb Pattern Verb Adjective EJ Verb Pattern C Intransitive C Transitive Both Form Past _ a OES Past Participle eeen Present Participle a Present after He Po Objective Particle hh v Verb Pattern Select the English verb pattern Form The form of the verb in the English box is displayed in each entry box for Past Past Partici
343. tor memory components The Edit and send to Editor dialog box appears and you can use this dialog box Display Switching to edit and reflect the selected translated Used to switch the text Translation Memory screen i configuration Delete Translation Memory Deletes selected translation memory agga vajada Ag lee Help Displays Help Simple View Word correspondence Word correspondence Displays only original and translated selected sentence only all search results text stored in translation memory Corresponding words are color coded A previous sentence W next sentence Searches and translates original text of the previous or next sentence number in the Translation Editor These buttons are only displayed when the Translation Memory window is started from the Translation Editor 187 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 188 Search Bar auro l Translation Memory Search box Enter the original text you want to search the translation memory for Switch Translation Direction Changes the language of the original text when searching The language is changed in the following order aura gt E J gt JE Poo AA Search button oo The translation memory is searched for the content entered in the translation memory search box Tiling the Translation Editor Window splitting it into two windows Selecting Translation Memory Align Windows from the Assistance menu in
344. tor and JE files Translation Environment i_Add All Words Select the translation environment settings best suited for your document Adds multiple words to a user dictionary at once Detail Settings j Add To Translation Memory Create a new translation Adds linked original translation environment or change text data as translation memory the settings to a user dictionary ATLAS Toolbar for Excel 2003 a All Sentence Translation h Word Registration Template b Sheet Translation i Add All Word c Selected Sentence j Add All Translation Memory Translation e m Quit Translating g Find Delete Word f Add Word d Translation Editor ATLAS Help ATLAS Word Entry Support k Word Entry Support E Translating all sheets of an Excel book All Sentence Translation You can translate all sheets of an Excel book and replace the text contents with the translated results Open the Excel worksheet and proceed to the following steps 96 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation 1 Click the Translate All button on the ATLAS tab or on the toolbar ATLAS Q ee es Direction AUTO y Ei 1 Word Registration Template Xi Environment General v aS Add All Words Translate ranslate Translate Translation Add Find Delete _ ATLAS Sheet Selected Editor vq Detail Settings Word Word Add To Translation Memory Help Translate Translate Edit Environment Settings Dictionary Batch Add Help E T
345. translation direction A word displayed using Display All Changeable Dictionary cannot be stopped The stop mark x is not attached to a stopped word displayed using Display All Changeable Dictionary 8 9 Deleting Words Delete ae Among the words found those registered in the Changeable Dictionary can be deleted eo Words registered in a Non Changeable Dictionary cannot be deleted A stopped word marked with x cannot be deleted Release the stopped state click the Cancel Not Usable button on the Find Delete Word dialog box before deleting the word 1 Search for the word you want to delete For details refer to 8 7 Finding Words Registered in Dictionaries on page 149 2 Select the word you want to delete and then click the Delete button Find Delete Word Japanese gt English Environment General al Changeable C uonary User dictionaryUUUN Z words ya Search Japanese English nkSg book of account Priority Add hinred Not Usable 153 SV1LV Buisp 4L s seg Basics Hints gt Words marked with the Ef icon can be deleted 3 Confirm the message and click the Yes button 8 10 Listing All Words and Translation Memory Word and Translation Memory File Output 154 A list of words or translation memory items registered in a User Dictionary can be output as a text file A word added to the Changeable Dictionary is output in one of the following f
346. trons and a Find Delete Word HCHO ATS TBR photocurrent in several regions in respor sL Chas Teta 3 Select the translated word you wish to replace it with and click the Replace button Check to increase the chance that the selected translation is used the next time it appears Change Word Learn Original Word regions Translated Word Add pword i ick Cancel v Help 1 Select translation Dictionary Name Standard Dictionary Only the selected translated word is replaced lf an appropriate translation is not found in the list you may register a new word by clicking the Add Word button For details about word registration refer to 8 6 Adding Words in Basics on page 136 For details about selecting translation refer to 2 15 Selecting a Translated Word Used for Further Translation Change Word in Basics on page 72 11 Introduction Saving the translation results 1 Click the Save As button on the tool bar 5 ATLAS Translation Editor C Program Files ATLAS V14 Sample Ejsamp txt File Edit Trecsostion Assistance Dictionary Option Help Dis Xi al ole ao golem Teall e Original text Translated text This invention describes a multi mode optical TORIR eS ik THRAT ODA 1 switching device comprising several regions the DET Sz ILFE Paty tL See le interfacing with inorganic semiconductors DL VCEREALET Each mode generates positrons and a
347. tus Notes are registered trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation Eudora is a registered trademark of QUALCOMM Incorporated Becky Internet Mail is a registered trademark or trademark of RimArts Inc Other company and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Screen shots are reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation ATLAS V14 User s Guide BiWD 0991 01EN 00 Edition 1 December 2007 The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice All Rights Reserved Copyright Fujitsu Limited 2007 Printed in Japan Contents and Use of This Manual Organization of This Manual This manual is intended for users installing ATLAS using ATLAS for the first time or wanting to check particular functions while using ATLAS This manual is composed of Introduction Basics Advanced Techniques and Appendix Read them according to your need Introduction Welcome to ATLAS Explains preliminary operations of each ATLAS function Be sure to read this before operation Basics Try Using ATLAS Explains ATLAS functions Read this when you want to check various functions available in ATLAS Advanced Techniques Hints for achieving better Translation Results Explains how to use ATLAS effectively including how to add words translation memory items and how to set the translation environment Appendix Explains supplementary uses of ATLAS such as sh
348. uoIe sues JONeg BulAsiUudY JO SjuIL s nbiuyoa peoueApY Advanced Techniques E Export Translation Environment 1 3 4 Perform the procedures described in 6 1 Displaying Lists of Translation Environments on page 256 Select the name of the translation environment you wish to export in the Translation Environment List and then click the Export button Delete Entertainment Restore Settines Import Close Help Translation Environment Settings Translation Environment List 1 Select Translation Environment lt lt 2 Click Specify save translation environment name file and click the Save button Save Translation Environment Mame tile Save in B My Documents My Music A My Pictures E Business ten File name General ten save as Ippe Translation Environment Name Files TEN Cancel The translation environment name is exported If there is already a translation environment with the same name an overwrite confirmation message appears Click the Yes button to overwrite Click the Close button Hints gt The translation environment name of the translation environment name file is retained in the file Therefore the translation environment name is not changed at the time of importing even if you change the filename of the exported translation environment name file 260 Chapter 6 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment Settings 6
349. use sentences manual explaining functions are usually clear Mecon Scanning even though they are relatively long manua Presentation Highly useful because sentences are Sh material OHP short though there are abbreviations Thesis technical Highly useful when sentences are short documents Highly useful Newspapers Translation Not so applicable because there are magazines many current terms mass media jargon and also abbreviations Patent Highly useful when sentences are short Highly useful Contracts Requires a lot of attention for expressions unique to legal documents Letters Requires a lot of attention because feelings and special nuances need to be conveyed E mail Requires a lot of attention because feelings and special nuances need to be conveyed Not so applicable because there are many unique expressions and abbreviations Advertising pamphlets Not so suitable because there are many x expressions that appeal to personal feelings and other literary and special expressions a Oo a Symbols for Degree of Suitability Well suited Suited Suited for J to E translation by ATLAS but requires attention for E to J translation Translation requires attention Not suitable for translation x BD OO 46 Chapter 1 Basic ATLAS Functions 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment ATLAS provides various translation environments according to the
350. ut Translation button on the ATLAS toolbar J_UsersGuide pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional File Edit View Document Crsments Forms Tools Advanced Window ATLAS Help DO o s e 11 316 1 BRI ONeHRTS ATLAS DHR SI BF zikin irt i ee MVYIAVBETAAILT NBA D SAF eH CHRGHANTET I FTCAASNTHS ERTS ZOCRY I EXPT SAAd TEATAS S Layout Translation Ranee of Translation O All pages O Current page BEscitication Beeinnine End Translation Direction auTO OE JE lt t 1 Specify translation range lt Click 3 Enter the save location and file name of the translation result and click the Save button Set save file name swen Oeme orem Save as type POF Files PDF ka Cancel vy Translation starts 84 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Application Translation E Translating Text on Displayed Pages The text on an PDF document page is translated 1 Open the PDF document in Adobe Reader to the page you wish to translate Check the Current Page indication J_UsersGuide pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional File Edit View Document Comments Forms Tools Advanced Window ATLAS Help ogna E y j Ok Ww E 100 e Create PDF Es combine Files Go Exot 2 i 2 Click the Page Translation button on the ATLAS toolbar J_UsersGuide pdf Adobe Acrobat Professional File Edit View Document Comments Fo
351. ut and Type of Dialog Box 119 Key Type Translation Shortcut key 116 L Layout Translation 84 WING NCCC 2 02 Ge sae gana o oN eee sem Gee 261 Lower to uppercase conversion 66 M Mach value 0 0 cee eee eee 42 Mail Translation 24 49 109 Mail Translation Automatically Starting 111 Mail Translation Shortcut key 110 Mail Translation toolbar 110 MAV Fete Pogo ete Sak cd ae ated ss arash iS 211 MEANING 3 e 205ou sce pone oes S eee es 4 140 142 Merge Dictionary Data 232 Merging Dividing the Orijinal Text 61 MIGHT es Gab ctce Seno ee ag ores Ghee ee Se ees 211 Modification EJ 000008 244 Modification JE 32 2 3 beetle eek 253 MORE THAN lt 4 d524 454 024 wid ebay 207 Mouse Translation 48 113 Mouse Translation Layout and Type of Dialog Box 119 Multi sense word 5000005 254 U Ane Peer er E ner a ee 211 MUST Bete coe rT a ees es 212 N Negative Form 140 141 143 144 Normal mode Type of dialog box 120 Not omitting subject or object JE 248 Noun Meaning Number 147 NOUN PhlaS s 3 0 Give riora aaya iaai 218 Noun Plural Form 140 141 142 145 Noun Adjective EJ 005 227 Noun Noun EJ 000 140 225 Noun Noun JE 142 220 Numen esera ei ow a eee A
352. uter network _ TOES A RSL Yas The Iposted the secret software unlawfully acquired MI yk EIHTU from the network of the U S major brokerage firm Reccsesesceseeeees EZL Wires RO BBs BARISED HiT leE group sets the following target to Ja BERELT l agers 19 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics Hints gt The function can read two or more selected cells in sequence gt During reading a Break menu appears and the Break button amp appears on the toolbar Clicking the Break menu or Break button halts reading on a line basis i e for the cell that includes the original text and the associated translation gt Right clicking the character and selecting Hide from the displayed pop up menu immediately halts reading gt The Speech Function cannot be used simultaneously in multiple screens gt Follow these procedures to change the speech speed 1 Click the Environment button on the Main Window and select Reading Option The Reading Option dialog box appears 2 Click the Option button The Advanced Character Options dialog box appears 3 Click the Output tab and follow the instructions on the screen to change the speech speed 2 18 Printing the Translation Results You can print out both the original text and its translated text from the Translation Editor window The print format can be horizontal layout vertical layout original text only or translated text only 1 Click the Print
353. utomatic selection AUTO ATLAS detects the language of the original text and selects the translation direction automatically lf you have an undesirable translation result in AUTO mode you may solve it by switching the translation direction 1 Click Translation Direction of the toolbar The translation direction is switched in the following sequence each time you click the button p gt ac ey 2 4 Saving the Translation Results __ This section describes the output format and method used to save translation results E Files created by ATLAS Text translated by the Translation Editor can be output into the following 6 types of files You specify the output format when saving or printing ATLAS translation results Each file is identified by its extension The following defines the file types and their extensions File type Explanation Horizontal A data file translated by the Translation Editor This file has translation file not only the original and translated text but also information such as word correspondence also information such as word correspondence Vertical translation file A data file translated by the Translation Editor This file has the original and translated text one after the other This isa text file and can be edited with Notepad or other applications Combined trd A data file used by the Translation Editor This file can be used translation file when you load Office or PDF docum
354. utton arrow key dialog box Selects the radio button of the selected set item Character key of each command dialog box Executes the applicable command 26 7 xlpueddy gt B_ Error Messages This section describes ATLAS error messages Another version of the ATLAS coordinated function was detected Meaning ATLAS Application Translation function of another version was detected during installation of Application Translation function Cause ATLAS Application Translation function of another version has been installed Action It is possible that problems may occur due to the coexistence of ATLAS Application Translation function with other versions It is recommended that you delete the ATLAS Application Translation function of other versions by clicking the YES button Because the following products are running the coordinated translation functions will not be uninstalled target application Meaning Application Translation function cannot be uninstalled as the target application of Application Translation function is active Cause The target application of Application Translation function is active Action Be sure to exit the application before uninstalling Application Translation If Word is specified for the Outlook mail format Word is opened automatically In this case close Outlook also If you attempt to uninstall the Application Translation function while the target application is running a me
355. ve refers to a verb requiring an object Add an idiom including a preposition or adverb as a transitive verb if a noun should follow it Ex gothrough GY tkIt4 Transitive since a noun follows it e g go through the wall go back R4 Intransitive since no noun follows it Add an idiom as an intransitive verb however if it is added together with an object Ex go through college Intransitive since no noun follows tt KFEBRT D 147 SVI1LV Puis 4L solseg Basics Reference for Japanese verb form py shea is a verb whose stem ends in i or e and UL is added in negative form EX G4 REL Ex Eh n a stem ja ZL in negative form z O B Exi a stem 184 7U in negative form IE D TRL Not FXehid a stem Y 541 in negative form Plural form number table E Savane Psa se der anes O OOOO i Gc Regular noun e sh do gO S X Z None of the above For EJ a noun cannot be specified as an o noun When adding an irregular noun add the singular form as an uncountable noun 7 and the plural form as a plural noun 8 respectively Ex B DPY EA policeman 7 13 B EDY SA policemen 8 13 2 For a compound noun in which a word other than the last changes its form specify it as an Irregular noun In the above case for example specify books of account as the plural form Japanese negative form Check or select the negative form of the Japanese w
356. vironment Help Find Delete the word Ed EJ Add Word BNE Find Delete Word T EJ Extract All 2 Click the Display All Changeable Dictionary button Find Delete Word Japanese gt English Environment General bd Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0001 Words Searched Word Japanese English Add Word m D The words registered in the Changeable Dictionary appear Words in this dictionary can be deleted and new words can be added Find Delete Word Japanese gt English Environment General Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0001 1 Words Searched Word Japanese English TT PD xyvah ib IT Professional Add Word Delete arias kohia K Changeable dictionary User dictionary0001 F Display All IT A Changeable Dictionary Meaning Abstract object Plural form Regul ural form Regular v Close Help Ceo If you have set a developer provided user dictionary such as Internet Update as the Changeable Dictionary you cannot display the entire changeable dictionary 135 SV1LV Buisp 4L solseg Basics 8 6 Adding Words re This section explains how to add words to the user dictionary set as the Changeable Dictionary and how to find the added words Japanese words and their English translations or English words and their Japanese translations can be added to a User Dictionary English words and their Japanese translatio
357. which is set to 100 Match by default in the translation environment to 70 or over match Fuzzy match 1 Start the Translation Editor and click the Translation Environment button W ATLAS Translation Editor untitled File Edit Translation Assistance Dictionary Option Help Original text Translated a 2 If necessary import the sample translation memory dictionary 66 Basic Sample into the List of Available Dictionaries displayed in the left panel of the Dictionary Settings tab Select 66 Basic Sample and click the Use gt gt button Detail Settings General Dictionary Settings English to Japanese Japanese to English Translation Memory List of Available Dictionaries i Dictionaries Used in Translation A G0 Business Packet gt I A 2 Click 61 Manual Packet Jd User dictionary0002 62 Mail Packet lt Don t Use Standard Dictionary 63 Entertainment Packet fg G4oChat Packet pa 6m Fatent Packet Hew 66 Basic Sample E Patenty Procedure Packet M Import Changeable Dictionary i User dictionary0001 Common Dictionary Help Priority oeei 1 Select the dictionary 31 uo1 0npo1 u Introduction 3 Click the Translation Memory tab then set the Match Value of Used Translation Memory setting to 70 i Click the Translation Memory tab Detail Settings General Dictionary Settings English to Japanese Japanese to Eneli
358. window Store Translation Memory Data Search Edit Translation Memory Data Translation Memory Translation Editor Another window Translation Memory In the window TER PE 45 RATE 100 DE OSG 00 ABS Name User dictionaryO00 And re ming to get this done And Fg going to gat this tL Cea nz TS aE BRS User dictionaryO001 75 J0 E 69 Ard we re going to got this done Search Edit Translation Memory Text a tra txt am P Text Alignment Support Tool Can be accessed from Translation Editor 1 Mail Translation Clipboard Translation Quick ATLAS Mouse Translation Automatic Clipboard Translation Acrobat Translation Adobe Reader Translation 2 Word Translation at the time of Step Translation tm et Genres arma heb SPF VRE XR OF wns 1 Only Translation Memory Another window 2 Only Translation Memory In the window Hints gt An overview of the translation memory and its mechanism are explained in Utilizing Translation Memory Translation Memory in Introduction on page 29 Refer to that page as well 174 SVI1LV Puis 4L solseg Chapter 10 Using the Translation Memory 10 1 Searching Stored Translation Memory Data The reuse of accumulated translation memory items greatly simplifies the translation process Searching Stored Translation Memory Data in the Translation Editor Searching Store
359. wing procedure to solve the problem 1 Solve the problem_in the Common Folder 1 Display the Common Dictionary dialog box A list of dictionaries in the Common Folder appears in the Common Dictionary List at the center of the dialog box 2 Check the Common Dictionary List to see if there are two or more dictionaries with the names pointed out by the error message When the common dictionaries of the same name exist The administrator of the common dictionary pointed out by the error message must change the common dictionary name and upload it to the Common Folder When the dictionary pointed by the error message is not necessary the administrator of the common dictionary can delete the common dictionary Deletion can be performed using the Common Folder Management Tool page 169 as well When there is no duplicated common dictionary name The Common Folder does not have the problem Proceed to Step 2 2 Solve the problem in user s PC 1 Procedure differs according to the condition as follows The dictionary pointed out by the error message is not necessary Delete the dictionary The dictionary pointed out by the error message is necessary Proceed to Step 2 lf the common dictionary is the downloaded common dictionary x Pink icon there is no other way than deleting the dictionary so delete it 2 Procedure differs depending on the above type of causes part 1 to part 3 Cause Part 1 Change the dictionary name of the di
360. word For details on the dictionary icon refer to Hi About the dictionary icon in the dialog box on page 125 WE Searching for words whose beginning text strings match 150 Finds a word whose initial part matches the specified string and displays the results according to the code order Add after the word you want to search for Searching words that begin with tactic is used as an example to explain operation 1 Click the Tool button in the Main Window and then select EJ Find Delete Word V ATLAS Main Window w E S9 e FS B amp F A B GB Editor Clipboard Mail Quick ATLAS Web Useful Tool Server Tool Environment Help Find Delete the word EA EJ Add Word Poy EJ Find Delete Word EJ Extract All 2 Select the English and then type tactic in the entry box 1 Check Find Delete Word English gt Jd fanese Environment General 2 Enter nen after the Changeable Dictionary User dint Words word to search for Searched Word C Japanese ftactic cona 3 Click the Search button Find Delete Word Enelish gt Japanese Environment General o x Changeable Dictionary User dictionaryO001 Morde Searched Word C Japanese English actie Search Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary The search results are displayed as shown below Find Delete Word English gt Japanese Environment General bd Changeable Dictionary User dictionary0001 144 Word
361. words enclosed in the specified type of brackets For details please refer to 2 9 Checking Spelling Errors Spelling Check in Basics on page 64 Ceo The same type of brackets cannot be set for Control Non Translation Brackets and Spelling Check Mark Brackets Chapter 1 Setting the Translation Style Translation Style 1 2 Translation Style JE Translation _ WE Style 1 Code of Translation Specifies how single byte and double byte characters should be used in the translated text The following example shows translation to show in Japanese from Method for Displaying Unregistered Word Original text 4 nOit lt THRE RELEE Setting Translated text 1 or 2 byte code Maintain 4K near it Kana 1 byte 1 byte code Maintain near it 2 byte code Maintain 33232 k near it 2 Present Participle Specifies how a present progressive sentence should be translated Original text IsRMeEFIYILTLS Setting Translated text 3 Date Specifies how dates should be translated Original text 2005 8 1 A Setting Translated text January 1 1990 August 1 2005 The first of January 1990 The first of August 2005 4 For Newspaper Specify whether the translation is to be performed in a newspaper article style Original text Bik RERE RA Setting Translated text Fujitsu and the machine translation are developed Fujitsu has developed the machine translation 213 syns y uoejsuei
362. xplains an faa Slice eE ET optical switching device of the SF ILFE P OFS UREA multimode that comprises rit HEAL TT Some areas connected with an Inorganic semiconductor Original Text box Translated Text box Hints The font size used in the original and translated text boxes can be changed by clicking the Font Settings button A in the Clipboard Translation dialog box 20 Translating Contents of the Clipboard Clipboard Translation 3 Edit the contents if necessary When you edit the original text Click the Start Translation button to re translate When you edit the translated text Click the Copy Content of Translated text Box button to copy the translation result E Click here after editing the contents in the Translated text box Oo FEHR SHEED H T This invention explains an ft SL iC DMD PARADES optical switching device of the DZTIVFE FORFMIRRE multimode that comprises IXDL iT sHOALE TF some areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor Original Text box Translated Text box 4 Paste the translated text into the original file Tips P Jesamp Notepad M oi File Edit Format View Help COEUR OFA ol R a SLE PO Reel ot CEREALS This invention explains an optical switching device of the multimode that comprises some areas connected with an inorganic semiconductor Automatically Translating the Contents of the Clipboard You can automaticall
363. y JJCWOOO3 DIG English Dictionary JECWOO03 DIG Administrator YFUYAMA Computer Name IFUYAMA ts n i Cancel Help 2 Click Confirm the message and click the Yes button When the common dictionary upload processing confirmation dialog box appears always click the OK button The screen returns to the Dictionary Settings tab of the Detail Settings dialog box The created common dictionary is added to the List of Available Dictionaries box Click the OK button of the Detail Settings dialog box A dialog box appears asking you to confirm saving To overwrite the current translation environment click Save and the OK button To save it as a new translation environment click Save as enter an environment name in the Environment Name box and click the OK button E Converting a user dictionary to a common dictionary You can convert a user dictionary to a common dictionary The converted common dictionary can be converted back to a user dictionary Ceo 162 gt When the user dictionary to be converted has been set in the Dictionaries Used in Translation box you cannot convert it to a common dictionary Click the lt lt Don t Use button to move the user dictionary to the List of Available Dictionaries box 1 Click the Environment button in the Main Window to select Translation Environment Settings and click your desired translation environment name in the displayed list The Detail Settin
364. y box and select the plural form from Noun Plural Form For an irregular noun enter the plural form in Irregular noun The word entered here is called a derived word Adjective Adjective JE Sometimes Translated as Adverb Yes English Adverb fex 1 gt slow 384 slowly fete gt quiet APIT quietly Sometimes Translated as Adverb Set whether an adjective can be used as an adverb If so check the Yes checkbox and enter the corresponding English adverb in the English Adverb entry box The word entered here is called a derived word Adjective Verb JE Form Past Po Past Participle C Present Participle sj Present after He Sometimes Translated as Adverb Yes English Adverb 77mm Cll EAU WE gt bloom ENLITI prettily Form The form of the verb in the English Verb box is displayed in each entry box for Past Past Participle Present Participle and Present after He If the displayed form is inappropriate click each entry box and enter the appropriate form Sometimes Translated as Adverb Set whether an adjective can be used as an adverb If so check the Yes checkbox and enter the corresponding English adverb in the English Adverb entry box The word entered here is called a derived word 144 Chapter 8 Using the Dictionary Adverb Adverb JE Position C t the Beginning of Sentence C Before Verb After
365. y changed from the old version but also newly added sentences so that in many cases translation can be completed by simply changing part of the translation In addition manuals that use straightforward expressions are suitable for automatic translation for which translation memory is not used and translation results close to what you expect can be obtained For the actual revised manual translation work first display and edit the existing manual translation result original and translation in the Translation Editor and perform batch addition to the translation memory At this time it is more effective if you use Add Word to store unique terms such as product and function names Next use Word Translation to use the translation memory for the revised manual After that review the translation to occasionally edit store the translation memory data to accumulate translation memory 43 SVI1LV Puis 4L solseg Basics 44 At this time the larger the translation memory the greater the match value of the translation memory eventually increasing translation work efficiency and maintaining consistent translation quality Store Translation Memory Data Translation Editor Demas Or pm Vigng text 4 ee ee Ahan re sve Fr PETIR KORE I RALF Eed at arasin weweow n a 2 Semmens cr CR FERRE REST T je s oo capres wu apan A ory ore gt ae feeceesnis PORTH ha apis ar Dee fen Patne sir Store Text File Pg Pg
366. y translate data copied to the clipboard simultaneously when it is copied For details refer to 7 4 Automatically Translating Text on the Clipboard Automatic Clipboard Translation in Basics on page 117 Select the translation environment You can select the translation environment used with Clipboard Translation For details refer to 1 4 Setting the Translation Environment Translation Environment in Basics on page 47 Change the translation direction For Clipboard Translation the translation direction is recognized automatically by default When both English and Japanese are used in the original text however the direction can be specified before translation In this case you can change the translation direction by clicking the rie button The button changes to E7 to translate from English into Japanese or to J to translate from Japanese into English The translation direction remains changed until quitting Clipboard Translation Translating using Translation Memory Clipboard Translation makes it easy to translate into the target language of your choice using Translation Memory For details refer to Hi Searching Stored Translation Memory Data in Clipboard Translation in Basics on page 181 uo1 0npo1 u Translating Web Pages with Internet Explorer Web Translation When Internet Explorer 6 7 is installed on your PC you can translate Web pages This function requires installation of We

Fujitsu V14 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents